Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA® Series 2 Field-Programmable Gate Arrays Features ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ High-performance, cost-effective, low-power 0.35 µm CMOS technology (OR2CxxA), 0.3 µm CMOS technology (OR2TxxA), and 0.25 µm CMOS technology (OR2TxxB), (four-input look-up table (LUT) delay less than 1.0 ns with -8 speed grade) High density (up to 43,200 usable, logic-only gates; or 99,400 gates including RAM) Up to 480 user I/Os (OR2TxxA and OR2TxxB I/Os are 5 V tolerant to allow interconnection to both 3.3 V and 5 V devices, selectable on a per-pin basis) Four 16-bit look-up tables and four latches/flip-flops per PFU, nibble-oriented for implementing 4-, 8-, 16-, and/or 32-bit (or wider) bus structures Eight 3-state buffers per PFU for on-chip bus structures Fast, on-chip user SRAM has features to simplify RAM design and increase RAM speed: — Asynchronous single port: 64 bits/PFU — Synchronous single port: 64 bits/PFU — Synchronous dual port: 32 bits/PFU Improved ability to combine PFUs to create larger RAM structures using write-port enable and 3-state buffers Fast, dense multipliers can be created with the multiplier mode (4 x 1 multiplier/PFU): — 8 x 8 multiplier requires only 16 PFUs — 30% increase in speed Flip-flop/latch options to allow programmable priority of synchronous set/reset vs. clock enable Enhanced cascadable nibble-wide data path capabilities for adders, subtractors, counters, multipliers, and comparators including internal fast-carry operation ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Innovative, abundant, and hierarchical nibbleoriented routing resources that allow automatic use of internal gates for all device densities without sacrificing performance Upward bit stream compatible with the ORCA ATT2Cxx/ ATT2Txx series of devices Pinout-compatible with new ORCA Series 3 FPGAs TTL or CMOS input levels programmable per pin for the OR2CxxA (5 V) devices Individually programmable drive capability: 12 mA sink/6 mA source or 6 mA sink/3 mA source Built-in boundary scan (IEEE *1149.1 JTAG) and 3-state all I/O pins, (TS_ALL) testability functions Multiple configuration options, including simple, low pincount serial ROMs, and peripheral or JTAG modes for insystem programming (ISP) Full PCI bus compliance for all devices Supported by industry-standard CAE tools for design entry, synthesis, and simulation with ORCA Foundry Development System support (for back-end implementation) New, added features (OR2TxxB) have: — More I/O per package than the OR2TxxA family — No dedicated 5 V supply (VDD5) — Faster configuration speed (40 MHz) — Pin selectable I/O clamping diodes provide 5V or 3.3V PCI compliance and 5V tolerance — Full PCI bus compliance in both 5V and 3.3V PCI systems * IEEE is a registered trademark of The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. Table 1. ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Device Usable Gates* # LUTs Registers Max User RAM Bits User I/Os Array Size OR2C04A/OR2T04A OR2C06A/OR2T06A OR2C08A/OR2T08A OR2C10A/OR2T10A OR2C12A/OR2T12A OR2C15A/OR2T15A/OR2T15B OR2C26A/OR2T26A OR2C40A/OR2T40A/OR2T40B 4,800—11,000 6,900—15,900 9,400—21,600 12,300—28,300 15,600—35,800 19,200—44,200 27,600—63,600 43,200—99,400 400 576 784 1024 1296 1600 2304 3600 400 576 724 1024 1296 1600 2304 3600 6,400 9,216 12,544 16,384 20,736 25,600 36,864 57,600 160 192 224 256 288 320 384 480 10 x 10 12 x 12 14 x 14 16 x 16 18 x 18 20 x 20 24 x 24 30 x 30 * The first number in the usable gates column assumes 48 gates per PFU (12 gates per four-input LUT/FF pair) for logic-only designs. The second number assumes 30% of a design is RAM. PFUs used as RAM are counted at four gates per bit, with each PFU capable of implementing a 16 x 4 RAM (or 256 gates) per PFU. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Table of Contents Contents Page Features ...................................................................... 1 Description................................................................... 3 ORCA Foundry Development System Overview......... 5 Architecture ................................................................. 5 Programmable Logic Cells .......................................... 5 Programmable Function Unit ................................... 5 Look-Up Table Operating Modes ............................ 7 Latches/Flip-Flops ................................................. 15 PLC Routing Resources ........................................ 17 PLC Architectural Description................................ 22 Programmable Input/Output Cells ............................. 25 Inputs ..................................................................... 25 Outputs .................................................................. 26 5 V Tolerant I/O (OR2TxxB) .................................. 27 PCI Compliant I/O.................................................. 27 PIC Routing Resources ......................................... 28 PIC Architectural Description................................. 29 PLC-PIC Routing Resources ................................. 30 Interquad Routing ...................................................... 32 Subquad Routing (OR2C40A/OR2T40A Only)...... 34 PIC Interquad (MID) Routing ................................. 36 Programmable Corner Cells ...................................... 37 Programmable Routing.......................................... 37 Special-Purpose Functions.................................... 37 Clock Distribution Network ........................................ 37 Primary Clock ........................................................ 37 Secondary Clock ................................................... 38 Selecting Clock Input Pins ..................................... 39 FPGA States of Operation......................................... 40 Initialization............................................................ 40 Configuration ......................................................... 41 Start-Up ................................................................. 42 Reconfiguration ..................................................... 42 Partial Reconfiguration .......................................... 43 Other Configuration Options .................................. 43 Configuration Data Format ........................................ 43 Using ORCA Foundry to Generate Configuration RAM Data..................................... 44 Configuration Data Frame ..................................... 44 Bit Stream Error Checking......................................... 47 FPGA Configuration Modes....................................... 47 Master Parallel Mode............................................. 47 Master Serial Mode ............................................... 48 Asynchronous Peripheral Mode ............................ 49 Synchronous Peripheral Mode .............................. 49 Slave Serial Mode ................................................. 50 Slave Parallel Mode............................................... 50 Daisy Chain ........................................................... 51 Special Function Blocks ............................................ 52 Single Function Blocks .......................................... 52 Boundary Scan ...................................................... 54 2 Contents Page Boundary-Scan Instructions...................................55 ORCA Boundary-Scan Circuitry ............................56 ORCA Timing Characteristics....................................60 Estimating Power Dissipation ....................................61 OR2CxxA...............................................................61 OR2TxxA ...............................................................63 OR2T15B and OR2T40B.......................................65 Pin Information ..........................................................66 Pin Descriptions.....................................................66 Package Compatibility ...........................................68 Compatibility with Series 3 FPGAs ........................70 Package Thermal Characteristics............................126 QJA ......................................................................126 yJC.......................................................................126 QJC......................................................................126 QJB......................................................................126 Package Coplanarity ...............................................127 Package Parasitics ..................................................127 Absolute Maximum Ratings .....................................129 Recommended Operating Conditions......................129 Electrical Characteristics .........................................130 Timing Characteristics .............................................132 Series 2................................................................160 Measurement Conditions.........................................169 Output Buffer Characteristics...................................170 OR2CxxA.............................................................170 OR2TxxA .............................................................171 OR2TxxB .............................................................172 Package Outline Drawings ......................................173 Terms and Definitions ..........................................173 84-Pin PLCC........................................................174 100-Pin TQFP......................................................175 144-Pin TQFP......................................................176 160-Pin QFP ........................................................177 208-Pin SQFP......................................................178 208-Pin SQFP2....................................................179 240-Pin SQFP......................................................180 240-Pin SQFP2....................................................181 256-Pin PBGA .....................................................182 304-Pin SQFP......................................................183 304-Pin SQFP2....................................................184 352-Pin PBGA .....................................................185 432-Pin EBGA .....................................................186 Ordering Information................................................187 Index ........................................................................189 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Description The ORCA Series 2 series of SRAM-based FPGAs are an enhanced version of the ATT2C/2T architecture. The latest ORCA series includes patented architectural enhancements that make functions faster and easier to design while conserving the use of PLCs and routing resources. The Series 2 devices can be used as drop-in replacements for the ATT2Cxx/ATT2Txx series, respectively, and they are also bit stream compatible with each other. The usable gate counts associated with each series are provided in Table 1. Both series are offered in a variety of packages, speed grades, and temperature ranges. The ORCA series FPGA consists of two basic elements: programmable logic cells (PLCs) and program- mable input/output cells (PICs). An array of PLCs is surrounded by PICs as shown in Figure 1. Each PLC contains a programmable function unit (PFU). The PLCs and PICs also contain routing resources and configuration RAM. All logic is done in the PFU. Each PFU contains four 16-bit look-up tables (LUTs) and four latches/flip-flops (FFs). The PLC architecture provides a balanced mix of logic and routing that allows a higher utilized gate/PFU than alternative architectures. The routing resources carry logic signals between PFUs and I/O pads. The routing in the PLC is symmetrical about the horizontal and vertical axes. This improves routability by allowing a bus of signals to be routed into the PLC from any direction. Some examples of the resources required and the performance that can be achieved using these devices are represented in Table 2. Table 2. ORCA Series 2 System Performance Function 16-bit loadable up/down counter 16-bit accumulator 8 x 8 parallel multiplier: — Multiplier mode, unpipelined1 — ROM mode, unpipelined2 — Multiplier mode, pipelined3 32 x 16 RAM: — Single port (read and write/ cycle)4 — Single port5 — Dual port6 36-bit parity check (internal) 32-bit address decode (internal) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Speed Grade # PFUs -2A -3A -4A -5A -6A -7A -7B -8B 4 51.0 66.7 87.0 104.2 129.9 144.9 131.6 149.3 MHz 4 51.0 66.7 87.0 104.2 129.9 144.9 131.6 149.3 MHz 22 9 44 14.2 41.5 50.5 19.3 55.6 69.0 25.1 71.9 82.0 31.0 87.7 103.1 36.0 107.5 125.0 40.3 122.0 142.9 37.7 103.1 123.5 44.8 120.5 142.9 MHz MHz MHz 9 21.8 28.6 36.2 53.8 53.8 62.5 57.5 69.4 MHz 9 16 4 3.25 38.2 38.2 13.9 12.3 52.6 52.6 11.0 9.5 69.0 83.3 9.1 7.5 92.6 92.6 7.4 6.1 92.6 92.6 96.2 96.2 97.7 97.7 112.4 112.4 5.6 5.2 6.1 5.1 4.6 4.3 4.8 4.0 MHz MHz ns ns Unit Implemented using 4 x 1 multiplier mode (unpipelined), register-to-register, two 8-bit inputs, one 16-bit output. Implemented using two 16 x 12 ROMs and one 12-bit adder, one 8-bit input, one fixed operand, one 16-bit output. Implemented using 4 x 1 multiplier mode (fully pipelined), two 8-bit inputs, one 16-bit output (28 of 44 PFUs contain only pipelining registers). Implemented using 16 x 4 synchronous single-port RAM mode allowing both read and write per clock cycle, including write/read address multiplexer. Implemented using 16 x 4 synchronous single-port RAM mode allowing either read or write per clock cycle, including write/read address multiplexer. Implemented using 16 x 2 synchronous dual-port RAM mode. OR2TxxB available only in -7 and -8 speeds only. Speed grades of -5, -6, and -7 are for OR2TxxA devices only. Lucent Technologies Inc. 3 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Description (continued) PL1 R1C1 R1C2 R1C3 R1C4 R1C5 R1C6 R1C7 R1C8 R1C9 PL2 R2C1 R2C2 R2C3 R2C4 R2C5 R2C6 R2C7 R2C8 R2C9 PL3 R3C1 R3C2 R3C3 R3C4 R3C5 R3C6 R3C7 R3C8 PL4 R4C1 R4C2 R4C3 R4C4 R4C5 R4C6 R4C7 PL5 R5C1 R5C2 R5C3 R5C4 R5C5 R5C6 PL6 R6C1 R6C2 R6C3 R6C4 R6C5 PL7 R7C1 R7C2 R7C3 R7C4 PL8 R8C1 R8C2 R8C3 R9C1 R9C2 R9C3 TMID PT10 PT11 PT12 PT13 PT14 PT15 PT16 PT17 PT18 R1C10 R1C11 R1C12 R1C13 R1C14 R1C15 R1C16 R1C17 R1C18 R2C10 R2C11 R2C12 R2C13 R2C14 R2C15 R2C16 R2C17 R2C18 R3C9 R3C10 R3C11 R3C12 R3C13 R3C14 R3C15 R13C16 R3C17 R3C18 R4C8 R4C9 R4C10 R4C11 R4C12 R4C13 R4C14 R4C15 R4C16 R4C17 R4C18 R5C7 R5C8 R5C9 R5C10 R5C11 R5C12 R5C13 R5C14 R5C15 R5C16 R5C17 R5C18 R6C6 R6C7 R6C8 R6C9 R6C10 R6C11 R6C12 R6C13 R6C14 R6C15 R6C16 R6C17 R6C18 R7C5 R7C6 R7C7 R7C8 R7C9 R7C10 R7C11 R7C12 R7C13 R7C14 R7C15 R7C16 R7C17 R7C18 R8C4 R8C5 R8C6 R8C7 R8C8 R8C9 R8C10 R8C11 R8C12 R8C13 R8C14 R8C15 R8C16 R8C17 R8C18 R9C4 R9C5 R9C6 R9C7 R9C8 R9C9 R9C10 R9C11 R9C12 R9C13 R9C14 R9C15 R9C16 R9C17 R9C18 PR9 PT9 PR8 PT8 PR7 PT7 PR6 PT6 PR5 PT5 PR4 PT4 PR3 PT3 PR2 PT2 PR1 PT1 PL9 The FPGA’s functionality is determined by internal configuration RAM. The FPGA’s internal initialization/configuration circuitry loads the configuration data at powerup or under system control. The RAM is loaded by using one of several configuration modes. The configuration data resides externally in an EEPROM, EPROM, or ROM on the circuit board, or any other storage media. Serial ROMs provide a simple, low pin count method for configuring FPGAs, while the peripheral and JTAG configuration modes allow for easy, in-system programming (ISP). vIQ LMID PL10 R10C1 R10C2 R10C3 R10C4 R10C5 R10C6 R10C7 R10C8 R10C9 R10C10 R10C11 R10C12 R10C13 R10C14 R10C15 R10C16 R10C17 R10C18 RMID PL11 R11C1 R11C2 R11C3 R11C4 R11C5 R11C6 R11C7 R11C8 R11C9 R11C10 R11C11 R11C12 R11C13 R11C14 R11C15 R11C16 R11C17 R11C18 PR11 PL12 R12C1 R12C2 R12C3 R12C4 R12C5 R12C6 R12C7 R12C8 R12C9 R12C10 R12C11 R12C12 R12C13 R12C14 R12C15 R12C16 R12C17 R12C18 PR12 PL13 R13C1 R13C2 R13C3 R13C4 R13C5 R13C6 R13C7 R13C8 R13C9 R13C10 R13C11 R13C12 R13C13 R13C14 R13C15 R13C16 R13C17 R13C18 PR13 PL14 R14C1 R14C2 R14C3 R14C4 R14C5 R14C6 R14C7 R14C8 R14C9 R14C10 R14C11 R14C12 R14C13 R14C14 R14C15 R14C16 R14C17 R14C18 PR14 PL15 R15C1 R15C2 R15C3 R15C4 R15C5 R15C6 R15C7 R15C8 R15C9 R15C10 R15C11 R15C12 R15C13 R15C14 R15C15 R15C16 R15C17 R15C18 PR15 PL16 R16C1 R16C2 R16C3 R16C4 R16C5 R16C6 R16C7 R16C8 R16C9 R16C10 R16C11 R16C12 R16C13 R16C14 R16C15 R16C16 R16C17 R16C18 PR16 PL17 R17C1 R17C2 R17C3 R17C4 R17C5 R17C6 R17C7 R17C8 R17C9 R17C10 R17C11 R17C12 R17C13 R17C14 R17C15 R17C16 R17C17 R17C18 PR17 PL18 R18C1 R18C2 R18C3 R18C4 R18C5 R18C6 R18C7 R18C8 R18C9 R18C10 R18C11 R18C12 R18C13 R18C14 R18C15 R18C16 R18C17 R18C18 PR18 PR10 hIQ PB1 PB2 PB3 PB4 PB5 PB6 PB7 PB8 PB9 PB10 BMID PB11 PB12 PB13 PB14 PB15 PB16 PB17 PB18 5-6779(F) Figure 1. Series 2 Array 4 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Foundry Development System Overview The ORCA Foundry Development System interfaces to front-end design entry tools and provides the tools to produce a configured FPGA. In the design flow, the user defines the functionality of the FPGA at two points: at design entry and at the bit stream generation stage. Following design entry, the development system’s map, place, and route tools translate the netlist into a routed FPGA. Its bit stream generator is then used to generate the configuration data which is loaded into the FPGA’s internal configuration RAM. When using the bit stream generator, the user selects options that affect the functionality of the FPGA. Combined with the front-end tools, ORCA Foundry produces configuration data that implements the various logic and routing options discussed in this data sheet. Architecture The ORCA Series FPGA is comprised of two basic elements: PLCs and PICs. Figure 1 shows an array of programmable logic cells (PLCs) surrounded by programmable input/output cells (PICs). The Series 2 has PLCs arranged in an array of 20 rows and 20 columns. PICs are located on all four sides of the FPGA between the PLCs and the IC edge. The location of a PLC is indicated by its row and column so that a PLC in the second row and third column is R2C3. PICs are indicated similarly, with PT (top) and PB (bottom) designating rows and PL (left) and PR (right) designating columns, followed by a number. The routing resources and configuration RAM are not shown, but the interquad routing blocks (hIQ, vIQ) present in the Series 2 series are shown. Each PIC contains the necessary I/O buffers to interface to bond pads. The PICs also contain the routing resources needed to connect signals from the bond pads to/from PLCs. The PICs do not contain any useraccessible logic elements, such as flip-flops. Combinatorial logic is done in look-up tables (LUTs) located in the PFU. The PFU can be used in different modes to meet different logic requirements. The LUT’s configurable medium-/large-grain architecture can be used to implement from one to four combinatorial logic functions. The flexibility of the LUT to handle wide input functions, as well as multiple smaller input functions, maximizes the gate count/PFU. ORCA Series 2 FPGAs binatorial mode, the LUTs can realize any four-, five-, or six-input logic functions. In ripple mode, the highspeed carry logic is used for arithmetic functions, the new multiplier function, or the enhanced data path functions. In memory mode, the LUTs can be used as a 16 x 4 read/write or read-only memory (asynchronous mode or the new synchronous mode) or a new 16 x 2 dual-port memory. Programmable Logic Cells The programmable logic cell (PLC) consists of a programmable function unit (PFU) and routing resources. All PLCs in the array are identical. The PFU, which contains four LUTs and four latches/FFs for logic implementation, is discussed in the next section. Programmable Function Unit The PFUs are used for logic. Each PFU has 19 external inputs and six outputs and can operate in several modes. The functionality of the inputs and outputs depends on the operating mode. The PFU uses three input data buses (A[4:0], B[4:0], WD[3:0]), four control inputs (C0, CK, CE, LSR), and a carry input (CIN); the last is used for fast arithmetic functions. There is a 5-bit output bus (O[4:0]) and a carry-out (COUT). PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CELL (PLC) WD3 WD2 WD1 WD0 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 COUT PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION UNIT (PFU) O4 O3 O2 O1 O0 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 CIN C0 CK CE LSR (ROUTING RESOURCES, CONFIGURATION RAM) 5-2750(F).r3 Figure 2. PFU Ports The LUTs can be programmed to operate in one of three modes: combinatorial, ripple, or memory. In comLucent Technologies Inc. 5 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Programmable Logic Cells (continued)) COUT CARRY A4 A4 A3 A2 A3 QLUT3 F3 C A1 WD3 REG3 CARRY A1 A3 A2 A1 A0 Q3 D3 A2 C PFU_NAND SR F2 EN O4 QLUT2 A4 A0 Q2 D2 O3 REG2 WD2 C CARRY B4 B4 B3 B2 B3 QLUT1 B3 B2 B1 O1 Q1 D1 C O0 REG1 WD1 SR CARRY EN PFU_XOR F0 C Q0 D0 QLUT0 B0 WD0 C T T T T T T T C C EN C C0 LSR GSR T REG0 B4 SR CIN O2 EN F1 PFU_MUX B1 B2 B1 B0 SR C WD[3:0] C CK CKEN TRI 5-4573(F) Key: C = controlled by configuration RAM. Figure 3. Simplified PFU Diagram Figure 2 and Figure 3 show high-level and detailed views of the ports in the PFU, respectively. The ports are referenced with a two- to four-character suffix to a PFU’s location. As mentioned, there are two 5-bit input data buses (A[4:0] and B[4:0]) to the LUT, one 4-bit input data bus (WD[3:0]) to the latches/FFs, and an output data bus (O[4:0]). Figure 3 shows the four latches/FFs (REG[3:0]) and the 64-bit look-up table (QLUT[3:0]) in the PFU. The PFU does combinatorial logic in the LUT and sequential logic in the latches/FFs. The LUT is static random access memory (SRAM) and can be used for read/ write or read-only memory. The eight 3-state buffers 6 found in each PLC are also shown, although they actually reside external to the PFU. Each latch/FF can accept data from the LUT. Alternatively, the latches/FFs can accept direct data from WD[3:0], eliminating the LUT delay if no combinatorial function is needed. The LUT outputs can bypass the latches/FFs, which reduces the delay out of the PFU. It is possible to use the LUT and latches/FFs more or less independently. For example, the latches/FFs can be used as a 4-bit shift register, and the LUT can be used to detect when a register has a particular pattern in it. Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Programmable Logic Cells (continued) used as LUT inputs. The use of these ports changes based on the PFU operating mode. Table 3 lists the basic operating modes of the LUT. The operating mode affects the functionality of the PFU input and output ports and internal PFU routing. For example, in some operating modes, the WD[3:0] inputs are direct data inputs to the PFU latches/FFs. In the dual 16 x 2 memory mode, the same WD[3:0] inputs are used as a 4-bit data input bus into LUT memory. The functionality of the LUT is determined by its operating mode. The entries in Table 3 show the basic modes of operation for combinatorial logic, ripple, and memory functions in the LUT. Depending on the operating mode, the LUT can be divided into sub-LUTs. The LUT is comprised of two 32-bit half look-up tables, HLUTA and HLUTB. Each half look-up table (HLUT) is comprised of two quarter look-up tables (QLUTs). HLUTA consists of QLUT2 and QLUT3, while HLUTB consists of QLUT0 and QLUT1. The outputs of QLUT0, QLUT1, QLUT2, and QLUT3 are F0, F1, F2, and F3, respectively. The PFU is used in a variety of modes, as illustrated in Figures 4 through 11, and it is these specific modes that are most relevant to PFU functionality. PFU Control Inputs The four control inputs to the PFU are clock (CK), local set/reset (LSR), clock enable (CE), and C0. The CK, CE, and LSR inputs control the operation of all four latches in the PFU. An active-low global set/reset (GSRN) signal is also available to the latches/FFs in every PFU. Their operation is discussed briefly here, and in more detail in the Latches/Flip-Flops section. The polarity of the control inputs can be inverted. The CK input is distributed to each PFU from a vertical or horizontal net. The CE input inhibits the latches/FFs from responding to data inputs. The CE input can be disabled, always enabling the clock. Each latch/FF can be independently programmed to be set or reset by the LSR and the global set/reset (GSRN) signals. Each PFU’s LSR input can be configured as synchronous or asynchronous. The GSRN signal is always asynchronous. The LSR signal applies to all four latches/FFs in a PFU. The LSR input can be disabled (the default). The asynchronous set/reset is dominant over clocked inputs. The C0 input is used as an input into the special PFU gates for wide functions in combinatorial logic mode. In the memory modes, this input is also used as the write-port enable input. The C0 input can be disabled (the default). Table 3. Look-Up Table Operating Modes Mode Function F4A Two functions of four inputs, some inputs shared (QLUT2/QLUT3) F4B Two functions of four inputs, some inputs shared (QLUT0/QLUT1) F5A One function of five inputs (HLUTA) F5B One function of five inputs (HLUTB) R 4-bit ripple (LUT) MA 16 x 2 asynchronous memory (HLUTA) MB 16 x 2 asynchronous memory (HLUTB) SSPM 16 x 4 synchronous single-port memory SDPM 16 x 2 synchronous dual-port memory For combinatorial logic, the LUT can be used to do any single function of six inputs, any two functions of five inputs, or four functions of four inputs (with some inputs shared), and three special functions based on the two five-input functions and C0. Look-Up Table Operating Modes The look-up table (LUT) can be configured to operate in one of three general modes: ■ Combinatorial logic mode ■ Ripple mode ■ Memory mode The combinatorial logic mode uses a 64-bit look-up table to implement Boolean functions. The two 5-bit logic inputs, A[4:0] and B[4:0], and the C0 input are Lucent Technologies Inc. 7 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Programmable Logic Cells (continued) The LUT ripple mode operation offers standard arithmetic functions, such as 4-bit adders, subtractors, adder/subtractors, and counters. In the ORCA Series 2, there are two new ripple modes available. The first new mode is a 4 x 1 multiplier, and the second is a 4-bit comparator. These new modes offer the advantages of faster speeds as well as denser logic capabilities. When the LUT is configured to operate in the memory mode, a 16 x 2 asynchronous memory fits into an HLUT. Both the MA and MB modes were available in previous ORCA architectures, and each mode can be configured in an HLUT separately. In the Series 2, there are two new memory modes available. The first is a 16 x 4 synchronous single-port memory (SSPM), and the second is a 16 x 2 synchronous dual-port memory (SDPM). These new modes offer easier implementation, faster speeds, denser RAMs, and a dual-port capability that wasn’t previously offered as an option in the ATT2Cxx/ATT2Txx families. If the LUT is configured to operate in the ripple mode, it cannot be used for basic combinatorial logic or memory functions. In modes other than the ripple, SSPM, and SDPM modes, combinations of operating modes are possible. For example, the LUT can be configured as a 16 x 2 RAM in one HLUT and a five-input combinatorial logic function in the second HLUT. This can be done by configuring HLUTA in the MA mode and HLUTB in the F5B mode (or vice versa). F4A/F4B Mode—Two Four-Input Functions Each HLUT can be used to implement two four-input combinatorial functions, but the total number of inputs into each HLUT cannot exceed five. The two QLUTs within each HLUT share three inputs. In HLUTA, the A1, A2, and A3 inputs are shared by QLUT2 and QLUT3. Similarly, in HLUTB, the B1, B2, and B3 inputs are shared by QLUT0 and QLUT1. The four outputs are F0, F1, F2, and F3. The results can be routed to the D0, D1, D2, and D3 latch/FF inputs or as an output of the PFU. The use of the LUT for four functions of up to four inputs each is given in Figure 4. F5A/F5B Mode—One Five-Input Variable Function Each HLUT can be used to implement any five-input combinatorial function. The input ports are A[4:0] and B[4:0], and the output ports are F0 and F3. One five or less input function is input into A[4:0], and the second five or less input function is input into B[4:0]. The results are routed to the latch/FF D0 and latch/FF D3 inputs, or as a PFU output. The use of the LUT for two 8 independent functions of up to five inputs is shown in Figure 5. In this case, the LUT is configured in the F5A and F5B modes. As a variation, the LUT can do one function of up to five input variables and two four-input functions using F5A and F4B modes or F4A and F5B modes. A4 A4 A3 A3 A2 A2 A1 A1 A3 A3 A2 A2 A1 A1 A0 A0 B4 B4 B3 B3 B2 B2 B1 B1 B3 B3 B2 B2 B1 B1 B0 B0 HLUTA F3 QLUT3 F2 QLUT2 HLUTB QLUT1 QLUT0 F1 F0 5-2753(F).r2 Figure 4. F4 Mode—Four Functions of FourInput Variables HLUTA WEA A4 A3 A3 A2 A2 A1 A1 A0 A0 WD3 WD3 WD2 WD2 QLUT3 QLUT2 F3 F2 c0 WPE HLUTB B4 B4 B3 B3 B2 B2 B1 B1 B0 B0 QLUT1 F0 QLUT0 5-2845(F).r2 Figure 5. F5 Mode—Two Functions of Five-Input Variables Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Programmable Logic Cells (continued) F5M and F5X Modes—Special Function Modes C0 The PFU contains logic to implement two special function modes which are variations on the F5 mode. As with the F5 mode, the LUT implements two independent five-input functions. Figure 6 and Figure 7 show the schematics for F5M and F5X modes, respectively. The F5X and F5M functions differ from the basic F5A/ F5B functions in that there are three logic gates which have inputs from the two 5-input LUT outputs. In some cases, this can be used for faster and/or wider logic functions. A4 A4 A3 A3 A2 A2 A1 A1 A0 A0 B4 B4 B3 B3 B2 B2 B1 B1 B0 B0 As can be seen, two of the three inputs into the NAND, XOR, and MUX gates, F0 and F3, are from the LUT. The third input is from the C0 input into PFU. Since the C0 input bypasses the LUTs, it has a much smaller delay through the PFU than for all other inputs into the special PFU gates. This allows multiple PFUs to be cascaded together while reducing the delay of the critical path through the PFUs. The output of the first special function (either XOR or MUX) is F1. Since the XOR and MUX share the F1 output, the F5X and F5M modes are mutually exclusive. The output of the NAND PFU gate is F2 and is always available in either mode. To use either the F5M or F5X functions, the LUT must be in the F5A/F5B mode; i.e., only 5-input LUTs allowed. In both the F5X and F5M functions, the outputs of the five-input combinatorial functions, F0 and F3, are also usable simultaneously with the special PFU gate outputs. F3 QLUT3 F3 F2 QLUT2 QLUT1 F0 F1 QLUT0 F0 5-2754(F).r3 Figure 6. F5M Mode—Multiplexed Function of Two Independent Five-Input Variable Functions C0 F3 A4 A4 A3 A3 A2 A2 A1 A1 A0 A0 B4 B4 B3 B3 B2 B2 B1 B1 B0 B0 HLUTA F3 F2 The output of the MUX is: F1 = (HLUTA & C0) + (HLUTB & C0) F1 = (F3 & C0) + (F0 & C0) The output of the exclusive OR is: F1 = HLUTA ⊕ HLUTB ⊕ C0 F1 = F3 ⊕ F0 ⊕ C0 The output of the NAND is: F2 = HLUTA & HLUTB & C0 F2 = F3 & F0 & C0 Lucent Technologies Inc. HLUTB F1 F0 F0 5-2755(F).r2 Figure 7. F5X Mode—Exclusive OR Function of Two Independent Five-Input Variable Functions 9 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Programmable Logic Cells (continued) two operands are input into A[3:0] and B[3:0]. The four result bits, one per QLUT, are F[3:0] (see Figure 9). The ripple output from QLUT3 can be routed to dedicated carry-out circuitry into any of four adjacent PLCs, or it can be placed on the O4 PFU output, or both. This allows the PLCs to be cascaded in the ripple mode so that nibble-wide ripple functions can be expanded easily to any length. C0 A4 A4 A3 A3 A2 A2 A1 A1 A0 A0 QLUT3 F3 QLUT2 COUT F1 F3 A3 B3 COUT QLUT3 A3 B2 B2 F2 A2 A2 QLUT2 B1 A1 B1 QLUT1 A1 F1 B0 A0 B0 QLUT0 A0 CIN F0 B3 B4 B4 B3 B3 B2 B2 B1 B1 B0 B0 QLUT1 F0 QLUT0 5-2751(F).r3 Figure 8. F5M Mode—One Six-Input Variable Function F5M Mode—One Six-Input Variable Function The LUT can be used to implement any function of sixinput variables. As shown in Figure 8, five input signals (A[4:0]) are routed into both the A[4:0] and B[4:0] ports, and the C0 port is used for the sixth input. The output port is F1. Ripple Mode The LUT can do nibble-wide ripple functions with highspeed carry logic. Each QLUT has a dedicated carryout net to route the carry to/from the adjacent QLUT. Using the internal carry circuits, fast arithmetic and counter functions can be implemented in one PFU. Similarly, each PFU has carry-in (CIN) and carry-out (COUT) ports for fast-carry routing between adjacent PFUs. The ripple mode is generally used in operations on two 4-bit buses. Each QLUT has two operands and a ripple (generally carry) input, and provides a result and ripple (generally carry) output. A single bit is rippled from the previous QLUT and is used as input into the current QLUT. For QLUT0, the ripple input is from the PFU CIN port. The CIN data can come from either the fast-carry routing or the PFU input B4, or it can be tied to logic 1 or logic 0. CIN 5-2756(F).r32 Figure 9. Ripple Mode The ripple mode can be used in one of four submodes. The first of these is adder/subtractor mode. In this mode, each QLUT generates two separate outputs. One of the two outputs selects whether the carry-in is to be propagated to the carry-out of the current QLUT or if the carry-out needs to be generated. The result of this selection is placed on the carry-out signal, which is connected to the next QLUT or the COUT signal, if it is the last QLUT (QLUT3). The other QLUT output creates the result bit for each QLUT that is connected to F[3:0]. If an adder/subtractor is needed, the control signal to select addition or subtraction is input on A4. The result bit is created in onehalf of the QLUT from a single bit from each input bus, along with the ripple input bit. These inputs are also used to create the programmable propagate. The resulting output and ripple output are calculated by using generate/propagate circuitry. In ripple mode, the 10 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Programmable Logic Cells (continued) The second submode is the counter submode (see Figure 10). The present count is supplied to input A[3:0], and then output F[3:0] will either be incremented by one for an up counter or decremented by one for a down counter. If an up counter or down counter is needed, the control signal to select the direction (up or down) is input on A4. Generally, the latches/ FFs in the same PFU are used to hold the present count value. LUT COUT A3 A2 COUT QLUT3 QLUT2 F3 D Q In the third submode, multiplier submode, a single PFU can affect a 4 x 1-bit multiply and sum with a partial product (see Figure 11). The multiplier bit is input at A4, and the multiplicand bits are input at B[3:0], where B3 is the most significant bit (MSB). A[3:0] contains the partial product (or other input to be summed) from a previous stage. If A4 is logical 1, the multiplicand is added to the partial product. If A4 is logical zero, zero is added to the partial product, which is the same as passing the partial product. CIN can hold the carry-in from the less significant PFUs if the multiplicand is wider than 4 bits, and COUT holds any carry-out from the addition, which may then be used as part of the product or routed to another PFU in multiplier mode for multiplicand width expansion. Q3 A3 F2 D Q B3 Q2 A2 B2 A1 B1 A0 B0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 A4 COUT A1 QLUT1 F1 D Q + + + + F3 F2 F1 F0 CIN Q1 5-4620(F) A0 QLUT0 CIN F0 Figure 11. Multiplier Submode D Q Q0 CIN 5-4643(F).r1 Figure 10. Counter Submode with Flip-Flops Lucent Technologies Inc. Ripple mode’s fourth submode features equality comparators, where one 4-bit bus is input on B[3:0], another 4-bit bus is input on B[3:0], and the carry-in is tied to 0 inside the PFU. The carry-out (¦) signal will be 0 if A = B or will be 1 if A ¦ B. If larger than 4 bits, the carry-out (¦) signal can be cascaded using fast-carry logic to the carry-in of any adjacent PFU. Comparators for greater than or equal or less than (>, =, <) continue to be supported using the ripple mode subtractor. The use of this submode could be shown using Figure 9 with CIN tied to 0. 11 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Programmable Logic Cells (continued) enable 4 bits of data from a PLC onto the read data bus. Asynchronous Memory Modes—MA and MB The ORCA Series 2 series also has a new AND function available for each PFU in RAM mode. The inputs to this function are the write-enable (WE) signal and the write-port enable (WPE) signal. The write-enable signal is A4 for HLUTA and B4 for HLUTB, while the other input into the AND gates for both HLUTs is the writeport enable, input on C0 or CIN. Generally, the WPE input is driven by the same RAM bank-enable signal that controls the BIDIs in each PFU. The LUT in the PFU can be configured as either read/ write or read-only memory. A read/write address (A[3:0], B[3:0]), write data (WD[1:0], WD[3:2]), and two write-enable (WE) ports are used for memory. In asynchronous memory mode, each HLUT can be used as a 16 x 2 memory. Each HLUT is configured independently, allowing functions such as a 16 x 2 memory in one HLUT and a logic function of five input variables or less in the other HLUT. Figure 12 illustrates the use of the LUT for a 16 x 4 memory. When the LUTs are used as memory, there are independent address, input data, and output data buses. If the LUT is used as a 16 x 4 read/write memory, the A[3:0] and B[3:0] ports are address inputs (A[3:0]). The A4 and B4 ports are write-enable (WE) signals. The WD[3:0] inputs are the data inputs. The F[3:0] data outputs can be routed out on the O[4:0] PFU outputs or to the latch/FF D[3:0] inputs. WEA A4 A3 A3 A2 A2 A1 A1 A0 A0 HLUTA F3 F2 WD3 WD3 WD2 WD2 C0 The selection of which RAM bank to write data into does not require the use of LUTs from other PFUs, as in previous ORCA architectures. This reduces the number of PFUs required for RAMs larger than 16 words in depth. Note that if either HLUT is in MA/MB mode, then the same WPE is active for both HLUTs. To increase the memory’s word size (e.g., 16 x 8), two or more PLCs are used again. The address, writeenable, and write-port enable of the PLCs are tied together (bit by bit), and the data is different for each PLC. Increasing both the address locations and word size is done by using a combination of these two techniques. The LUT can be used simultaneously for both memory and a combinatorial logic function. Figure 13 shows the use of a LUT implementing a 16 x 2 RAM (HLUTA) and any function of up to five input variables (HLUTB). HLUTA WPE WEA A4 A3 A3 WD1 A2 A2 WD0 A1 A1 A0 A0 WEB B4 WD1 WD0 B3 B3 B2 B2 B1 B1 B0 B0 C0 HLUTB F1 F0 WD3 QLUT3 F3 QLUT2 F2 WD3 C0 WPE HLUTB 5-2757(F).r3 Figure 12. MA/MB Mode—16 x 4 RAM To increase memory word depth above 16 (e.g., 32 x 4), two or more PLCs can be used. The address and write data inputs for the two or more PLCs are tied together (bit by bit), and the data outputs are routed through the four 3-statable BIDIs available in each PFU and are then tied together (bit by bit). B4 B4 B3 B3 B2 B2 B1 B1 B0 B0 QLUT1 F0 QLUT0 5-2845(F).a.r1 The control signal of the 3-statable BIDIs, called a RAM bank-enable, is created from a decode of upper address bits. The RAM bank-enable is then used to 12 Figure 13. MA/F5 Mode—16 x 2 Memory and One Function of Five Input Variables Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Programmable Logic Cells (continued) Synchronous Memory Modes—SSPM and SDPM The MA/MB asynchronous memory modes described previously allow the PFU to perform as a 16 x 4 (64 bits) single-port RAM. Synchronously writing to this RAM requires the write-enable control signal to be gated with the clock in another PFU to create a write pulse. To simplify this functionality, the Series 2 devices contain a synchronous single-port memory (SSPM) mode, where the generation of the write pulse is done in each PFU. With SSPM mode, the entire LUT becomes a 16 x 4 RAM, as shown in Figure 14. In this mode, the input ports are write enable (WE), write-port enable (WPE), read/write address (A[3:0]), and write data (WD[3:0]). To synchronously write the RAM, WE (input into a4) and WPE (input into either C0 or CIN) are latched and ANDed together. The result of this AND function is sent to a pulse generator in the LUT, which writes the RAM synchronous to the RAM clock. This RAM clock is the same one sent to the PFU latches/FFs; however, if necessary, it can be programmably inverted. A4 WE D Q WRITE PULSE GENERATOR HLUTA WR CIN, C0 WPE F3 There are two ways to use the latches/FFs in conjunction with the SSPM. If the phase of the latch/FF clock and the RAM clock are the same, only a read address or write address can be supplied to the RAM that meets the synchronous timing requirements of both the RAM clock and latch/FF clock. Therefore, either a write to the RAM or a read from the RAM can be done in each clock cycle, but not both. If the RAM clock is inverted from the latch/FF clock, then both a write to the RAM and a read from the RAM can occur in each clock cycle. This is done by adding an external write address/read address multiplexer as shown in Figure 15. The write address is supplied on the phase of the clock that allows for setup to the RAM clock, and the read address is supplied on the phase of the clock that allows the read data to be set up to the latch/FF clock. If a higher-speed RAM is required that allows both a read and write in each clock cycle, the synchronous dual-port memory mode (SDPM) can be used, since it does not require the use of an external multiplexer. D Q F2 WA[3:0] RA[3:0] WD[3:2] A[3:0] The write address (WA[3:0]) and write data (WD[3:0]) are also latched by the RAM clock in order to simplify the timing. Reading data from the RAM is done asynchronously; thus, the read address (RA[3:0]) is not latched. The result from the read operation is placed on the LUT outputs (F[3:0]). The F[3:0] data outputs can be routed out of the PFU or sent to the latch/FF D[3:0] inputs. A[3:0], B[3:0] SSPM WRITE ADDRESS READ ADDRESS WD[3:0] WD[3:0] 1 WD A 0 WE D Q D Q WPE D Q HLUTB RAM CLK WR F1 WA[3:0] RA[3:0] WD[1:0] F0 CLOCK PFU 5-4644(F).r1 5-4642(F).r1 Figure 15. SSPM with Read/Write per Clock Cycle Figure 14. SSPM Mode—16 x 4 Synchronous Single-Port Memory Lucent Technologies Inc. 13 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Programmable Logic Cells (continued) UPPER ADDRESS BITS ADDRESS DECODE LUT1 BANK_EN1 WPE DI WR 4 DO BIDI 16 x 4 RAM + 4 BUFFERS/PFU UPPER ADDRESS BITS ADDRESS DECODE LUT2 BANK_EN2 4 DOUT WPE DIN WR 4 CLK DI WR DO 4 BIDI 16 x 4 RAM + 4 BUFFERS/PFU 5-4640(F) Note: The lower address bits are not shown. Figure 16. Synchronous RAM with Write-Port Enable (WPE) To increase memory word depth above 16 (e.g., 32 x 4), two or more PLCs can be used. The address and write data inputs for the two or more PLCs are tied together (bit by bit), and the data outputs are routed through the four 3-statable BIDIs available in each PFU. The BIDI outputs are then tied together (bit by bit), as seen in Figure 16. The control signals of the 3-statable BIDIs, called RAM bank-enable (BANK_EN1 and BANK_EN2), are created from a decode of upper address bits. The RAM bank-enable is then used to enable 4 bits of data from a PLC onto the read data (DOUT) bus. The Series 2 series now has a new AND function available for each PFU in RAM mode. The inputs to this function are the write-enable (WE) signal and the writeport enable (WPE) signal. The write-enable signal is input on A4, while the write-port enable is input on C0 or CIN. Generally, the WPE input is driven by the same RAM bank-enable signal that controls the BIDIs in each PFU. 14 The selection as to which RAM bank to write data into does not require the use of LUTs from other PFUs, as in previous ORCA architectures. This reduces the number of PFUs required for RAMs larger than 16 words in depth. A special use of this method can be to increase word depth to 32 words. Since both the WPE input into the RAM and the 3-state input into the BIDI can be inverted, a decode of the one upper address bit is not required. Instead, the bank-enable signal for both banks is tied to the upper address bit, with the WPE and 3-state inputs active-high for one bank and activelow for the other. To increase the memory’s word size (e.g., 16 x 8), two or more PLCs are used again. The address, writeenable, and write-port enable of the PLCs are tied together (bit by bit), and the data is different for each PLC. Increasing both the address locations and word size is accomplished by using a combination of these two techniques. Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Programmable Logic Cells (continued) WE A4 D Q Latches/Flip-Flops WRITE PULSE GENERATOR HLUTA WPE CIN, C0 F3 D Q WA[3:0] RA[3:0] WD[1:0] WA[3:0] A[3:0] WD[1:0] WD[1:0] F2 SSPM OUTPUT WR D Q D Q HLUTB F1 RA[3:0] B[3:0] WA[3:0] RA[3:0] WD[1:0] F0 SDPM OUTPUT WR 5-4641(F).r1 Figure 17. SDPM Mode—16 x 2 Synchronous Dual-Port Memory The Series 2 devices have added a second synchronous memory mode known as the synchronous dualport memory (SDPM) mode. This mode writes data into the memory synchronously in the same manner described previously for SSPM mode. The SDPM mode differs in that two separate 16 x 2 memories are created in each PFU that have the same WE, WPE, write data (WD[1:0]), and write address (WA[3:0]) inputs, as shown in Figure 17. The outputs of HLUTA (F[3:2]) operate the same way they do in SSPM mode—the read address comes directly from the A[3:0] inputs used to create the latched write address. The outputs of HLUTB (F[1:0]) operate in a dual-port mode where the write address comes from the latched version of A[3:0], and the read address comes directly from RA[3:0], which is input on B[3:0]. The four latches/FFs in the PFU can be used in a variety of configurations. In some cases, the configuration options apply to all four latches/FFs in the PFU. For other options, each latch/FF is independently programmable. Table 4 summarizes these latch/FF options. The latches/FFs can be configured as either positive or negative level-sensitive latches, or positive or negative edge-triggered flip-flops. All latches/FFs in a given PFU share the same clock, and the clock to these latches/ FFs can be inverted. The input into each latch/FF is from either the corresponding QLUT output (F[3:0]) or the direct data input (WD[3:0]). For latches/FFs located in the two outer rings of PLCs, additional inputs are possible. These additional inputs are fast paths from I/O pads located in PICs in the same row or column as the PLCs. If the latch/FF is not located in the two outer rings of the PLCs, the latch/FF input can also be tied to logic 0, which is the default. The four latch/FF outputs, Q[3:0], can be placed on the five PFU outputs, O[4:0]. Table 4. Configuration RAM Controlled Latch/ Flip-Flop Operation Function Options Functionality Common to All Latch/FFs in PFU LSR Operation Asynchronous or synchronous Clock Polarity Noninverted or inverted Front-End Select Direct (WD[3:0]) or from LUT (F[3:0]) LSR Priority Either LSR or CE has priority Functionality Set Individually in Each Latch/FF in PFU Latch/FF Mode Latch or flip-flop Set/Reset Mode Set or Reset The four latches/FFs in a PFU share the clock (CK), clock enable (CE), and local set/reset (LSR) inputs. When CE is disabled, each latch/FF retains its previous value when clocked. Both the clock enable and LSR inputs can be inverted to be active-low. Since external multiplexing of the write address and read address is not required, extremely fast RAMs can be created. New system applications that require an interface between two different asynchronous clocks can also be implemented using the SDPM mode. An example of this is accomplished by creating FIFOs where one clock controls the synchronous write of data into the FIFO, and the other clock controls the read address to allow reading of data at any time from the FIFO. Lucent Technologies Inc. 15 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Programmable Logic Cells (continued) The set/reset operation of the latch/FF is controlled by two parameters: reset mode and set/reset value. When the global set/reset (GSRN) or local set/reset (LSR) are inactive, the storage element operates normally as a latch or FF. The reset mode is used to select a synchronous or asynchronous LSR operation. If synchronous, LSR is enabled only if clock enable (CE) is active. For the Series 2 series, a new option called the LSR priority allows the synchronous LSR to have priority over the CE input, thereby setting or resetting the FF independent of the state of CE. The clock enable is supported on FFs, not latches. The clock enable function is implemented by using a two-input multiplexer on the FF input, with one input being the previous state of the FF and the other input being the new data applied to the FF. The select of this two-input multiplexer is clock enable (CE), which selects either the new data or the previous state. When CE is inactive, the FF output does not change when the clock edge arrives. The GSRN signal is only asynchronous, and it sets/ resets all latches/FFs in the FPGA based upon the set/ reset configuration bit for each latch/FF. The set/reset value determines whether GSRN and LSR are set or reset inputs. The set/reset value is independent for each latch/FF. If the local set/reset is not needed, the latch/FF can be configured to have a data front-end select. Two data inputs are possible in the front-end select mode, with the LSR signal used to select which data input is used. The data input into each latch/FF is from the output of its associated QLUT F[3:0] or direct from WD[3:0], bypassing the LUT. In the front-end data select mode, both signals are available to the latches/FFs. CE PDINTB PDINLR F WD LOGIC 0 For PLCs that are in the two outside rows or columns of the array, the latch/FFs can have two inputs in addition to the F and WD inputs mentioned above. One input is from an I/O pad located at the PIC closest to either the left or right of the given PLC (if the PLC is in the left two columns or right two columns of the array). The other input is from an I/O pad located at the closest PIC either above or below the given PLC (if the PLC is in the top or the bottom two rows). It should be noted that both inputs are available for a 2 x 2 array of PLCs in each corner of the array. For the entire array of PLCs, if either or both of these inputs is unavailable, the latch/ FF data input can be tied to a logic 0 instead (the default). To speed up the interface between signals external to the FPGA and the latches/FFs, there are direct paths from latch/FF outputs to the I/O pads. This is done for each PLC that is adjacent to a PIC. The latches/FFs can be configured in three modes: 1. Local synchronous set/reset: the input into the PFU’s LSR port is used to synchronously set or reset each latch/FF. 2. Local asynchronous set/reset: the input into LSR asynchronously sets or resets each latch/FF. 3. Latch/FF with front-end select: the data select signal (actually LSR) selects the input into the latches/FFs between the LUT output and direct data in. For all three modes, each latch/FF can be independently programmed as either set or reset. Each latch/ FF in the PFU is independently configured to operate as either a latch or flip-flop. Figure 18 provides the logic functionality of the front-end select, global set/reset, and local set/reset operations. CE D CE Q S_SET PDINTB PDINLR F WD LOGIC 0 D CE Q PDINTB PDINLR F WD LOGIC 0 LSR WD CE D CE Q LSR S_RESET CLK GSRN LSR CLK CLK SET RESET SET RESET GSRN SET RESET GSRN CD CD CD Note: CD = configuration data. 5-2839(F).a Figure 18. Latch/FF Set/Reset Configurations 16 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Programmable Logic Cells (continued) INDEPENDENT CIP PLC Routing Resources B Generally, the ORCA Foundry Development System is used to automatically route interconnections. Interactive routing with the ORCA Foundry design editor (EPIC) is also available for design optimization. To use EPIC for interactive layout, an understanding of the routing resources is needed and is provided in this section. CD = A A B MULTIPLEXED CIP CD The routing resources consist of switching circuitry and metal interconnect segments. Generally, the metal lines which carry the signals are designated as routing nodes (lines). The switching circuitry connects the routing nodes, providing one or more of three basic functions: signal switching, amplification, and isolation. A net running from a PFU or PIC output (source) to a PLC or PIC input (destination) consists of one or more lines, connected by switching circuitry designated as configurable interconnect points (CIPs). The following sections discuss PLC, PIC, and interquad routing resources. This section discusses the PLC switching circuitry, intra-PLC routing, inter-PLC routing, and clock distribution. Configurable Interconnect Points The process of connecting lines uses three basic types of switching circuits: two types of configurable interconnect points (CIPs) and bidirectional buffers (BIDIs). The basic element in CIPs is one or more pass transistors, each controlled by a configuration RAM bit. The two types of CIPs are the mutually exclusive (or multiplexed) CIP and the independent CIP. A mutually exclusive set of CIPs contains two or more CIPs, only one of which can be on at a time. An independent CIP has no such restrictions and can be on independent of the state of other CIPs. Figure 19 shows an example of both types of CIPs. Lucent Technologies Inc. O 2 A B C A B O C f.13(F) Figure 19. Configurable Interconnect Point 3-Statable Bidirectional Buffers Bidirectional buffers provide isolation as well as amplification for signals routed a long distance. Bidirectional buffers are also used to drive signals directly onto either vertical or horizontal XL and XH lines (to be described later in the inter-PLC routing section). BIDIs are also used to indirectly route signals through the switching lines. Any number from zero to eight BIDIs can be used in a given PLC. The BIDIs in a PLC are divided into two nibble-wide sets of four (BIDI and BIDIH). Each of these sets has a separate BIDI controller that can have an application net connected to its TRI input, which is used to 3-state enable the BIDIs. Although only one application net can be connected to both BIDI controllers, the sense of this signal (active-high, active-low, or ignored) can be configured independently. Therefore, one set can be used for driving signals, the other set can be used to create 3-state buses, both sets can be used for 3-state buses, and so forth. 17 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Programmable Logic Cells (continued) TRI BIDI CONTROLLER RIGHT-LEFT BIDI LEFT-RIGHT BIDI UNUSED BIDI LEFT-RIGHT BIDI BIDIH CONTROLLER RIGHT-LEFT BIDIH LEFT-RIGHT BIDIH UNUSED BIDIH LEFT-RIGHT BIDIH 5-4479p2(F) Figure 20. 3-Statable Bidirectional Buffers Switching Lines. There are four sets of switching lines in each PLC, one in each corner. Each set consists of five switching elements, labeled SUL[4:0], SUR[4:0], SLL[4:0], and SLR[4:0], for the upper-left, upper-right, lower-left, and lower-right sections of the PFUs, respectively. The switching lines connect to the PFU inputs and outputs as well as the BIDI and BIDIH lines, to be described later. They also connect to both the horizontal and vertical X1 and X4 lines (inter-PLC routing resources, described below) in their specific corner. One of the four sets of switching lines can be connected to a set of switching lines in each of the four adjacent PLCs or PICs. This allows direct routing of up to five signals without using inter-PLC routing. BIDI/BIDIH Lines. There are two sets of bidirectional lines in the PLC, each set consisting of four bidirectional buffers. They are designated BIDI and BIDIH and have similar functionality. The BIDI lines are used in conjunction with the XL lines, and the BIDIH lines are used in conjunction with the XH lines. Each side of the four BIDIs in the PLC is connected to a BIDI line on the left (BL[3:0]) and on the right (BR[3:0]). These lines can be connected to the XL lines through CIPs, with BL[3:0] connected to the vertical XL lines and BR[3:0] connected to the horizontal XL lines. Both BL[3:0] and BR[3:0] have CIPs which connect to the switching lines. Similarly, each side of the four BIDIHs is connected to a BIDIH line: BLH[3:0] on the left and BRH[3:0] on the right. These lines can also be connected to the XH lines through CIPs, with BLH[3:0] connected to the vertical XH lines and BRH[3:0] connected to the horizontal XH lines. Both BLH[3:0] and BRH[3:0] have CIPs which connect to the switching lines. CIPs are also provided to connect the BIDIH and BIDIL lines together on each side of the BIDIs. For example, BLH3 can connect to BL3, while BRH3 can connect to BR3. Intra-PLC Routing The function of the intra-PLC routing resources is to connect the PFU’s input and output ports to the routing resources used for entry to and exit from the PLC. These are nets for providing PFU feedback, turning corners, or switching from one type of routing resource to another. PFU Input and Output Ports. There are 19 input ports to each PFU. The PFU input ports are labeled A[4:0], B[4:0], WD[3:0], C0, CK, LSR, CIN, and CE. The six output ports are O[4:0] and COUT. These ports correspond to those described in the PFU section. 18 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 VX4[7:4] VX1[7:4] VXH[3:0] VXL[3:0] Programmable Logic Cells (continued) Inter-PLC Routing Resources The inter-PLC routing is used to route signals between PLCs. The lines occur in groups of four, and differ in the numbers of PLCs spanned. The X1 lines span one PLC, the X4 lines span four PLCs, the XH lines span one-half the width (height) of the PLC array, and the XL lines span the width (height) of the PLC array. All types of lines run in both horizontal and vertical directions. Table 5 shows the groups of inter-PLC lines in each PLC. In the table, there are two rows/columns each for X1 and X4 lines. In the design editor, the horizontal X1 and X4 lines are located above and below the PFU. Similarly, the vertical segments are located on each side. The XL and XH lines only run below and to the left of the PFU. The indexes specify individual lines within a group. For example, the VX4[2] line runs vertically to the left of the PFU, spans four PLCs, and is the third line in the 4-bit wide bus. Table 5. Inter-PLC Routing Resources Horizontal Lines Vertical Lines Distance Spanned HX1[3:0] HX1[7:4] HX4[3:0] HX4[7:4] HXL[3:0] HXH[3:0] CKL, CKR VX1[3:0] VX1[7:4] VX4[3:0] VX4[7:4] VXL[3:0] VXH[3:0] CKT, CKB One PLC One PLC Four PLCs Four PLCs PLC Array 1/2 PLC Array PLC Array Figure 21 shows the inter-PLC routing within one PLC. Figure 22 provides a global view of inter-PLC routing resources across multiple PLCs. Lucent Technologies Inc. DIRECT[4:0] CKB, CKT VX1[3:0] VX4[3:0] ORCA Series 2 FPGAs HX4[7:4] HX1[7:4] CKL, CKR DIRECT[4:0] PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION UNIT DIRECT[4:0] HXL[3:0] HXH[3:0] HX1[3:0] HX4[3:0] DIRECT[4:0] 5-4528(F) Figure 21. Single PLC View of Inter-PLC Lines X1 Lines. There are a total of 16 X1 lines per PLC: eight vertical and eight horizontal. Each of these is subdivided into nibble-wide buses: HX1[3:0], HX1[7:4], VX1[3:0], and VX1[7:4]. An X1 line is one PLC long. If a net is longer than one PLC, an X1 line can be lengthened to n times its length by turning on n – 1 CIPs. A signal is routed onto an X1 line via the switching lines. X4 Lines. There are four sets of four X4 lines, for a total of 16 X4 lines per PLC. They are HX4[3:0], HX4[7:4], VX4[3:0], and VX4[7:4]. Each set of X4 lines is twisted each time it passes through a PLC, and one of the four is broken with a CIP. This allows a signal to be routed for a length of four cells in any direction on a single line without additional CIPs. The X4 lines can be used to route any nets that require minimum delay. A longer net is routed by connecting two X4 lines together by a CIP. The X4 lines are accessed via the switching lines. 19 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Programmable Logic Cells (continued) XL Lines. The long XL lines run vertically and horizontally the height and width of the array, respectively. There are a total of eight XL lines per PLC: four horizontal (HXL[3:0]) and four vertical (VXL[3:0]). Each PLC column has four XL lines, and each PLC row has four XL lines. Each of the XL lines connects to the two PICs at either end. The Series 2, which consists of a 18 x 18 array of PLCs, contains 72 VXL and 72 HXL lines. They are intended primarily for global signals which must travel long distances and require minimum delay and/or skew, such as clocks. There are three methods for routing signals onto the XL lines. In each PLC, there are two long-line drivers: one for a horizontal XL line, and one for a vertical XL line. Using the long-line drivers produces the least delay. The XL lines can also be driven directly by PFU outputs using the BIDI lines. In the third method, the XL lines are accessed by the bidirectional buffers, again using the BIDI lines. XH Lines. Four by half (XH) lines run horizontally and four XH lines run vertically in each row and column in the array. These lines travel a distance of one-half the PLC array before being broken in the middle of the array, where they connect to the interquad block (discussed later). They also connect at the periphery of the FPGA to the PICs, like the XL lines. The XH lines do not twist like XL lines, allowing nibble-wide buses to be routed easily. Two of the three methods of routing signals onto the XL lines can also be used for the XH lines. A special XH line driver is not supplied for the XH lines. The clock lines are designed to be a clock spine. In each PLC, there is a fast connection available from the clock line to the long-line driver (described earlier). With this connection, one of the clock lines in each PLC can be used to drive one of the four XL lines perpendicular to it, which, in turn, creates a clock tree. This feature is discussed in detail in the Clock Distribution Network section. Minimizing Routing Delay The CIP is an active element used to connect two lines. As an active element, it adds significantly to the resistance and capacitance of a net, thus increasing the net’s delay. The advantage of the X1 line over a X4 line is routing flexibility. A net from PLC db to PLC cb is easily routed by using X1 lines. As more CIPs are added to a net, the delay increases. To increase speed, routes that are greater than two PLCs away are routed on the X4 lines because a CIP is located only in every fourth PLC. A net that spans eight PLCs requires seven X1 lines and six CIPs. Using X4 lines, the same net uses two lines and one CIP. All routing resources in the PLC can carry 4-bit buses. In order for data to be used at a destination PLC that is in data path mode, the data must arrive unscrambled. For example, in data path operation, the least significant bit 0 must arrive at either A[0] or B[0]. If the bus is to be routed by using either X4 or XL lines (both of which twist as they propagate), the bus must be placed on the appropriate lines at the source PLC so that the data arrives at the destination unscrambled. The switching lines provide the most efficient means of connecting adjacent PLCs. Signals routed with these lines have minimum propagation delay. Clock Lines. For a very fast and low-skew clock (or other global signal tree), clock lines run the entire height and width of the PLC array. There are two horizontal clock lines per PLC row (CKL, CKR) and two vertical clock lines per PLC column (CKT, CKB). The source for these clock lines can be any of the four I/O buffers in the PIC. The horizontal clock lines in a row (CKL, CKR) are driven by the left and right PICs, respectively. The vertical clock lines in a column (CKT, CKB) are driven by the top and bottom PICs, respectively. 20 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs VX4[0] VX4[3] VX4[2] VX4[1] VX1[3:0] CKB CKT VXL[0] VXL[3] VXL[2] VXL[1] VXH[3:0] VX1[7:4] VX4[4] VX4[7] VX4[6] VX4[5] VX4[0] VX4[3] VX4[2] VX4[1] VX1[3:0] CKB CKT VXL[2] VXL[1] VXL[0] VXL[3] VXH[3:0] VX1[7:4] VX4[4] VX4[7] VX4[6] VX4[5] VX4[0] VX4[3] VX4[2] VX4[1] VX1[3:0] CKB CKT Programmable Logic Cells (continued) HX4[7] HX4[6] HX4[5] HX4[4] HX4[4] HX4[7] HX4[6] HX4[5] HX1[7:4] HX1[7:4] CKL CKR CKL CKR PFU PFU PFU HXL[3] HXL[2] HXL[1] HXL[0] HXL[2] HXL[1] HXL[0] HXL[3] HXH[3:0] HXH[3:0] HX1[3:0] HX1[3:0] HX4[3] HX4[2] HX4[1] HX4[0] HX4[0] HX4[3] HX4[2] HX4[1] HX4[7] HX4[6] HX4[5] HX4[4] HX4[4] HX4[7] HX4[6] HX4[5] HX1[7:4] HX1[7:4] CKL CKR CKL CKR PFU PFU PFU HXL[3] HXL[2] HXL[1] HXL[0] HXL[2] HXL[1] HXL[0] HXL[3] HXH[3:0] HXH[3:0] HX1[3:0] HX1[3:0] HX4[3] HX4[2] HX4[1] HX4[0] HX4[0] HX4[3] HX4[2] HX4[1] HX4[7] HX4[6] HX4[5] HX4[4] HX4[4] HX4[7] HX4[6] HX4[5] HX1[7:4] HX1[7:4] CKL CKR CKL CKR VX4[3] VX4[2] VX4[1] VX4[0] VX1[3:0] CKB CKT VXL[3] VXL[2] VXL[1] VXL[0] VX1[7:4] VXH[3:0] VX4[7] VX4[6] VX4[5] VX4[4] VX4[3] VX4[2] VX4[1] VX4[0] VX1[3:0] PFU CKB CKT VXL[3] VXL[2] VXL[1] VXL[0] VX1[7:4] VXH[3:0] VX4[7] VX4[6] VX4[5] VX4[4] VX4[3] VX4[2] VX4[1] VX4[0] VX1[3:0] PFU CKB CKT PFU SHOWS PLCs 5-2841(F)2C.r9 Figure 22. Multiple PLC View of Inter-PLC Routing Lucent Technologies Inc. 21 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Programmable Logic Cells (continued) PLC Architectural Description Figure 23 is an architectural drawing of the PLC which reflects the PFU, the lines, and the CIPs. A discussion of each of the letters in the drawing follows. Data Sheet June 1999 D. The X4 lines are twisted at each PLC. One of the four X4 lines is broken with a CIP, which allows a signal to be routed a distance of four PLCs in any direction on a single line without an intermediate CIP. The X4 lines are less populated with CIPs than the X1 lines to increase their speed. A CIP can be enabled to extend an X4 line four more PLCs, and so on. A. These are switching lines which give the router flexibility. In general switching theory, the more levels of indirection there are in the routing, the more routable the network is. The switching lines can also connect to adjacent PLCs. For example, if an application signal is routed onto HX4[4] in a PLC, it appears on HX4[5] in the PLC to the right. This signal step-up continues until it reaches HX4[7], two PLCs later. At this point, the user can break the connection or continue the signal for another four PLCs. The switching lines provide direct connections to PLCs directly to the top, bottom, left, and right, without using other routing resources. The ability to disable this connection between PLCs is provided so that each side of these connections can be used exclusively as switching lines in their respective PLC. E. These symbols are bidirectional buffers (BIDIs). There are four BIDIs per PLC, and they provide signal amplification as needed to decrease signal delay. The BIDIs are also used to transmit signals on XL lines. B. These CIPs connect the X1 routing. These are located in the middle of the PLC to allow the block to connect to either the left end of the horizontal X1 line from the right or the right end of the horizontal X1 line from the left, or both. By symmetry, the same principle is used in the vertical direction. The X1 lines are not twisted, making them suitable for data paths. C. This set of CIPs is used to connect the X1 and X4 nets to the switching lines or to other X1 and X4 nets. The CIPs on the major diagonal allow data to be transmitted from X1 nets to the switching lines without being scrambled. The CIPs on the major diagonal also allow unscrambled data to be passed between the X1 and X4 nets. In addition to the major diagonal CIPs for the X1 lines, other CIPs provide an alternative entry path into the PLC in case the first one is already used. The other CIPs are arrayed in two patterns, as shown. Both of these patterns start with the main diagonal, but the extra CIPs are arrayed on either a parallel diagonal shifted by one or shifted by two (modulo the size of the vertical bus (5)). This allows any four application nets incident to the PLC corner to be transferred to the five switching lines in that corner. Many patterns of five nets can also be transferred. 22 F. These are the BIDI and BIDIH controllers. The 3state control signal can be disabled. They can be configured as active-high or active-low independently of each other. G. This set of CIPs allows a BIDI to get or put a signal from one set of switching lines on each side. The BIDIs can be accessed by the switching lines. These CIPs allow a nibble of data to be routed though the BIDIs and continue to a subsequent block. They also provide an alternative routing resource to improve routability. H. These CIPs are used to take data from/to the BIDIs to/from the XL lines. These CIPs have been optimized to allow the BIDI buffers to drive the large load usually seen when using XL lines. I. Each latch/FF can accept data: from an LUT output; from a direct data input signal from general routing; or, as in the case of PLCs located in the two rows (columns) adjacent to PICs, directly from the pad. In addition, the LUT outputs can bypass the latches/ FFs completely and output data on the general routing resources. The four inputs shown are used as the direct input to the latches/FFs from general routing resources. If the LUT is in memory mode, the four inputs WD[3:0] are the data input to the memory. Lucent Technologies Inc. Lucent Technologies Inc. HX4[3] HX4[2] HX4[1] HX4[0] HX1[3] HX1[2] HX1[1] HX1[0] HXH[3] HXH[2] HXH[1] HXH[0] HXL[3] HXL[2] HXL[1] HXL[0] INL[4] INL[3] INL[2] INL[1] INL[0] CKL CKR CARRY_L HX1[7] HX1[6] HX1[5] HX1[4] A U D T C B C T O H L S L W M C R A C D Q G A B D U B P F E SEE FIGURE 14 V A N K G A Q O A M O[4] O[3] O[2] J O[1] O[0] COUT CIN WD[3] WD[2]I WD[1] WD[0] C0 B[4] B[3] B[2] B[1] B[0] A[4] A[3] A[2] A[1] A[0] CE LSR H CK N U R A C PFU:R1C2 INT[4] INT[3] INT[2] INT[1] INT[0] GSRN INB[4] INB[3] INB[2] INB[1] INB[0] HX4[7] HX4[6] HX4[5] HX4[4] A L HCK VCK L C T S B C C T D U HX4[2] HX4[1] HX4[0] HX4[3] HX1[3] HX1[2] HX1[1] HX1[0] HXH[3] HXH[2] HXH[1] HXH[0] HXL[0] HXL[3] HXL[2] HXL[1] INR[4] INR[3] INR[2] INR[1] INR[0] CKL CKR CARRY_R HX1[7] HX1[6] HX1[5] HX1[4] HX4[6] HX4[5] HX4[4] HX4[7] Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Programmable Logic Cells (continued) 5-4479(F).r2 Figure 23. PLC Architecture 23 VX4[3] VX4[2] VX4[1] VX4[0] VX4[0] VX4[3] VX4[2] VX4[1] VX1[3] VX1[2] VX1[1] VX1[0] VX1[3] VX1[2] VX1[1] VX1[0] GSRN CKB CKT GSRN CKB CKT CARRY_T CARRY_B VXL[3] VXL[2] VXL[1] VXL[0] VXL[0] VXL[3] VXL[2] VXL[1] VXH[3] VXH[2] VXH[1] VXH[0] VXH[3] VXH[2] VXH[1] VXH[0] VX1[7] VX1[6] VX1[5] VX1[4] VX1[7] VX1[6] VX1[5] VX1[4] VX4[7] VX4[6] VX4[5] VX4[4] VX4[4] VX4[7] VX4[6] VX4[5] ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Programmable Logic Cells (continued) J. Any five of the eight output signals can be routed out of the PLC. The eight signals are the four LUT outputs (F0, F1, F2, and F3) and the four latch/FF outputs (Q0, Q1, Q2, and Q3). This allows the user to access all four latch/FF outputs, read the present state and next state of a latch/FF, build a 4-bit shift register, etc. Each of the outputs can drive any number of the five PFU outputs. The speed of a signal can be increased by dividing its load among multiple PFU output drivers. K. These lines deliver the auxiliary signals’ clock enable and set/reset to the latches/FFs. All four of the latches/FFs share these signals. L. This is the clock input to the latches/FFs. Any of the horizontal and vertical XH or XL lines can drive the clock of the PLC latches/FFs. Long-line drivers are provided so that a PLC can drive one XL line in the horizontal direction and one XL line in the vertical direction. The XL lines in each direction exhibit the same properties as X4 lines, except there are no CIPs. The clock lines (CKL, CKR, CKT, and CKB) and multiplexers/drivers are used to connect to the XL lines for low-skew, low-delay global signals. The long lines run the length or width of the PLC array. They rotate to allow four PLCs in one row or column to generate four independent global signals. These lines do not have to be used for clock routing. Any highly used application net can use this resource, especially one requiring low skew. M. These lines are used to route the fast carry signal to/ from the neighboring four PLCs. The carry-out (COUT) of the PFU can also be routed out of the PFU onto the fifth output (O4). The carry-in (CIN) signal can also be supplied by the B4 input to the PFU. 24 Data Sheet June 1999 N. These are the 11 logic inputs to the LUT. The A[4:0] inputs are provided into HLUTA, and the B[4:0] inputs are provided into HLUTB. The C0 input bypasses the main LUT and is used in the pfumux, pfuxor, and pfunand functions (F5M, F5X modes). Since this input bypasses the LUT, it can be used as a fast path around the LUT, allowing the implementation of fast, wide combinatorial functions. The C0 input can be disabled or inverted. O. The XH lines run one-half the length (width) of the array before being broken by a CIP. P. The BIDIHs are used to access the XH lines. Q. The BIDIH lines are used to connect the BIDIHs to the XSW lines, the XH lines, or the BIDI lines. R. These CIPs connect the BIDI lines and the BIDIH lines. S. These are clock lines (CKT, CKB, CKL, and CKR) with the multiplexers and drivers to connect to the XL lines. T. These CIPs connect X1 lines which cross in each corner to allow turns on the X1 lines without using the XSW lines. U. These CIPs connect X4 lines and xsw lines, allowing nets that run a distance that is not divisible by four to be routed more efficiently. V. This routing structure allows any PFU output, including LUT and latch/FF outputs, to be placed on O4 and be routed onto the fast carry routing. W. This routing structure allows the fast carry routing to be routed onto the C0 PFU input. Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Programmable Input/Output Cells Inputs The programmable input/output cells (PICs) are located along the perimeter of the device. Each PIC interfaces to four bond pads and contains the necessary routing resources to provide an interface between I/O pads and the PLCs. Each PIC is composed of input buffers, output buffers, and routing resources as described below. Table 6 provides an overview of the programmable functions in an I/O cell. A is a simplified diagram of the functionality of the OR2CxxA series I/O cells, while B is a simplified functional diagram of the OR2TxxA and OR2TxxB series I/O cells. Each I/O can be configured to be either an input, an output, or bidirectional I/O. Inputs for the OR2CxxA can be configured as either TTL or CMOS compatible. The I/O for the OR2TxxA and OR2TxxB series devices are 5 V tolerant, and will be described in a later section of this data sheet. Pull-up or pull-down resistors are available on inputs to minimize power consumption. Table 6. Input/Output Cell Options Input Input Levels Option Input Speed Float Value Direct-in to FF TTL/CMOS (OR2CxxA only) 5 V PCI compliant (OR2CxxA only) 3.3 V PCI compliant (OR2TxxA only) 3.3 V and 5 V PCI compliant (OR2TxxB only) Fast/Delayed Pull-up/Pull-down/None Fast/Delayed Output Option Output Drive Output Speed Output Source Output Sense 3-State Sense 12 mA/6 mA or 6 mA/3 mA Fast/Slewlim/Sinklim FF Direct-out/General Routing Active-high/-low Active-high/-low (3-state) Lucent Technologies Inc. To allow zero hold time to PLC latches/FFs, the input signal can be delayed. When enabled, this delay affects the input signal driven to general routing, but does not affect the clock input or the input lines that drive the TRIDI buffers (used to drive onto XL, XH, BIDI, and BIDIH lines). A fast path from the input buffer to the clock lines is also provided. Any one of the four I/O pads on any PIC can be used to drive the clock line generated in that PIC. This path cannot be delayed. To reduce the time required to input a signal into the FPGA, a dedicated path (PDIN) from the I/O pads to the PFU flip-flops is provided. Like general input signals, this signal can be configured as normal or delayed. The delayed direct input can be selected independently from the delayed general input. Inputs should have transition times of less than 500 ns and should not be left floating. If an input can float, a pull-up or pull-down should be enabled. Floating inputs increase power consumption, produce oscillations, and increase system noise. The OR2CxxA inputs have a typical hysteresis of approximately 280 mV (200 mV for the OR2TxxA and OR2TxxB) to reduce sensitivity to input noise. The PIC contains input circuitry which provides protection against latch-up and electrostatic discharge. 25 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Programmable Input/Output Cells Outputs (continued) The PIC’s output drivers have programmable drive capability and slew rates. Three propagation delays (fast, slewlim, sinklim) are available on output drivers. The sinklim mode has the longest propagation delay and is used to minimize system noise and minimize power consumption. The fast and slewlim modes allow critical timing to be met. VDD PULL-UP DELAY The drive current is 12 mA sink/6 mA source for the slewlim and fast output speed selections and 6 mA sink/3 mA source for the sinklim output. Two adjacent outputs can be interconnected to increase the output sink current to 24 mA. dintb, dinlr in TTL/CMOS POLARITY PAD All outputs that are not speed critical should be configured as sinklim to minimize power and noise. The number of outputs that switch simultaneously in the same direction should be limited to minimize ground bounce. To minimize ground bounce problems, locate heavily loaded output buffers near the ground pads. Ground bounce is generally a function of the driving circuits, traces on the PCB, and loads and is best determined with a circuit simulation. TRI DOUT/OUT SLEW RATE POLARITY PULL-DOWN 5-4591(F) A. Simplified Diagram of OR2CxxA Programmable I/O Cell (PIC) VDD PULL-UP 5 V Tolerant I/O (OR2TxxA) DELAY The I/O on the OR2TxxA series devices allow interconnection to both 3.3 V and 5 V device (selectable on a per-pin basis) by way of special VDD5 pins that have been added to the OR2TxxA devices. If any I/O on the OR2TxxA device interfaces to a 5 V input, then all of the VDD5 pins must be connected to the 5 V supply. If no pins on the device interface to a 5 V signal, then the VDD5 pins must be connected to the 3.3 V supply. dintb, dinlr in PAD Outputs can be inverted, and 3-state control signals can be active-high or active-low. An open-drain output may be obtained by using the same signal for driving the output and 3-state signal nets so that the buffer output is enabled only by a low. At powerup, the output drivers are in slewlim mode, and the input buffers are configured as TTL-level compatible with a pull-up. If an output is not to be driven in the selected configuration mode, it is 3-stated. POLARITY TRI DOUT/OUT SLEW RATE POLARITY PULL-DOWN If the VDD5 pins are disconnected (i.e., they are floating), the device will not be damaged; however, the device may not operate properly until VDD5 is returned to a proper voltage level. If the VDD5 pins are then shorted to ground, a large current flow will develop, and the device may be damaged. 5-4591.T(F) B. Simplified Diagram of OR2TxxA/OR2TxxB Programmable I/O Cell (PIC) Figure 24. Simplified Diagrams 26 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 Programmable Input/Output Cells (continued) Regardless of the power supply that the VDD5 pins are connected to (5 V or 3.3 V), the OR2TxxA devices will drive the pin to the 3.3 V levels when the output buffer is enabled. If the other device being driven by the OR2TxxA device has TTL-compatible inputs, then the device will not dissipate much input buffer power. This is because the OR2TxxA output is being driven to a higher level than the TTL level required. If the other device has a CMOS-compatible input, the amount of input buffer power will also be small. Both of these power values are dependent upon the input buffer characteristics of the other device when driven at the OR2TxxA output buffer voltage levels. The 2TxxA device has internal programmable pull-ups on the I/O buffers. These pull-up voltages are always referenced to VDD. This means that the VDD5 voltage has no effect on the value of the pull-up voltage at the pad. This voltage level is always sufficient to pull the input buffer of the 2TxxA device to a high state. The pin on the 2TxxA device will be at a level 1.0 V below VDD (minimum of 2.0 V with a minimum VDD of 3.0 V). This voltage is sufficient to pull the external pin up to a 3.3 V CMOS high-input level (1.8 V min) or a TTL high-input level (2.0 V min) in a 5 V tolerant system, but it will never pull the pad up to the V DD5 rail. Therefore, in a 5 V tolerant system using 5 V CMOS parts, care must be taken to evaluate the use of these pull-ups to pull the pin of the 2TxxA device to a typical 5 V CMOS high-input level (2.2 V min). For more information on 5 V tolerant I/Os, please see ORCA® Series 5 V Tolerant I/Os Application Note (AP99-027FPGA), May 1999. 5 V Tolerant I/O (OR2TxxB) ORCA Series 2 FPGAs the input buffer characteristics of the other device when driven at the OR2TxxB output buffer voltage levels. The OR2TxxB device has internal programmable pullups on the I/O buffers. These pull-up voltages are always referenced to VDD and are always sufficient to pull the input buffer of the OR2TxxB device to a high state. The pin on the OR2TxxB device will be at a level 1.0 V below VDD (minimum of 2.0 V with a minimum VDD of 3.0 V). This voltage is sufficient to pull the external pin up to a 3.3 V CMOS high-input level (1.8 V, min) or a TTL high input level (2.0 V, min) in a 5 V tolerant system. Therefore, in a 5 V tolerant system using 5 V CMOS parts, care must be taken to evaluate the use of these pull-ups to pull the pin of the OR2TxxB device to a typical 5 V CMOS high-input level (2.2 V, min). PCI Compliant I/O The I/O on the OR2TxxB Series devices allows compliance with PCI local bus (Rev. 2.1) 5 V and 3.3 V signaling environments. The signaling environment used for each input buffer can be selected on a per-pin basis. The selection provides the appropriate I/O clamping diodes for PCI compliance. OR2TxxB devices have 5 V tolerant I/Os as previously explained, but can optionally be selected on a pin-bypin basis to be PCI bus 3.3 V signaling compliant (PCI bus 5 V signaling compliance occurs in 5 V tolerant operation mode). Inputs may have a pull-up or pulldown resistor selected on an input for signal stabilization and power management. Input signals in a PIO can be passed to PIC routing on any of three paths, two general signal paths into PIC routing, and/or a fast route into the clock routing system. OR2TxxA series devices are only compliant in 3.3 V PCI Local Bus (Rev 2.1) signalling environments. OR2CxxA devices are only compliant in 5 V PCI Local Bus (Rev 2.1) signalling environments. The I/O on the OR2TxxB Series devices allow interconnection to both 3.3 V and 5 V device (selectable on a per-pin basis). Unlike the OR2TxxA family, when interfaceing into a 5 V signal, it no longer requires a VDD5 supply. The OR2TxxB devices will drive the pin to the 3.3 V levels when the output buffer is enabled. If the other device being driven by the OR2TxxB device has TTLcompatible inputs, then the device will not dissipate much input buffer power. This is because the OR2TxxB output is being driven to a higher level than the TTL level required. If the other device has a CMOS-compatible input, the amount of input buffer power will also be small. Both of these power values are dependent upon Lucent Technologies Inc. 27 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Programmable Input/Output Cells sides are left (L), right (R), top (T), and bottom (B). The individual I/O pad is indicated by a single letter (either A, B, C, or D) placed at the end of the PIC name. As an example, PL10A indicates a pad located on the left side of the array in the tenth row. (continued) PIC Routing Resources The PIC routing is designed to route 4-bit wide buses efficiently. For example, any four consecutive I/O pads can have both their input and output signals routed into one PLC. Using only PIC routing, either the input or output data can be routed to/from a single PLC from/to any eight pads in a row, as in Figure 25. The connections between PLCs and the I/O pad are provided by two basic types of routing resources. These are routing resources internal to the PIC and routing resources used for PIC-PLC connection. Figure 26 and Figure 27 show a high-level and detailed view of these routing resources, respectively. Each PIC has four pads and each pad can be configured as an input, an output (3-statable), a direct output, or a bidirectional I/O. When the pads are used as inputs, the external signals are provided to the internal circuitry at IN[3:0]. When the pads are used to provide direct inputs to the latches/FFs, they are connected through DIN[3:0]. When the pads are used as outputs, the internal signals connect to the pads through OUT[3:0]. When the pads are used as direct outputs, the output from the latches/flip-flops in the PLCs to the PIC is designated DOUT[3:0]. When the outputs are 3-statable, the 3-state enable signals are TS[3:0]. Routing Resources Internal to the PIC PXL PXH PX2 PX1 2 4 4 4 2 4 PAD D I/O3 PAD C I/O2 PAD B I/O1 PAD A I/O0 4 4 5 4 PIC SWITCHING MATRIX 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 4 4 CK PLC X4 PLC X1 PLC PSW PLC DOUT PLC XL PLC XH PLC X1 PLC X4 PLC DIN 4 PXL PXH PX2 PX1 5-4504(F) Figure 25. Simplified PIC Routing Diagram The PIC’s name is represented by a two-letter designation to indicate on which side of the device it is located followed by a number to indicate in which row or column it is located. The first letter, P, designates that the cell is a PIC and not a PLC. The second letter indicates the side of the array where the PIC is located. The four 28 For inter-PIC routing, the PIC contains 14 lines used to route signals around the perimeter of the FPGA. Figure 25 shows these lines running vertically for a PIC located on the left side. Figure 26 shows the lines running horizontally for a PIC located at the top of the FPGA. PXL Lines. Each PIC has two PXL lines, labeled PXL[1:0]. Like the XL lines of the PLC, the PXL lines span the entire edge of the FPGA. PXH Lines. Each PIC has four PXH lines, labeled PXH[3:0]. Like the XH lines of the PLC, the PXH lines span half the edge of the FPGA. PX2 Lines. There are four PX2 lines in each PIC, labeled PX2[3:0]. The PX2 lines pass through two adjacent PICs before being broken. These are used to route nets around the perimeter equally a distance of two or more PICs. PX1 Lines. Each PIC has four PX1 lines, labeled PX1[3:0]. The PX1 lines are one PIC long and are extended to adjacent PICs by enabling CIPs. Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 Programmable Input/Output Cells (continued) PIC Architectural Description The PIC architecture given in Figure 26 is described using the following letter references. The figure depicts a PIC at the top of the array, so inter-PIC routing is horizontal and the indirect PIC-PLC routing is horizontal to vertical. In some cases, letters are provided in more than one location to indicate the path of a line. A. As in the PLCs, the PIC contains a set of lines which run the length (width) of the array. The PXL lines connect in the corners of the array to other PXL lines. The PXL lines also connect to the PIC BIDI, PIC BIDIH, and LLDRV lines. As in the PLC XL lines, the PXH lines twist as they propagate through the PICs. B. As in the PLCs, the PIC contains a set of lines which run one-half the length (width) of the array. The PXH lines connect in the corners and in the middle of the array perimeter to other PXH lines. The PXH lines also connect to the PIC BIDI, PIC BIDIH, and LLDRV lines. As in the PLC XH lines, the PXH lines do not twist as they propagate through the PICs. C. The PX2[3:0] lines span a length of two PICs before intersecting with a CIP. The CIP allows the length of a path using PX2 lines to be extended two PICs. D. The PX1[3:0] lines span a single PIC before intersecting with a CIP. The CIP allows the length of a path using PX1 lines to be extended by one PIC. E. These are four dedicated direct output lines connected to the output buffers. The DOUT[3:0] signals go directly from a PLC latch/FF to an output buffer, minimizing the latch/FF to pad propagation delay. F. This is a direct path from the input pad to the PLC latch/flip-flops in the two rows (columns) adjacent to PICs. This input allows a reduced setup time. Direct inputs from the top and bottom PIC rows are PDINTB[3:0]. Direct inputs from the left and right PIC columns are PDINLR[3:0]. G. The OUT[3:0], TS[3:0], and IN[3:0] signals for each I/O pad can be routed directly to the adjacent PLC’s switching lines. ORCA Series 2 FPGAs I. The four TRIDIH buffers allow connections from the pads to the PLC XH lines. The TRIDIHs also allow connections between the PLC XH lines and the pBIDIH lines, which are described in K below. J. The PBIDI lines (bidi[3:0]) connect the PXL lines, PXH lines, and the PX1 lines. These are bidirectional in that the path can be from the PXL, PXH, or PX1 lines to the XL lines, or from the XL lines to the PXL, PXH, or PX1 lines. K. The pBIDIH lines (BIDIH[3:0]) connect the PXL lines, PXH lines, and the PX1 lines. These are bidirectional in that the path can be from the PXL, PXH, or PX1 lines to the XH lines, or from the XH lines to the PXL, PXH, or PX1 lines. L. The LLIN[3:0] lines provide a fast connection from the I/O pads to the XL and XH lines. M.This set of CIPs allows the eight X1 lines (four on each side) of the PLC perpendicular to the PIC to be connected to either the PX1 or PX2 lines in the PIC. N. This set of CIPs allows the eight X4 lines (four on each side) of the PLC perpendicular to the PIC to be connected to the PX1 lines. This allows fast access to/from the I/O pads from/to the PLCs. O. All four of the PLC X4 lines in a group connect to all four of the PLC X4 lines in the adjacent PLC through a CIP. (This differs from the ORCA 1C Series in which two of the X4 lines in adjacent PLCs are directly connected without any CIPs.) P. The long-line driver (LLDRV) line can be driven by the XSW4 switching line of the adjacent PLC. To provide connectivity to the pads, the LLDRV line can also connect to any of the four PXH or to one of the PXL lines. The 3-state enable (TS[i]) for all four I/O pads can be driven by XSW4, PXH, or PXL lines. Q. For fast clock routing, one of the four I/O pads in each PIC can be selected to be driven onto a dedicated clock line. The clock line spans the length (width) of the PLC array. This dedicated clock line is typically used as a clock spine. In the PLCs, the spine is connected to an XL line to provide a clock branch in the perpendicular direction. Since there is another clock line in the PIC on the opposite side of the array, only one of the I/O pads in a given row (column) can be used to generate a global signal in this manner, if all PLCs are driven by the signal. H. The four TRIDI buffers allow connections from the pads to the PLC XL lines. The TRIDIs also allow connections between the PLC XL lines and the PBIDI lines, which are described in J below. Lucent Technologies Inc. 29 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Programmable Input/Output Cells (continued) PA D T PB D T PC PD D T D T DOUT3 TS3 OUT3 IN3 DOUT2 TS2 OUT2 IN2 DOUT1 TS1 OUT1 IN1 DOUT0 TS0 OUT0 IN0 PIC DETAIL BIDI3 BIDI2 BIDI1 BIDI0 K BIDIH3 BIDIH2 BIDIH1 BIDIH0 F Q J PXL[1] A PXL[0] PXL[0] PXL[1] A PXH[0] PXH[1] B PXH[2] PXH[0] PXH[1] PXH[2] B PXH[3] PXH[3] P PX2[2] PX2[3] C PX2[0] PX2[1] PX2[0] PX2[1] PX2[2] C PX2[3] C M PX1[0] PX1[1] D PX1[2] PX1[3] M N PX1[0] PX1[1] PX1[2] D PX1[3] N LLIN3 LLIN2 LLIN1 LLIN0 D O I O P LLDRV P L G VX4[3] VX4[2] VX4[1] VX4[0] XSW[4] XSW[3] XSW[2] XSW[1] XSW[0] E CKT DOUT[3] DOUT[2] DOUT[1] DOUT[0] F VX1[3] VX1[2] VX1[1] VX1[0] PDINTB[3] PDINTB[2] PDINTB[1] PDINTB[0] VXL[3] VXL[2] VXL[1] VXL[0] VXH[3] VXH[2] VXH[1] VXH[0] VX1[7] VX1[6] VX1[5] VX1[4] VX4[7] VX4[6] VX4[5] VX4[4] Q 5-2843(F).r8 Figure 26. PIC Architecture PLC-PIC Routing Resources nections are also available between the PIC PX2 lines and the PLC X1 lines. There is no direct connection between the inter-PIC lines and the PLC lines. All connections to/from the PLC must be done through the connecting lines which are perpendicular to the lines in the PIC. The use of perpendicular and parallel lines will be clearer if the PLC and PIC architectures (Figure 23 and Figure 26) are placed side by side. Twenty-nine lines in the PLC can be connected to the 15 lines in the PIC. There are eight tridirectional (four TRIDI/four TRIDIH) buffers in each PIC; they can do the following: Multiple connections between the PIC PX1 lines and the PLC X1 lines are available. These allow buses placed in any arbitrary order on the I/O pads to be unscrambled when placed on the PLC X1 lines. Con- 30 ■ Drive a signal from an I/O pad onto one of the adjacent PLC’s XL or XH lines ■ Drive a signal from an I/O pad onto one of the two PXL or four PXH lines in the PIC ■ Drive a signal from the PLC XL or XH lines onto one of the two PXL or four PXH lines in the PIC ■ Drive a signal from the PIC PXL or PXH lines onto one of the PLC XL or XH lines Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Programmable Input/Output Cells (continued) Figure 27 shows paths to and from pads and the use of MUX CIPs to connect lines. Detail A shows six MUX CIPs for the pad P0 used to construct the net for the 3-state signal. In the MUX CIP, one of six lines is connected to a line to form the net. In this case, the ts0 signal can be driven by either of the two PXLs, PX1[0], PX1[1], XSW[0], or the LLDRV lines. Detail B shows the four MUX CIPs used to drive the P1 output. The source line for OUT1 is either XSW[1], PX1[1], PX1[3], or PX2[2]. PD D T DT DOUT3 TS3 OUT3 IN3 D T PC DOUT2 TS2 OUT2 IN2 DOUT0 TS0 OUT0 IN0 D T PB DOUT1 TS1 OUT1 IN1 PA PXL[1] PXL[0] PXL[1] PXL[0] PXH[0] PXH[1] PXH[2] PXH[3] PXH[0] PXH[1] PXH[2] PXH[3] PX2[2] PX2[3] PX2[0] PX2[1] PX2[2] PX2[3] PX2[0] PX2[1] PX1[0] PX1[1] PX1[2] PX1[3] PX1[0] PX1[1] PX1[2] PX1[3] XSW[0] XSW[1] XSW[2] XSW[3] LLDRV A B DOUT[0] DOUT[1] DOUT[2] DOUT[3] 5-2843.BL(F).2C.r3 Figure 27. PIC Detail Lucent Technologies Inc. 31 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Interquad Routing In all the ORCA Series 2 devices, the PLC array is split into four equal quadrants. In between these quadrants, routing has been added to route signals between the quadrants, especially to the quadrant in the opposite corner. The two types of interquad blocks, vertical and horizontal, are pitch matched to PICs. Vertical interquad blocks (vIQ) run between quadrants on the left and right, while horizontal interquad blocks (hIQ) run between top and bottom quadrants. Since hIQ and vIQ blocks have the same logic, only the hIQ block is described below. The interquad routing connects XL and XH lines. It does not affect local routing (XSW, X1, X4, fast carry), so local routing is the same, whether PLC-PLC connections cross quadrants or not. There are no connections to the local lines in the interquad blocks. Figure 28 presents a (not to scale) view of interquad routing. TMID vIQ3[4:0] vIQ2[4:0] vIQ1[4:0] vIQ0[4:0] 5 5 5 5 SEE DETAIL IN FIGURE 29 5 LMID 5 5 5 hIQ3[4:0] hIQ2[4:0] RMID hIQ1[4:0] hIQ0[4:0] BMID 5-4538(F) Figure 28. Interquad Routing 32 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs VX4[3] VX4[2] VX4[1] VX4[0] VX1[3] VX1[2] VX1[1] VX1[0] CARRY VXL[3] VXL[2] VXL[1] VXL[0] VXH[3] VXH[2] VXH[1] VXH[0] VX1[7] VX1[6] VX1[5] VX1[4] VX4[7] VX4[6] VX4[5] VX4[4] In the hIQ block, the 20 hIQ lines span the array in a horizontal direction. The 20 hIQ lines consist of four CKB CKT In the hIQ block in Figure 29, the XH lines from one quadrant connect through a CIP to its counterpart in the opposite quadrant, creating a path that spans the PLC array. Since a passive CIP is used to connect the two XH lines, a 3-state signal can be routed on the two XH lines in the opposite quadrants, and then they can be connected through this CIP. groups of five lines each. To effectively route nibblewide buses, each of these sets of five lines can connect to only one of the bits of the nibble for both the XH and XL. For example, hIQ0 lines can only connect to the XH0 and XL0 lines, and the hIQ1 lines can connect only to the XH1 and XL1 lines, etc. Buffers are provided for routing signals from the XH and XL lines onto the hIQ lines and from the hIQ lines onto the XH and XL lines. Therefore, a connection from one quadrant to another can be made using only two XH lines (one in each quadrant) and one interquad line. INB[4] INB[3] INB[2] INB[1] INB[0] GSRN Interquad Routing (continued) VX4[3] VX4[2] VX4[1] VX4[0] VX1[3] VX1[2] VX1[1] VX1[0] CKB CKT INT[4] INT[3] INT[2] INT[1] INT[0] GSRN CARRY VXL[3] VXL[2] VXL[1] VXL[0] hIQ1[4] hIQ1[3] hIQ1[2] hIQ1[1] hIQ1[0] hIQ0[4] hIQ0[3] hIQ0[2] hIQ0[1] hIQ0[0] VXH[3] VXH[2] VXH[1] VXH[0] hIQ1[4] hIQ1[3] hIQ1[2] hIQ1[1] hIQ1[0] hIQ0[4] hIQ0[3] hIQ0[2] hIQ0[1] hIQ0[0] VX1[7] VX1[6] VX1[5] VX1[4] hIQ3[4] hIQ3[3] hIQ3[2] hIQ3[1] hIQ3[0] hIQ2[4] hIQ2[3] hIQ2[2] hIQ2[1] hIQ2[0] VX4[7] VX4[6] VX4[5] VX4[4] hIQ3[4] hIQ3[3] hIQ3[2] hIQ3[1] hIQ3[0] hIQ2[4] hIQ2[3] hIQ2[2] hIQ2[1] hIQ2[0] 5-4537(F).r3 Figure 29. hIQ Block Detail Lucent Technologies Inc. 33 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Interquad Routing (continued) Subquad Routing (OR2C40A/OR2T40A Only) In the ORCA OR2C40A/OR2T40A/OR2T40B, each quadrant of the device is split into smaller arrays of PLCs called subquads. Each of these subquads is made of a 4 x 4 array of PLCs (for a total of 16 per subquadrant), except at the outer edges of array, which have less than 16 PLCs per subquad. New routing resources, called subquad lines, have been added between each adjacent pair of subquads to enhance the routability of the device. A portion of the center of the OR2C40A and OR2T40A array is shown in Figure 30, including the subquad blocks containing a 4 x 4 array of PLCs, the interquad routing lines, and the subquad routing lines. All of the inter-PLC routing resources discussed previously continue to be routed between a PLC and its adjacent PLC, even if the two adjacent PLCs are in different subquad blocks. Since the PLC routing has not been modified for the OR2C40A/OR2T40A architectures, this means that all of the same routing connections are possible for these devices as for any other ORCA 2C series device. In this way, both the OR2C40A and OR2T40A/OR2T40B are upwardly compatible when compared with the ATT2Cxx series devices. As the inter-PLC routing runs between subquad blocks, it crosses the new subquad lines. When this happens, CIPs are used to connect the subquad lines to the X4 and/or the XH lines which lie along the other axis of the PLC array. SEE DETAIL IN FIGURES 25 AND 26 SUBQUAD (4 x 4 PLCs) SUBQUAD (4 x 4 PLCs) SUBQUAD (4 x 4 PLCs) SUBQUAD (4 x 4 PLCs) SUBQUAD (4 x 4 PLCs) SUBQUAD (4 x 4 PLCs) SUBQUAD (4 x 4 PLCs) SUBQUAD (4 x 4 PLCs) HORIZONTAL INTERQUAD ROUTING (hIQ) SUBQUAD (4 x 4 PLCs) SUBQUAD (4 x 4 PLCs) SUBQUAD (4 x 4 PLCs) SUBQUAD (4 x 4 PLCs) HORIZONTAL SUBQUAD ROUTING (HSUB) SUBQUAD (4 x 4 PLCs) SUBQUAD (4 x 4 PLCs) VERTICAL SUBQUAD ROUTING (VSUB) SUBQUAD (4 x 4 PLCs) SUBQUAD (4 x 4 PLCs) VERTICAL INTERQUAD ROUTING (vIQ) 5-4200(F).r5 Figure 30. Subquad Blocks and Subquad Routing 34 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs subquad blocks, four of the blocks shown in Figure 31 are used, one for each pair of vertical PLCs. Figure 31. Horizontal Subquad Routing Connectivity The X4 and XH lines make the only connections to the subquad lines; therefore, the array remains symmetrical and homogeneous. Since each subquad is made from a 4 x 4 array of PLCs, the distance between sets of subquad lines is four PLCs, which is also the distance between the breaks of the X4 lines. Therefore, each X4 line will cross exactly one set of subquad lines. Since all X4 lines make the same connections to the subquad lines that they cross, all X4 lines in the array have the same connectivity, and the symmetry of the routing is preserved. Since all XH lines cross the same number of subquad blocks, the symmetry is maintained for the XH lines as well. The new subquad lines travel a length of eight PLCs (seven PLCs on the outside edge) before they are broken. Unlike other inter-PLC lines, they cannot be connected end-to-end. As shown in Figure 30, some of the horizontal (vertical) subquad lines have connectivity to the subquad to the left of (above) the current subquad, while others have connectivity to the subquad to the right (below). This allows connections to/from the current subquad from/to the PLCs in all subquads that surround it. Between all subquads, including in the center of the array, there are three groups of subquad lines where each group contains four lines. Figure 31 shows the connectivity of these three groups of subquad lines (HSUB) to the VX4 and VXH lines running between a vertical pair of PLCs. Between each vertical pair of Lucent Technologies Inc. VX4[3] VX4[2] VX4[1] VX4[0] 5-4201(F).r4 HSUB[11] HSUB[10] HSUB[9] HSUB[8] A HSUB[15] HSUB[14] HSUB[13] HSUB[12] D HSUB[7] HSUB[6] HSUB[5] HSUB[4] HSUB[7] HSUB[6] HSUB[5] HSUB[4] C HSUB[3] HSUB[2] HSUB[1] HSUB[0] HSUB[3] HSUB[2] HSUB[1] HSUB[0] B HSUB[11] HSUB[10] HSUB[9] HSUB[8] HSUB[15] HSUB[14] HSUB[13] HSUB[12] VX4[3] VX4[2] VX4[1] VX4[0] B At the center row and column of each quadrant, a fourth group of subquad lines has been added. These subquad lines only have connectivity to the XH lines. The XH lines are also broken at this point, which means that each XH line travels one-half of the quadrant (i.e., one-quarter of the device) before it is broken by a CIP. Since the XH lines can be connected end-toend, the resulting line can be either one-quarter, onehalf, three-quarters, or the entire length of the array. The connectivity of the XH lines and this fourth group of subquad lines, indicated as D, are detailed in Figure 32. Again, the connectivity for the vertical subquad routing (VSUB) is the same as the horizontal subquad routing, when rotated onto the other axis. VX4[3] VX4[2] VX4[1] VX4[0] HSUB[3] HSUB[2] HSUB[1] HSUB[0] VX4[3] VX4[2] VX4[1] VX4[0] HSUB[3] HSUB[2] HSUB[1] HSUB[0] C VX4[7] VX4[6] VX4[5] VX4[4] HSUB[7] HSUB[6] HSUB[5] HSUB[4] A VX4[3] VX4[2] VX4[1] VX4[0] HSUB[7] HSUB[6] HSUB[5] HSUB[4] VX4[3] VX4[2] VX4[1] VX4[0] HSUB[11] HSUB[10] HSUB[9] HSUB[8] VX4[7] VX4[6] VX4[5] VX4[4] HSUB[11] HSUB[10] HSUB[9] HSUB[8] The first two groups, depicted as A and B, have connectivity to only one of the two sets of X4 lines between pairs of PLCs. Since they are very lightly loaded, they are very fast. The third group, C, connects to both groups of X4 lines between pairs of PLCs, as well as all of the XH lines between pairs of PLCs, providing high flexibility. The connectivity for the vertical subquad routing (Vsub) is the same as described above for the horizontal subquad routing, when rotated onto the other axis. VX4[7] VX4[6] VX4[5] VX4[4] VX4[3] VX4[2] VX4[1] VX4[0] VX4[3] VX4[2] VX4[1] VX4[0] VX4[7] VX4[6] VX4[5] VX4[4] Interquad Routing (continued) 5-4202(F).r3 Figure 32. Horizontal Subquad Routing Connectivity (Half Quad) 35 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Interquad Routing (continued) PIC Interquad (MID) Routing Between the PICs in each quadrant, there is also connectivity between the PIC routing and the interquad routing. These blocks are called LMID (left), TMID (top), RMID (right), and BMID (bottom). The TMID routing is shown in Figure 33. As with the hIQ and vIQ blocks, the only connectivity to the PIC routing is to the global PXH and PXL lines. The PXH lines from the one quadrant can be connected through a CIP to its counterpart in the opposite quadrant, providing a path that spans the array of PICs. Since a passive CIP is used to connect the two PXH lines, a 3-state signal can be routed on the two PXH lines in the opposite quadrants, and then connected through this CIP. As with the hIQ and vIQ blocks, CIPs and buffers allow nibble-wide connections between the interquad lines, the XH lines, and the XL lines. PXH[3] PXH[2] PXH[1] PXH[0] PX4[3] PX4[2] PX4[1] PX4[0] PX4[3] PX4[2] PX4[1] PX4[0] PX1[3] PX1[2] PX1[1] PX1[0] PX1[3] PX1[2] PX1[1] PX1[0] HX4[3] HX4[2] HX4[1] HX4[0] HX4[3] HX4[2] HX4[1] HX4[0] VIQ1[0] VIQ3[0] PXH[3] PXH[2] PXH[1] PXH[0] VIQ2[0] PXL[1] PXL[0] VIQ0[0] PXL[1] PXL[0] 5-4201(F).r4 Figure 33. Top (TMID) Routing 36 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Programmable Corner Cells Clock Distribution Network Programmable Routing The ORCA Series 2 clock distribution schemes use primary and secondary clocks. This provides the system designer with additional flexibility in assigning clock input pins. The programmable corner cell (PCC) contains the circuitry to connect the routing of the two PICs in each corner of the device. The PIC PX1 and PX2 lines are directly connected together from one PIC to another. The PIC PXL lines are connected from one block to another through tridirectional buffers. Four CIPs in each corner connect the four PXH lines from each side of the device. One advantage is that board-level clock traces routed to the FPGA are shorter. On a PC board, the added length of high-speed clock traces routed to dedicated clock input pins can significantly increase the parasitic impedances. The primary advantage of the ORCA clock distribution is the availability of a large number of clocks, since all I/O pins are configurable as clocks. Special-Purpose Functions In addition to routing functions, special-purpose functions are located in each FPGA corner. The upper-left PCC contains connections to the boundary-scan logic. The upper-right PCC contains connections to the readback logic and the connectivity to the global 3-state signal (TS_ALL). The lower-left PCC contains connections to the internal oscillator. The lower-right PCC contains connections to the startup and global reset logic. During configuration, the RESET input pad always initiates a configuration abort, as described in the FPGA States of Operation section. After configuration, the global set/reset signal (GSRN) can either be disabled (the default), directly connected to the RESET input pad, or sourced by a lower-right corner signal. If the RESET input pad is not used as a global reset after configuration, this pad can be used as a normal input pad. During start-up, the release of the global set/reset, the release of the I/Os, and the release of the external DONE signal can each be timed individually based upon the start-up clock. The start-up clock can come from CCLK or it can be routed into the start-up block using the lower-right corner routing resources. More details on start-up can be found in the FPGA States of Operation section. Lucent Technologies Inc. Primary Clock The primary clock distribution is shown in Figure 34. If the clock signal is from an I/O pad, it can be driven onto a clock line. The clock lines do not provide clock signals directly to the PFU; they act as clock spines from which clocks are branched to XL lines. The XL lines then feed the clocks to PFUs. A multiplexer in each PLC is used to transition from the clock spine to the branch. For a clock spine in the horizontal direction, the inputs into the multiplexer are the two lines from the left and right PICs (CKL and CKR) and the local clock line from the perpendicular direction (HCK). This signal is then buffered and driven onto one of the vertical XL lines, forming the branches. The same structure is used for a clock spine in the vertical direction. In this case, the multiplexer selects from lines from the top and bottom PICs (CKT, CKB, and VCK) and drives the signal onto one of the horizontal XL lines. Figure 34 illustrates the distribution of the low-skew primary clock to a large number of loads using a main spine and branches. Each row (column) has two dedicated clock lines originating from PICs on opposite sides of the array. The clock is input from the pads to the dedicated clock line CKT to form the clock spine (see Figure 34, Detail A). From the clock spine, net branches are routed using horizontal XL lines and then PLC clock inputs are tapped from the XL lines, as shown in Figure 34, Detail B. 37 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Clock Distribution Network (continued) Secondary Clock There are times when a primary clock is either not available or not desired, and a secondary clock is needed. For example: SEE DETAIL A CLK PIN SEE DETAIL B CLOCK BRANCHES ■ Only one input pad per PIC can be placed on the clock routing. If a second input pad in a given PIC requires global signal routing, a secondary clock route must be used. ■ Since there is only one branch driver in each PLC for either direction (vertical and horizontal), both clock lines in a particular row or column (CKL and CKR, for example) cannot drive a branch. Therefore, two clocks should not be placed into I/O pads in PICs on the opposite sides of the same row or column if global clocks are to be used. ■ Since the clock lines can only be driven from input pads, internally generated clocks should use secondary clock routing. CLOCK SPINE Figure 35 illustrates the secondary clock distribution. If the clock signal originates from either the left or right side of the FPGA, it can be routed through the TRIDI buffers in the PIC onto one of the adjacent PLC’s horizontal XL lines. If the clock signal originates from the top or bottom of the FPGA, the vertical XL lines are used for routing. In either case, an XL line is used as the clock spine. In the same manner, if a clock is only going to be used in one quadrant, the XH lines can be used as a clock spine. The routing of the clock spine from the input pads to the VXL (VXH) using the BIDIs (BIDIHs) is shown in Figure 35, Detail A. PIC PT8 A DT B DT C D DT DT PLC R1C8 CLOCK SPINE PLC R18C8 DETAIL A HCK HCK R7C7 R7C8 CKT In each PLC, a low-skew connection through a longline driver can be used to connect a horizontal XL line to a vertical XL line or vice versa. As shown in Figure 35, Detail B, this is used to route the branches from the clock spine. If the clock spine is a vertical XL line, then the branches are horizontal XL lines and vice versa. The clock is then routed into each PLC from the XL line clock branches. To minimize skew, the PLC clock input for all PLCs must be connected to the branch XL lines, not the spine XL line. Even in PLCs where the clock is routed from the spine to the branches, the clock should be routed back into the PLC from the clock branch. HXL HXL CLOCK BRANCH If the clock is to drive only a limited number of loads, the PFUs can be connected directly to the clock spine. In this case, all flip-flops driven by the clock must be located in the same row or column. CLOCK SPINES DETAIL B CKB CKT 5-4480(F).r3 Figure 34. Primary Clock Distribution 38 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Clock Distribution Network (continued) The following equation can be used to determine pin names: Alternatively, the clock can be routed from the spine to the branches by using the BIDIs instead of the long-line drivers. This results in added delay in the clock net, but the clock skew is approximately equal to the clock routed using the long-line drivers. This method can be used to create a clock that is used in only one quadrant. The XH lines act as a clock spine, which is then routed to perpendicular XH lines (the branches) using the BIDIHs. Pad number = P[RL][TB]n ± (i x 4)[A – D] Where i = 1—8, and n is the current PIC number. For more information, please refer to Utilizing the ORCA® OR2C/TxxA Clock Distribution Network Application Note (AP97-055FPGA). SEE DETAIL A SEE DETAIL B CLK PIN Clock signals, such as the output of a counter, can also be generated in PLCs and routed onto an XL line, which then acts as a clock spine. Although the clock can be generated in any PLC, it is recommended that the clock be located as close to the center of the FPGA as possible to minimize clock skew. CLOCK BRANCHES Selecting Clock Input Pins Any user I/O pin on an ORCA FPGA can be used as a very fast, low-skew clock input. Choosing the first clock pin is completely arbitrary, but using a pin that is near the center of an edge of the device (as shown in Figures 34 and 35) will provide the lowest skew clock network. The pin-to-pin timing numbers in the Timing Characteristics section of this data book assume that the clock pin is in one of the four PICs at the center of any side of the device. CLOCK SPINE PA DT PB DT PC DT PD DT If it is desired to use a pin for one of the first eight clocks that is not within the center four PICs of any side of the device and primary clock routing is desired, the pad names (see Pin Information) of the two clock pins on the top or bottom of the device cannot be a multiplier of four PICs away. The same rule applies to clock pins on the left or right side of the device. VXL[3] VXL[2] VXL[1] VXL[0] These rules should be followed iteratively until a total of eight clocks (or other global signals) have been selected: four from the left/right sides of the device, and four from the top/bottom sides of the device. If more than eight clocks are needed, then select another pin outside the center four PICs to use primary-clock routing, use secondary clock routing for any pin, or use local clock routing. VXH[3] VXH[2] VXH[1] VXH[0] Once the first clock pin has been chosen, there are only two sets of pins (within the center four PICs on each side of the device) that should not be chosen as the second clock pin: a pin from the same PIC, and/or a pin from the PIC on the exact opposite edge of the die (i.e., if a pin from a PIC on the top edge is chosen for the first clock, the same PIC on the bottom edge should not be chosen for the second clock). DETAIL A HCK VCK PFU DETAIL B 5-4481(F).r2 Figure 35. Secondary Clock Distribution Lucent Technologies Inc. 39 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs FPGA States of Operation operating voltage (4.75 V for OR2CxxA commercial devices and 3.0 V for OR2TxxA/B devices). Prior to becoming operational, the FPGA goes through a sequence of states, including initialization, configuration, and start-up. Figure 36 outlines these three FPGA states. At the end of initialization, the default configuration option is that the configuration RAM is written to a low state. This prevents shorts prior to configuration. As a configuration option, after the first configuration (i.e., at reconfiguration), the user can reconfigure without clearing the internal configuration RAM first. POWERUP – POWER-ON TIME DELAY The active-low, open-drain initialization signal INIT is released and must be pulled high by an external resistor when initialization is complete. To synchronize the configuration of multiple FPGAs, one or more INIT pins should be wire-ANDed. If INIT is held low by one or more FPGAs or an external device, the FPGA remains in the initialization state. INIT can be used to signal that the FPGAs are not yet initialized. After INIT goes high for two internal clock cycles, the mode lines (M[3:0]) are sampled and the FPGA enters the configuration state. INITIALIZATION – CLEAR CONFIGURATION MEMORY – INIT LOW, HDC HIGH, LDC LOW RESET, INIT, OR PRGM LOW BIT ERROR YES NO YES NO CONFIGURATION – M[3:0] MODE IS SELECTED – CONFIGURATION DATA FRAME WRITTEN – INIT HIGH, HDC HIGH, LDC LOW – DOUT ACTIVE RESET OR PRGM LOW The high during configuration (HDC), low during configuration (LDC), and DONE signals are active outputs in the FPGA’s initialization and configuration states. HDC, LDC, and DONE can be used to provide control of external logic signals such as reset, bus enable, or PROM enable during configuration. For parallel master configuration modes, these signals provide PROM enable control and allow the data pins to be shared with user logic signals. START-UP – ACTIVE I/O – RELEASE INTERNAL RESET – DONE GOES HIGH PRGM LOW OPERATION 5-4529(F).r6 Figure 36. FPGA States of Operation Initialization Upon powerup, the device goes through an initialization process. First, an internal power-on-reset circuit is triggered when power is applied. When VDD reaches the voltage at which portions of the FPGA begin to operate (2.5 V to 3 V for the OR2CxxA, 2.2 V to 2.7 V for the OR2TxxA/OR2TxxB), the I/Os are configured based on the configuration mode, as determined by the mode select inputs M[2:0]. A time-out delay is initiated when VDD reaches between 3.0 V and 4.0 V (OR2CxxA) or 2.7 V to 3.0 V (OR2TxxA/2TxxB) to allow the power supply voltage to stabilize. The INIT and DONE outputs are low. At powerup, if VDD does not rise from 2.0 V to VDD in less than 25 ms, the user should delay configuration by inputting a low into INIT, PRGM, or RESET until VDD is greater than the recommended minimum 40 If configuration has begun, an assertion of RESET or PRGM initiates an abort, returning the FPGA to the initialization state. The PRGM and RESET pins must be pulled back high before the FPGA will enter the configuration state. During the start-up and operating states, only the assertion of PRGM causes a reconfiguration. In the master configuration modes, the FPGA is the source of configuration clock (CCLK). In this mode, the initialization state is extended to ensure that, in daisychain operation, all daisy-chained slave devices are ready. Independent of differences in clock rates, master mode devices remain in the initialization state an additional six internal clock cycles after INIT goes high. When configuration is initiated, a counter in the FPGA is set to 0 and begins to count configuration clock cycles applied to the FPGA. As each configuration data frame is supplied to the FPGA, it is internally assembled into data words. Each data word is loaded into the internal configuration memory. The configuration loading process is complete when the internal length count equals the loaded length count in the length count field, and the required end of configuration frame is written. Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs FPGA States of Operation (continued) VDD RESET PRGM INIT M[3:0] CCLK HDC LDC DONE USER I/O INTERNAL RESET (gsm) INITIALIZATION CONFIGURATION START-UP OPERATION 5-4482(F) Figure 37. Initialization/Configuration/Start-Up Waveforms All OR2CxxA I/Os operate as TTL inputs during configuration (OR2TxxA/OR2TxxB I/Os are CMOS-only). All I/Os that are not used during the configuration process are 3-stated with internal pull-ups. During configuration, the PLC latch/FFs are held set/reset and the internal BIDI buffers are 3-stated. The TRIDIs in the PICs are not 3-stated. The combinatorial logic begins to function as the FPGA is configured. Figure 37 shows the general waveform of the initialization, configuration, and start-up states. Lucent Technologies Inc. Configuration The ORCA Series FPGA functionality is determined by the state of internal configuration RAM. This configuration RAM can be loaded in a number of different modes. In these configuration modes, the FPGA can act as a master or a slave of other devices in the system. The decision as to which configuration mode to use is a system design issue. The next section discusses configuration in detail, including the configuration data format and the configuration modes used to load the configuration data in the FPGA. 41 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs FPGA States of Operation (continued) Start-Up After configuration, the FPGA enters the start-up phase. This phase is the transition between the configuration and operational states and begins when the number of CCLKs received after INIT goes high is equal to the value of the length count field in the configuration frame and when the end of configuration frame has been written. The system design issue in the start-up phase is to ensure the user I/Os become active without inadvertently activating devices in the system or causing bus contention. A second system design concern is the timing of the release of global set/reset of the PLC latches/FFs. There are configuration options that control the relative timing of three events: DONE going high, release of the set/reset of internal FFs, and user I/Os becoming active. Figure 38 shows the start-up timing for both the ORCA and ATT3000 Series FPGAs. The system designer determines the relative timing of the I/Os becoming active, DONE going high, and the release of the set/reset of internal FFs. In the ORCA Series FPGA, the three events can occur in any arbitrary sequence. This means that they can occur before or after each other, or they can occur simultaneously. There are four main start-up modes: CCLK_NOSYNC, CCLK_SYNC, UCLK_NOSYNC, and UCLK_SYNC. The only difference between the modes starting with CCLK and those starting with UCLK is that for the UCLK modes, a user clock must be supplied to the start-up logic. The timing of start-up events is then based upon this user clock, rather than CCLK. The difference between the SYNC and NOSYNC modes is that, for SYNC mode, the timing of two of the start-up events (release of the set/reset of internal FFs and the I/Os becoming active) is triggered by the rise of the external DONE pin followed by a variable number of rising clock edges (either CCLK or UCLK). For the NOSYNC mode, the timing of these two events is based only on either CCLK or UCLK. DONE is an open-drain bidirectional pin that may include an optional (enabled by default) pull-up resistor to accommodate wired ANDing. The open-drain DONE signals from multiple FPGAs can be tied together (ANDed) with a pull-up (internal or external) and used 42 as an active-high ready signal, an active-low PROM enable, or a reset to other portions of the system. When used in SYNC mode, these ANDed DONE pins can be used to synchronize the other two start-up events, since they can all be synchronized to the same external signal. This signal will not rise until all FPGAs release their DONE pins, allowing the signal to be pulled high. The default for ORCA is the CCLK_SYNC synchronized start-up mode where DONE is released on the first CCLK rising edge, C1 (see Figure 38). Since this is a synchronized start-up mode, the open-drain DONE signal can be held low externally to stop the occurrence of the other two start-up events. Once the DONE pin has been released and pulled up to a high level, the other two start-up events can be programmed individually to either happen immediately or after up to four rising edges of CCLK (Di, Di + 1, Di + 2, Di + 3, Di + 4). The default is for both events to happen immediately after DONE is released and pulled high. A commonly used design technique is to release DONE one or more clock cycles before allowing the I/O to become active. This allows other configuration devices, such as PROMs, to be disconnected using the DONE signal so that there is no bus contention when the I/Os become active. In addition to controlling the FPGA during start-up, other start-up techniques that avoid contention include using isolation devices between the FPGA and other circuits in the system, reassigning I/O locations and maintaining I/Os as 3-stated outputs until contentions are resolved. Each of these start-up options can be selected during bit stream generation in ORCA Foundry, using Advanced Options. For more information, please see the ORCA Foundry documentation. Reconfiguration To reconfigure the FPGA when the device is operating in the system, a low pulse is input into PRGM. The configuration data in the FPGA is cleared, and the I/Os not used for configuration are 3-stated. The FPGA then samples the mode select inputs and begins reconfiguration. When reconfiguration is complete, DONE is released, allowing it to be pulled high. Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs FPGA States of Operation (continued) ATT3000 Partial Reconfiguration All ORCA device families have been designed to allow a partial reconfiguration of the FPGA at any time. This is done by setting a bit stream option in the previous configuration sequence that tells the FPGA to not reset all of the configuration RAM during a reconfiguration. Then only the configuration frames that are to be modified need to be rewritten, thereby reducing the configuration time. CCLK PERIOD F DONE I/O GLOBAL RESET Other bit stream options are also available that allow one portion of the FPGA to remain in operation while a partial reconfiguration is being done. If this is done, the user must be careful to not cause contention between the two configurations (the bit stream resident in the FPGA and the partial reconfiguration bit stream) as the second reconfiguration bit stream is being loaded. ORCA CCLK_NOSYNC F DONE C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4 I/O GSRN ACTIVE Other Configuration Options ORCA CCLK_SYNC Configuration options used during device start-up were previously discussed in the FPGA States of Operation section of this data sheet. There are many other configuration options available to the user that can be set during bit stream generation in ORCA Foundry. These include options to enable boundary scan, readback options, and options to control and use the internal oscillator after configuration. DONE IN DONE I/O F C1, C2, C3, OR C4 GSRN ACTIVE Di Di + 1 Di + 2 Di + 3 Di + 4 Di Di + 1 Di + 2 Di + 3 Di + 4 ORCA UCLK_NOSYNC UCLK Other useful options that affect the next configuration (not the current configuration process) include options to disable the global set/reset during configuration, disable the 3-state of I/Os during configuration, and disable the reset of internal RAMs during configuration to allow for partial configurations (see above). For more information on how to set these and other configuration options, please see the ORCA Foundry documentation. F DONE I/O C1 GSRN ACTIVE U1 U2 U3 U4 U1 U2 U3 U4 U1 U2 U3 U4 ORCA UCLK_SYNC Configuration Data Format DONE IN DONE I/O C1 F U1, U2, U3, OR U4 GSRN ACTIVE Di Di + 1 Di + 2 Di + 3 Di Di + 1 Di + 2 Di + 3 Di + 4 UCLK PERIOD The ORCA Foundry Development System interfaces with front-end design entry tools and provides the tools to produce a fully configured FPGA. This section discusses using the ORCA Foundry Development System to generate configuration RAM data and then provides the details of the configuration frame format. SYNCHRONIZATION UNCERTAINTY F = finished, no more CLKs required. 5-2761(F).r4 Figure 38. Start-Up Waveforms Lucent Technologies Inc. The ORCA Series 2 series of FPGAs are enhanced versions of the ORCA ATT2Cxx/ATT2Txx architectures that provide upward bit stream compatibility for both series of devices as well as with each other. 43 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Configuration Data Format (continued) Using ORCA Foundry to Generate Configuration RAM Data The configuration data defines the I/O functionality, logic, and interconnections. The bit stream is generated by the development system. The bit stream created by the bit stream generation tool is a series of 1s and 0s used to write the FPGA configuration RAM. The bit stream can be loaded into the FPGA using one of the configuration modes discussed later. In the bit stream generator, the designer selects options which affect the FPGA’s functionality. Using the output of the bit stream generator, circuit.bit, the development system’s download tool can load the configuration data into the ORCA series FPGA evaluation board from a PC or workstation. Alternatively, a user can program a PROM (such as the ATT1700A Series Serial ROM or a standard EPROM) and load the FPGA from the PROM. The development system’s PROM programming tool produces a file in .mks or .exo format. Configuration Data Frame A detailed description of the frame format is shown in Figure 39. The header frame begins with a series of 1s and a preamble of 0010, followed by a 24-bit length count field representing the total number of configuration clocks needed to complete the loading of the FPGAs. Following the header frame is an optional ID frame. This frame contains data used to determine if the bit stream is being loaded to the correct type of ORCA FPGA (i.e., a bit stream generated for an OR2C15A is being sent to an OR2C15A). Since the OR2CxxA devices are bit stream compatible with the ATT2Cxx, ATT2Txx, OR2TxxA, and OR2TxxB families, a bit stream from any of these devices will not cause an error when loaded into an OR2CxxA, OR2TxxA, or OR2TxxB device. The ID frame has a secondary function of optionally enabling the parity checking logic for the rest of the data frames. The configuration data frames follow. Each frame starts with a 0 start bit and ends with three or more 1 stop bits. Following each start bit are four control bits: a program bit, set to 1 if this is a data frame; a compress bit, set to 1 if this is a compressed frame; and the opar and epar parity bits (see Bit Stream Error Checking). An 11-bit address field that determines in which column the FPGA is to be written is followed by alignment and write control bits. For uncompressed frames, the data bits needed to write one column in the FPGA are next. For compressed frames, the data bits from the previous frame are sent to a different FPGA column, as specified by the new address bits; therefore, new data bits are not required. When configuration of the current FPGA is finished, an end-of-configuration frame (where the program bit is set to 0) is sent to the FPGA. The length and number of data frames and information on the PROM size for the Series 3 FPGAs are given in Table 7. Table 7. Configuration Frame Size OR2C/ 2T04A OR2C/ 2T06A OR2C/ 2T08A OR2C/ 2T10A OR2C/ 2T12A OR2C/ 2T15A/B OR2C/ 2T26A OR2C/ 2T40A/B # of Frames 480 568 656 744 832 920 1096 1378 Data Bits/Frame 110 130 150 170 190 210 250 316 Configuration Data (# of frames x # of data bits/frame) 52,800 73,840 98,400 126,480 158,080 193,200 274,000 435,448 Maximum Total # Bits/Frame (align bits, 1 write bit, 8 stop bits) 136 160 176 200 216 240 280 344 Maximum Configuration Data (# bits x # of frames) 65,280 90,880 115,456 148,800 179,712 220,800 306,880 474,032 Maximum PROM Size (bits) (add 48-bit header, ID frame, and 40-bit end of configuration frame) 65,504 91,128 115,720 149,088 180,016 221,128 307,248 474,464 Devices 44 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Configuration Data Format (continued) The data frames for all the Series 2 series devices are given in Table 8. An alignment field is required in the slave parallel mode for the uncompressed format. The alignment field (shown by [A]) is a series of 0s: five for the OR2C06A/OR2T06A, OR2C10A/OR2T10A, OR2C15A/OR2T15A/OR2T15B, and OR2C26A/OR2T26A; three for the OR2C40A/OR2T40A/OR2T40B; and one for the OR2C04A/OR2T04A, OR2C08A/OR2T08A, and OR2C12A/ OR2T12A. The alignment field is not required in any other mode. Table 8. Configuration Data Frames OR2C04A/OR2T04A Uncompressed 010 opar epar [addr10:0] [A]1[Data109:0]111 Compressed 011 opar epar [addr10:0] 111 OR2C06A/OR2T06A Uncompressed 010 opar epar [addr10:0] [A]1[Data129:0]111 Compressed 011 opar epar [addr10:0] 111 OR2C08A/OR2T08A Uncompressed 010 opar epar [addr10:0] [A]1[Data149:0]111 Compressed 011 opar epar [addr10:0] 111 OR2C10A/OR2T10A Uncompressed 010 opar epar [addr10:0] [A]1[Data169:0]111 Compressed 011 opar epar [addr10:0] 111 OR2C12A/OR2T12A Uncompressed 010 opar epar [addr10:0] [A]1[Data189:0]111 Compressed 011 opar epar [addr10:0] 111 OR2C15A/OR2T15A/OR2T15B Uncompressed 010 opar epar [addr10:0] [A]1[Data209:0]111 Compressed 011 opar epar [addr10:0] 111 OR2C26A/OR2T26A Uncompressed 010 opar epar [addr10:0] [A]1[Data249:0]111 Compressed 011 opar epar [addr10:0] 111 OR2C40A/OR2T40A/OR2T40B Uncompressed 010 opar epar [addr10:0] [A]1[Data315:0]111 Compressed 011 opar epar [addr10:0] 111 EIGHT 1s 0010 PREAMBLE 24-bit LENGTH COUNT LEADING HEADER DATA FRAMES FPGA #1 DATA FRAMES FPGA #2 END OF CONFIGURATION FRAME FPGA #1 POSTAMBLE END OF CONFIGURATION FRAME FPGA #2 5-4530(F) Figure 39. Serial Configuration Data Format Lucent Technologies Inc. 45 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Configuration Data Format (continued) Table 9. Configuration Frame Format and Contents Header ID Frame (Optional) Configuration Data Frame (repeated for each data frame) End of Configuration Postamble 11111111 0010 24-Bit Length Count 1111 0 P—1 C—0 Opar, Epar Addr[10:0] = 11111111111 Prty_En Reserved [42:0] ID 111 0 P—1 or 0 C—1 or 0 Leading header—4 bits minimum dummy bits Preamble Configuration frame length Trailing header—4 bits minimum dummy bits Frame start Must be set to 1 to indicate data frame Must be set to 0 to indicate uncompressed Frame parity bits ID frame address Opar, Epar Addr[10:0] A 1 Data Bits . . 111 0010011111111111 Set to 1 to enable parity Reserved bits set to 0 20-bit part ID Three or more stop bits (high) to separate frames Frame start 1 indicates data frame; 0 indicates all frames are written Uncompressed—0 indicates data and address are supplied; Compressed—1 indicates only address is supplied Frame parity bits Column address in FPGA to be written Alignment bit (different number of 0s needed for each part) Write bit—used in uncompressed data frame Needed only in an uncompressed data frame . . One or more stop bits (high) to separate frames 16 bits—00 indicates all frames are written 111111 . . . . . Additional 1s Note: For slave parallel mode, the byte containing the preamble must be 11110010. The number of leading header dummy bits must be (n * 8) + 4, where n is any nonnegative integer and the number of trailing dummy bits must be (n * 8), where n is any positive integer. The number of stop bits/frame for slave parallel mode must be (x * 8), where x is a positive integer. Note also that the bit stream generator tool supplies a bit stream which is compatible with all configuration modes, including slave parallel mode. 46 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 Bit Stream Error Checking There are three different types of bit stream error checking performed in the ORCA Series 2 FPGAs: ID frame, frame alignment, and parity checking. An optional ID data frame can be sent to a specified address in the FPGA. This ID frame contains a unique code for the part it was generated for which is compared within the FPGA. Any differences are flagged as an ID error. This frame is automatically created by the bit stream generation program in ORCA Foundry. Every data frame in the FPGA begins with a start bit set to 0 and three or more stop bits set to 1. If any of the three previous bits were a 0 when a start bit is encountered, it is flagged as a frame alignment error. Parity checking is also done on the FPGA for each frame, if it has been enabled by setting the prty_en bit to 1 in the ID frame. This is set by enabling the parity check option in the bit stream generation program of ORCA Foundry. Two parity bits, opar and epar, are used to check the parity of bits in alternating bit positions to even parity in each data frame. If an odd number of ones is found for either the even bits (starting with the start bit) or the odd bits (starting with the program bit), then a parity error is flagged. When any of the three possible errors occur, the FPGA is forced into the INIT state, forcing INIT low. The FPGA will remain in this state until either the RESET or PRGM pins are asserted. FPGA Configuration Modes ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Table 10. Configuration Modes M2 M1 M0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 CCLK Output Input Reserved Input Output Output Output Input There are three basic FPGA configuration modes: master, slave, and peripheral. The configuration data can be transmitted to the FPGA serially or in parallel bytes. As a master, the FPGA provides the control signals out to strobe data in. As a slave device, a clock is generated externally and provided into CCLK. In the peripheral mode, the FPGA acts as a microprocessor peripheral. Table 10 lists the functions of the configuration mode pins. Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Master Slave Parallel Serial Parallel Sync Peripheral Master (up) Async Peripheral Master (down) Slave Parallel Parallel Parallel Parallel Serial Master Parallel Mode The master parallel configuration mode is generally used to interface to industry-standard byte-wide memory, such as the 2764 and larger EPROMs. Figure 40 provides the connections for master parallel mode. The FPGA outputs an 18-bit address on A[17:0] to memory and reads one byte of configuration data on the rising edge of RCLK. The parallel bytes are internally serialized starting with the least significant bit, D0. A[17:0] A[17:0] DOUT CCLK D[7:0] OE CE VDD VDD OR GND TO DAISYCHAINED DEVICES D[7:0] EPROM PROGRAM There are eight methods for configuring the FPGA. Seven of the configuration modes are selected on the M0, M1, and M2 inputs. The eighth configuration mode is accessed through the boundary-scan interface. A fourth input, M3, is used to select the frequency of the internal oscillator, which is the source for CCLK in some configuration modes. The nominal frequencies of the internal oscillator are 1.25 MHz and 10 MHz. The 1.25 MHz frequency is selected when the M3 input is unconnected or driven to a high state. Configuration Mode DONE PRGM M2 M1 M0 ORCA SERIES FPGA HDC LDC RCLK 5-4483(F) Figure 40. Master Parallel Configuration Schematic There are two parallel master modes: master up and master down. In master up, the starting memory address is 00000 Hex and the FPGA increments the address for each byte loaded. In master down, the starting memory address is 3FFFF Hex and the FPGA decrements the address. One master mode FPGA can interface to the memory and provide configuration data on DOUT to additional FPGAs in a daisy chain. The configuration data on DOUT is provided synchronously with the falling edge of CCLK. The frequency of the CCLK output is eight times that of RCLK. 47 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs FPGA Configuration Modes (continued) Master Serial Mode In the master serial mode, the FPGA loads the configuration data from an external serial ROM. The configuration data is either loaded automatically at start-up or on a PRGM command to reconfigure. The ATT1700 and ATT1700A Series can be used to configure the FPGA in the master serial mode. This provides a simple 4-pin interface in an 8-pin package. The ATT1736, ATT1765, and ATT17128 serial ROMs store 32K, 64K, and 128K bits, respectively. Configuration in the master serial mode can be done at powerup and/or upon a configure command. The system or the FPGA must activate the serial ROM's RESET/OE and CE inputs. At powerup, the FPGA and serial ROM each contain internal power-on reset circuitry that allows the FPGA to be configured without the system providing an external signal. The power-on reset circuitry causes the serial ROM's internal address pointer to be reset. After powerup, the FPGA automatically enters its initialization phase. The serial ROM/FPGA interface used depends on such factors as the availability of a system reset pulse, availability of an intelligent host to generate a configure command, whether a single serial ROM is used or multiple serial ROMs are cascaded, whether the serial ROM contains a single or multiple configuration programs, etc. Because of differing system requirements and capabilities, a single FPGA/serial ROM interface is generally not appropriate for all applications. Data is read in the FPGA sequentially from the serial ROM. The DATA output from the serial ROM is connected directly into the DIN input of the FPGA. The CCLK output from the FPGA is connected to the CLOCK input of the serial ROM. During the configuration process, CCLK clocks one data bit on each rising edge. Since the data and clock are direct connects, the FPGA/serial ROM design task is to use the system or FPGA to enable the RESET/OE and CE of the serial ROM(s). There are several methods for enabling the serial ROM’s RESET/OE and CE inputs. The serial ROM's RESET/OE is programmable to function with RESET active-high and OE active-low or RESET activelow and OE active-high. In Figure 41, serial ROMs are cascaded to configure multiple daisy-chained FPGAs. The host generates a 500 ns low pulse into the FPGA's PRGM input. The FPGA’s INIT input is connected to the serial ROM’s RESET/OE input, which has been programmed to function with RESET active-low and OE active-high. 48 The FPGA DONE is routed to the CE pin. The low on DONE enables the serial ROMs. At the completion of configuration, the high on the FPGA's DONE disables the serial ROM. Serial ROMs can also be cascaded to support the configuration of multiple FPGAs or to load a single FPGA when configuration data requirements exceed the capacity of a single serial ROM. After the last bit from the first serial ROM is read, the serial ROM outputs CEO low and 3-states the DATA output. The next serial ROM recognizes the low on CE input and outputs configuration data on the DATA output. After configuration is complete, the FPGA’s DONE output into CE disables the serial ROMs. This FPGA/serial ROM interface is not used in applications in which a serial ROM stores multiple configuration programs. In these applications, the next configuration program to be loaded is stored at the ROM location that follows the last address for the previous configuration program. The reason the interface in Figure 41 will not work in this application is that the low output on the INIT signal would reset the serial ROM address pointer, causing the first configuration to be reloaded. In some applications, there can be contention on the FPGA's DIN pin. During configuration, DIN receives configuration data, and after configuration, it is a user I/O. If there is contention, an early DONE at start-up (selected in ORCA Foundry) may correct the problem. An alternative is to use LDC to drive the serial ROM's CE pin. In order to reduce noise, it is generally better to run the master serial configuration at 1.25 MHz (M3 pin tied high), rather than 10 MHz, if possible. DATA DOUT DIN TO DAISYCHAINED DEVICES CCLK CLK ATT1700A DONE CE RESET/OE INIT ORCA SERIES FPGA CEO DATA CLK PRGM ATT1700A CE RESET/OE CEO TO MORE SERIAL ROMs AS NEEDED M2 M1 M0 PROGRAM 5-4456.1(F) Figure 41. Master Serial Configuration Schematic Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs FPGA Configuration Modes (continued) Synchronous Peripheral Mode Asynchronous Peripheral Mode In the synchronous peripheral mode, byte-wide data is input into D[7:0] on the rising edge of the CCLK input. The first data byte is clocked in on the second CCLK after INIT goes high. Subsequent data bytes are clocked in on every eighth rising edge of CCLK. The RDY signal is an output which acts as an acknowledge. RDY goes high one CCLK after data is clocked and, after one CCLK cycle, returns low. The process repeats until all of the data is loaded into the FPGA. The data begins shifting on DOUT 1.5 cycles after it is loaded in parallel. It requires additional CCLKs after the last byte is loaded to complete the shifting. Figure 43 shows the connections for synchronous peripheral mode. Figure 42 shows the connections needed for the asynchronous peripheral mode. In this mode, the FPGA system interface is similar to that of a microprocessorperipheral interface. The microprocessor generates the control signals to write an 8-bit byte into the FPGA. The FPGA control inputs include active-low CS0 and activehigh CS1 chip selects, a write WR input, and a read RD input. The chip selects can be cycled or maintained at a static level during the configuration cycle. Each byte of data is written into the FPGA’s D[7:0] input pins. The FPGA provides a RDY status output to indicate that another byte can be loaded. A low on RDY indicates that the double-buffered hold/shift registers are not ready to receive data, and this pin must be monitored to go high before another byte of data can be written. The shortest time RDY is low occurs when a byte is loaded into the hold register and the shift register is empty, in which case the byte is immediately transferred to the shift register. The longest time for RDY to remain low occurs when a byte is loaded into the holding register and the shift register has just started shifting configuration data into configuration RAM. The RDY status is also available on the D7 pin by enabling the chip selects, setting WR high, and applying RD low, where the RD input is an output enable for the D7 pin when RD is low. The D[6:0] pins are not enabled to drive when RD is low and, thus, only act as input pins in asynchronous peripheral mode. DOUT 8 MICROPROCESSOR PRGM CCLK D[7:0] RDY/BUSY INIT DONE ADDRESS DECODE LOGIC CS0 CS1 BUS CONTROLLER RD WR VDD M2 M1 M0 TO DAISYCHAINED DEVICES As with master modes, the peripheral modes can be used as the lead FPGA for a daisy chain of slave FPGAs. DOUT 8 TO DAISYCHAINED DEVICES PRGM D[7:0] ORCA SERIES FPGA MICROPROCESSOR CCLK RDY/BUSY INIT +5 V M2 M1 M0 HDC LDC 5-4486(F) Figure 43. Synchronous Peripheral Configuration Schematic ORCA SERIES FPGA HDC LDC 5-4484(F) Figure 42. Asynchronous Peripheral Configuration Schematic Lucent Technologies Inc. 49 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs FPGA Configuration Modes (continued) Slave Parallel Mode Slave Serial Mode The slave parallel mode is essentially the same as the slave serial mode except that 8 bits of data are input on pins D[7:0] for each CCLK cycle. Due to 8 bits of data being input per CCLK cycle, the DOUT pin does not contain a valid bit stream for slave parallel mode. As a result, the lead device cannot be used in the slave parallel mode in a daisy-chain configuration. The slave serial mode is primarily used when multiple FPGAs are configured in a daisy chain. The serial slave serial mode is also used on the FPGA evaluation board which interfaces to the download cable. A device in the slave serial mode can be used as the lead device in a daisy chain. Figure 44 shows the connections for the slave serial configuration mode. The configuration data is provided into the FPGA’s DIN input synchronous with the configuration clock CCLK input. After the FPGA has loaded its configuration data, it retransmits the incoming configuration data on DOUT. CCLK is routed into all slave serial mode devices in parallel. Multiple slave FPGAs can be loaded with identical configurations simultaneously. This is done by loading the configuration data into the DIN inputs in parallel. Figure 45 is a schematic of the connections for the slave parallel configuration mode. WR and CS0 are active-low chip select signals, and CS1 is an activehigh chip select signal. These chip selects allow the user to configure multiple FPGAs in slave parallel mode using an 8-bit data bus common to all of the FPGAs. These chip selects can then be used to select the FPGA(s) to be configured with a given bit stream, but once an FPGA has been selected, it cannot be deselected until it has been completely programmed. 8 DOUT INIT MICROPROCESSOR OR DOWNLOAD CABLE PRGM DONE INIT MICROPROCESSOR OR SYSTEM ORCA SERIES FPGA D[7:0] DONE TO DAISYCHAINED DEVICES CCLK PRGM ORCA SERIES FPGA VDD CS1 CS0 WR CCLK DIN VDD M2 HDC M1 LDC M0 M2 M1 M0 HDC 5-4487(F) LDC 5-4485(F) Figure 45. Slave Parallel Configuration Schematic Figure 44. Slave Serial Configuration Schematic 50 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs FPGA Configuration Modes (continued) on the negative edge of CCLK. Figure 46 shows the connections for loading multiple FPGAs in a daisychain configuration. Daisy Chain The generation of CCLK for the daisy-chained devices which are in slave serial mode differs depending on the configuration mode of the lead device. A master parallel mode device uses its internal timing generator to produce an internal CCLK at eight times its memory address rate (RCLK). The asynchronous peripheral mode device outputs eight CCLKs for each write cycle. If the lead device is configured in either synchronous peripheral or a slave mode, CCLK is routed to the lead device and to all of the daisy-chained devices. Multiple FPGAs can be configured by using a daisy chain of the FPGAs. Daisy chaining uses a lead FPGA and one or more FPGAs configured in slave serial mode. The lead FPGA can be configured in any mode except slave parallel mode. (Daisy chaining is not available with the boundary-scan ram_w instruction, discussed later.) All daisy-chained FPGAs are connected in series. Each FPGA reads and shifts the preamble and length count in on positive CCLK and out on negative CCLK edges. The development system can create a composite configuration bit stream for configuring daisy-chained FPGAs. The frame format is a preamble, a length count for the total bit stream, multiple concatenated data frames, an end-of-configuration frame per device, a postamble, and an additional fill bit per device in the serial chain. An upstream FPGA that has received the preamble and length count outputs a high on DOUT until it has received the appropriate number of data frames so that downstream FPGAs do not receive frame start bits (0s). After loading and retransmitting the preamble and length count to a daisy chain of slave devices, the lead device loads its configuration data frames. The loading of configuration data continues after the lead device has received its configuration data if its internal frame bit counter has not reached the length count. When the configuration RAM is full and the number of bits received is less than the length count field, the FPGA shifts any additional data out on DOUT. As seen in Figure 46, the INIT pins for all of the FPGAs are connected together. This is required to guarantee that powerup and initialization will work correctly. In general, the DONE pins for all of the FPGAs are also connected together as shown to guarantee that all of the FPGAs enter the start-up state simultaneously. This may not be required, depending upon the start-up sequence desired. The configuration data is read into DIN of slave devices on the positive edge of CCLK, and shifted out DOUT CCLK A[17:0] EPROM D[7:0] D[7:0] OE CE DONE CCLK DIN ORCA SERIES FPGA MASTER DIN DOUT ORCA SERIES FPGA SLAVE #1 VDD VDD OR GND M2 M1 M0 INIT HDC LDC RCLK VDD PRGM M2 M1 M0 DOUT ORCA SERIES FPGA SLAVE #2 DONE PRGM PROGRAM CCLK DOUT A[17:0] VDD DONE INIT VDD HDC LDC RCLK PRGM M2 M1 M0 INIT HDC LDC RCLK VDD 5-4488(F) Figure 46. Daisy-Chain Configuration Schematic Lucent Technologies Inc. 51 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Special Function Blocks Special function blocks in the Series 2 provide extra capabilities beyond general FPGA operation. These blocks reside in the corners of the FPGA array. Single Function Blocks Most of the special function blocks perform a specific dedicated function. These functions are data/configuration readback control, global 3-state control (TS_ALL), internal oscillator generation, global set/reset (GSRN), and start-up logic. Readback Logic The readback logic is located in the upper right corner of the FPGA. Readback is used to read back the configuration data and, optionally, the state of the PFU outputs. A readback operation can be done while the FPGA is in normal system operation. The readback operation cannot be daisy-chained. To use readback, the user selects options in the bit stream generator in the ORCA Foundry Development System. Table 11 provides readback options selected in the bit stream generator tool. The table provides the number of times that the configuration data can be read back. This is intended primarily to give the user control over the security of the FPGA’s configuration program. The user can prohibit readback (0), allow a single readback (1), or allow unrestricted readback (U). Table 11. Readback Options Option Function 0 Prohibit Readback 1 Allow One Readback Only U Allow Unrestricted Number of Readbacks The pins used for readback are readback data (RD_DATA), read configuration (RD_CFG), and configuration clock (CCLK). A readback operation is initiated by a high-to-low transition on RD_CFG. The RD_CFG input must remain low during the readback operation. The readback operation can be restarted at frame 0 by driving the RD_CFG pin high, applying at least two rising edges of CCLK, and then driving RD_CFG low 52 Data Sheet June 1999 again. One bit of data is shifted out on RD_DATA at the rising edge of CCLK. The first start bit of the readback frame is transmitted out several cycles after the first rising edge of CCLK after RD_CFG is input low (see Table 48, Readback Timing Characteristics in the Timing Characteristics section). It should be noted that the RD_DATA output pin is also used as the dedicated boundary-scan output pin, TDO. If this pin is being used as TDO, the RD_DATA output from readback can be routed internally to any other pin desired. The RD_CFG input pin is also used to control the global 3-state (TS_ALL) function. Before and during configuration, the TS_ALL signal is always driven by the RD_CFG input and readback is disabled. After configuration, the selection as to whether this input drives the readback or global 3-state function is determined by a set of bit stream options. If used as the RD_CFG input for readback, the internal TS_ALL input can be routed internally to be driven by any input pin. The readback frame contains the configuration data and the state of the internal logic. During readback, the value of all five PFU outputs can be captured. The following options are allowed when doing a capture of the PFU outputs. 1. Do not capture data (the data written to the capture RAMs, usually 0, will be read back). 2. Capture data upon entering readback. 3. Capture data based upon a configurable signal internal to the FPGA. If this signal is tied to logic 0, capture RAMs are written continuously. 4. Capture data on either options 2 or 3 above. The readback frame has a similar, but not identical, format to the configuration frame. This eases a bitwise comparison between the configuration and readback data. The readback data is not inverted. Every data frame has one low start bit and one high stop bit. The preamble, including the length count field, is not part of the readback frame. The readback frame contains states in locations not used in the configuration. These locations need to be masked out when comparing the configuration and readback frames. The development system optionally provides a readback bit stream to compare to readback from the FPGA. Also note that if any of the LUTs are used as RAM and new data is written to them, these bits will not have the same values as the original configuration data frame either. Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 Special Function Blocks (continued) Global 3-State Control (TS_ALL) The TS_ALL block resides in the upper-right corner of the FPGA array. To increase the testability of the ORCA Series FPGAs, the global 3-state function (TS_ALL) disables the device. The TS_ALL signal is driven from either an external pin or an internal signal. Before and during configuration, the TS_ALL signal is driven by the input pad RD_CFG. After configuration, the TS_ALL signal can be disabled, driven from the RD_CFG input pad, or driven by a general routing signal in the upper-right corner. Before configuration, TS_ALL is active-low; after configuration, the sense of TS_ALL can be inverted. The following occur when TS_ALL is activated: 1. All of the user I/O output buffers are 3-stated, the user I/O input buffers are pulled up (with the pulldown disabled), and the input buffers are configured with TTL input thresholds (OR2CxxA only). 2. The TDO/RD_DATA output buffer is 3-stated. 3. The RD_CFG, RESET, and PRGM input buffers remain active with a pull-up. 4. The DONE output buffer is 3-stated, and the input buffer is pulled-up. Internal Oscillator The internal oscillator resides in the lower-left corner of the FPGA array. It has output clock frequencies of 1.25 MHz and 10 MHz. The internal oscillator is the source of the internal CCLK used for configuration. It may also be used after configuration as a generalpurpose clock signal. Lucent Technologies Inc. ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Global Set/Reset (GSRN) The GSRN logic resides in the lower-right corner of the FPGA. GSRN is an invertible, default, active-low signal that is used to reset all of the user-accessible latches/ FFs on the device. GSRN is automatically asserted at powerup and during configuration of the device. The timing of the release of GSRN at the end of configuration can be programmed in the start-up logic described below. Following configuration, GSRN may be connected to the RESET pin via dedicated routing, or it may be connected to any signal via normal routing. Within each PFU, individual FFs and latches can be programmed to either be set or reset when GSRN is asserted. The RESET input pad has a special relationship to GSRN. During configuration, the RESET input pad always initiates a configuration abort, as described in the FPGA States of Operation section. After configuration, the global set/reset signal (GSRN) can either be disabled (the default), directly connected to the RESET input pad, or sourced by a lower-right corner signal. If the RESET input pad is not used as a global reset after configuration, this pad can be used as a normal input pad. Start-Up Logic The start-up logic block is located in the lower right corner of the FPGA. This block can be configured to coordinate the relative timing of the release of GSRN, the activation of all user I/Os, and the assertion of the DONE signal at the end of configuration. If a start-up clock is used to time these events, the start-up clock can come from CCLK, or it can be routed into the startup block using lower-right corner routing resources. These signals are described in the Start-Up subsection of the FPGA States of Operation section. 53 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Special Function Blocks (continued) s TMS TDI TCK TDO Boundary Scan U2 The increasing complexity of integrated circuits (ICs) and IC packages has increased the difficulty of testing printed-circuit boards (PCBs). To address this testing problem, the IEEE standard 1149.1 - 1990 (IEEE Standard Test Access Port and Boundary-Scan Architecture) is implemented in the ORCA series of FPGAs. It allows users to efficiently test the interconnection between integrated circuits on a PCB as well as test the integrated circuit itself. The IEEE 1149.1 standard is a well-defined protocol that ensures interoperability among boundary-scan (BSCAN) equipped devices from different vendors. Figure 48 provides a system interface for components used in the boundary-scan testing of PCBs. The three major components shown are the test host, boundaryscan support circuit, and the devices under test (DUTs). The DUTs shown here are ORCA Series FPGAs with dedicated boundary-scan circuitry. The test host is normally one of the following: automatic test equipment (ATE), a workstation, a PC, or a microprocessor. 54 U1 net c TDI TMS TCK TDO TMS TDI TCK TDO TMS TDI TCK TDO U3 U4 SEE ENLARGED VIEW BELOW TDO TCK TMS TDI The IEEE 1149.1 standard defines a test access port (TAP) that consists of a 4-pin interface with an optional reset pin for boundary-scan testing of integrated circuits in a system. The ORCA series FPGA provides four interface pins: test data in (TDI), test mode select (TMS), test clock (TCK), and test data out (TDO). The PRGM pin used to reconfigure the device also resets the boundary-scan logic. The user test host serially loads test commands and test data into the FPGA through these pins to drive outputs and examine inputs. In the configuration shown in Figure 47, where boundary scan is used to test ICs, test data is transmitted serially into TDI of the first BSCAN device (U1), through TDO/TDI connections between BSCAN devices (U2 and U3), and out TDO of the last BSCAN device (U4). In this configuration, the TMS and TCK signals are routed to all boundary-scan ICs in parallel so that all boundary-scan components operate in the same state. In other configurations, multiple scan paths are used instead of a single ring. When multiple scan paths are used, each ring is independently controlled by its own TMS and TCK signals. TMS TDI TCK TDO net a net b PT[ij] TAPC BYPASS REGISTER BSC SCAN IN BDC DCC P_IN P_TS P_OUT INSTRUCTION REGISTER SCAN OUT PL[ij] SCAN IN BSC P_TS DCC P_OUT BDC SCAN OUT P_IN PLC ARRAY P_OUT P_TS P_IN SCAN IN BSC PR[ij] BDC DCC SCAN OUT P_OUT P_TS P_IN SCAN OUT BSC SCAN IN DCC BDC PB[ij] ENLARGED VIEW Fig.34.a(F).1C Key: BSC = boundary-scan cell, BDC = bidirectional data cell, and DCC = data control cell. Figure 47. Printed-Circuit Board with BoundaryScan Circuitry The boundary-scan support circuit shown in Figure 48 is the 497AA Boundary-Scan Master (BSM). The BSM off-loads tasks from the test host to increase test throughput. To interface between the test host and the DUTs, the BSM has a general microprocessor interface and provides parallel-to-serial/serial-to-parallel conversion, as well as three 8K data buffers. Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Special Function Blocks (continued) CCLK A[17:0] EPROM D[7:0] D[7:0] OE CE DONE DIN DIN DOUT ORCA SERIES FPGA MASTER ORCA SERIES FPGA SLAVE #1 VDD VDD OR GND INIT M2 M1 M0 VDD HDC LDC RCLK PRGM M2 M1 M0 DOUT ORCA SERIES FPGA SLAVE #2 DONE PRGM PROGRAM CCLK CCLK DOUT A[17:0] VDD DONE INIT HDC LDC RCLK VDD PRGM M2 M1 M0 INIT HDC LDC RCLK VDD 5-4488(F) Figure 48. Boundary-Scan Interface The BSM also increases test throughput with a dedicated automatic test-pattern generator and with compression of the test response with a signature analysis register. The PC-based boundary-scan test card/software allows a user to quickly prototype a boundaryscan test setup. Boundary-Scan Instructions The ORCA Series boundary-scan circuitry is used for three mandatory IEEE 1149.1 tests (EXTEST, SAMPLE/PRELOAD, BYPASS) and four ORCA-defined instructions. The 3-bit wide instruction register supports the eight instructions listed in Table 12. Table 12. Boundary-Scan Instructions Code 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Instruction EXTEST PLC Scan Ring 1 RAM Write (RAM_W) Reserved SAMPLE/PRELOAD PLC Scan Ring 2 RAM Read (RAM_R) BYPASS Lucent Technologies Inc. The external test (EXTEST) instruction allows the interconnections between ICs in a system to be tested for opens and stuck-at faults. If an EXTEST instruction is performed for the system shown in Figure 47, the connections between U1 and U2 (shown by nets a, b, and c) can be tested by driving a value onto the given nets from one device and then determining whether the same value is seen at the other device. This is determined by shifting 2 bits of data for each pin (one for the output value and one for the 3-state value) through the BSR until each one aligns to the appropriate pin. Then, based upon the value of the 3-state signal, either the I/O pad is driven to the value given in the BSR, or the BSR is updated with the input value from the I/O pad, which allows it to be shifted out TDO. The SAMPLE instruction is useful for system debugging and fault diagnosis by allowing the data at the FPGA’s I/Os to be observed during normal operation. The data for all of the I/Os is captured simultaneously into the BSR, allowing them to be shifted-out TDO to the test host. Since each I/O buffer in the PICs is bidirectional, two pieces of data are captured for each I/O pad: the value at the I/O pad and the value of the 3-state control signal. 55 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Special Function Blocks (continued) There are four ORCA-defined instructions. The PLC scan rings 1 and 2 (PSR1, PSR2) allow user-defined internal scan paths using the PLC latches/FFs. The RAM_Write Enable (RAM_W) instruction allows the user to serially configure the FPGA through TDI. The RAM_Read Enable (RAM_R) allows the user to read back RAM contents on TDO after configuration. ORCA Boundary-Scan Circuitry The ORCA Series boundary-scan circuitry includes a test access port controller (TAPC), instruction register (IR), boundary-scan register (BSR), and bypass register. It also includes circuitry to support the four predefined instructions. Figure 49 shows a functional diagram of the boundaryscan circuitry that is implemented in the ORCA series. The input pins’ (TMS, TCK, and TDI) locations vary depending on the part, and the output pin is the dedicated TDO/RD_DATA output pad. Test data in (TDI) is the serial input data. Test mode select (TMS) controls the boundary-scan test access port controller (TAPC). Test clock (TCK) is the test clock on the board. The BSR is a series connection of boundary-scan cells (BSCs) around the periphery of the IC. Each I/O pad on the FPGA, except for CCLK, DONE, and the boundaryscan pins (TCK, TDI, TMS, and TDO), is included in the BSR. The first BSC in the BSR (connected to TDI) is located in the first PIC I/O pad on the left of the top side of the FPGA (PTA PIC). The BSR proceeds clockwise around the top, right, bottom, and left sides of the array. The last BSC in the BSR (connected to TDO) is located on the top of the left side of the array (PLA3). The bypass instruction uses a single FF which resynchronizes test data that is not part of the current scan operation. In a bypass instruction, test data received on TDI is shifted out of the bypass register to TDO. Since the BSR (which requires a two FF delay for each pad) is bypassed, test throughput is increased when devices that are not part of a test operation are bypassed. The boundary-scan logic is enabled before and during configuration. After configuration, a configuration option determines whether or not boundary-scan logic is used. The 32-bit boundary-scan identification register contains the manufacturer’s ID number, unique part number, and version, but is not implemented in the ORCA series of FPGAs. If boundary scan is not used, TMS, TDI, and TCK become user I/Os, and TDO is 3-stated or used in the readback operation. I/O BUFFERS DATA REGISTERS BOUNDARY-SCAN REGISTER PSR1 REGISTER (PLCs) PSR2 REGISTER (PLCs) VDD TDI DATA MUX CONFIGURATION REGISTER (RAM_R, RAM_W) BYPASS REGISTER INSTRUCTION DECODER VDD RESET CLOCK-DR SHIFT-DR UPDATE-DR TMS TDO M U X INSTRUCTION REGISTER RESET CLOCK-IR SHIFT-IR UPDATE-IR VDD SELECT ENABLE TCK VDD TAP CONTROLLER PUR PRGM 5-2840(C).r7 Figure 49. ORCA Series Boundary-Scan Circuitry Functional Diagram 56 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Special Function Blocks (continued) ORCA Series TAP Controller (TAPC) The ORCA Series TAP controller (TAPC) is a 1149.1 compatible test access port controller. The 16 JTAG state assignments from the IEEE 1149.1 specification are used. The TAPC is controlled by TCK and TMS. The TAPC states are used for loading the IR to allow three basic functions in testing: providing test stimuli (Update-DR), test execution (Run-Test/Idle), and obtaining test responses (Capture-DR). The TAPC allows the test host to shift in and out both instructions and test data/results. The inputs and outputs of the TAPC are provided in the table below. The outputs are primarily the control signals to the instruction register and the data register. Table 13. TAP Controller Input/Outputs The TAPC generates control signals which allow capture, shift, and update operations on the instruction and data registers. In the capture operation, data is loaded into the register. In the shift operation, the captured data is shifted out while new data is shifted in. In the update operation, either the instruction register is loaded for instruction decode, or the boundary-scan register is updated for control of outputs. The test host generates a test by providing input into the ORCA Series TMS input synchronous with TCK. This sequences the TAPC through states in order to perform the desired function on the instruction register or a data register. Figure 50 provides a diagram of the state transitions for the TAPC. The next state is determined by the TMS input value. 1 TEST-LOGICRESET 0 RUN-TEST/ IDLE 0 Symbol I/O TMS I Function Test Mode Select TCK I Test Clock PUR I Powerup Reset PRGM I BSCAN Reset TRESET O Test Logic Reset Select O Select IR (high); Select DR (low) Enable O Test Data Out Enable 1 1 SELECTDR-SCAN 0 1 0 1 CAPTURE-DR CAPTURE-IR 0 0 0 SHIFT-DR 1 1 EXIT1-DR 0 0 PAUSE-IR Capture/Parallel Load DR Capture-IR O Capture/Parallel Load IR 0 EXIT2-DR EXIT2-IR 1 Shift-DR O Shift Data Register Shift-DR O Shift Instruction Register Update-DR O Update/Parallel Load DR Update-IR O Update/Parallel Load IR UPDATE-DR 1 0 1 1 1 O 1 EXIT1-IR 0 PAUSE-DR Capture-DR 0 SHIFT-IR 1 0 1 SELECTIR-SCAN 0 UPDATE-IR 1 0 5-5370(F) Lucent Technologies Inc. Figure 50. TAP Controller State Transition Diagram 57 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Special Function Blocks (continued) Boundary-Scan Cells Figure 51 is a diagram of the boundary-scan cell (BSC) in the ORCA series PICs. There are four BSCs in each PIC: one for each pad, except as noted above. The BSCs are connected serially to form the BSR. The BSC controls the functionality of the in, out, and 3-state signals for each pad. The BSC allows the I/O to function in either the normal or test mode. Normal mode is defined as when an output buffer receives input from the PLC array and provides output at the pad or when an input buffer provides input from the pad to the PLC array. In the test mode, the BSC executes a boundary-scan operation, such as shifting in scan data from an upstream BSC in the BSR, providing test stimuli to the pad, capturing test data at the pad, etc. The primary functions of the BSC are shifting scan data serially in the BSR and observing input (P_IN), output (P_OUT), and 3-state (P_TS) signals at the pads. The BSC consists of two circuits: the bidirectional data cell is used to access the input and output data, and the direction control cell is used to access the 3-state value. Both cells consist of a flip-flop used to shift scan data which feeds a flip-flop to control the I/O buffer. The bidirectional data cell is connected serially to the direction control cell to form a boundary-scan shift register. The TAPC signals (capture, update, shiftn, treset, and TCK) and the MODE signal control the operation of the BSC. The bidirectional data cell is also controlled by the high out/low in (HOLI) signal generated by the direction control cell. When HOLI is low, the bidirectional data cell receives input buffer data into the BSC. When HOLI is high, the BSC is loaded with functional data from the PLC. The MODE signal is generated from the decode of the instruction register. When the MODE signal is high (EXTEST), the scan data is propagated to the output buffer. When the MODE signal is low (BYPASS or SAMPLE), functional data from the FPGA’s internal logic is propagated to the output buffer. The boundary-scan description language (BSDL) is provided for each device in the ORCA series of FPGAs. The BSDL is generated from a device profile, pinout, and other boundary-scan information. SCAN IN I/O BUFFER PAD_IN P_IN PAD_OUT BIDIRECTIONAL DATA CELL 0 0 0 D 1 Q D Q 1 PAD_TS 1 P_OUT HOLI 0 0 P_TS D Q D Q 1 1 DIRECTION CONTROL CELL SHIFTN/CAPTURE TCK SCAN OUT UPDATE/TCK MODE 5-2844(F).r4 Figure 51. Boundary-Scan Cell 58 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs RUN-TEST/IDLE UPDATE-IR EXIT1-IR SHIFT-IR EXIT2-IR PAUSE-IR EXIT1-IR SHIFT-IR CAPTURE-IR SELECT-IR-SCAN SELECT-DR-SCAN RUN-TEST/IDLE TEST-LOGIC-RESET Special Function Blocks (continued) TCK TMS TDI Fig.5.3(F) Figure 52. Instruction Register Scan Timing Diagram Boundary-Scan Timing To ensure race-free operation, data changes on specific clock edges. The TMS and TDI inputs are clocked in on the rising edge of TCK, while changes on TDO occur on the falling edge of TCK. In the execution of an EXTEST instruction, parallel data is output from the BSR to the FPGA pads on the falling edge of TCK. The maximum frequency allowed for TCK is 10 MHz. Figure 52 shows timing waveforms for an instruction scan operation. The diagram shows the use of TMS to sequence the TAPC through states. The test host (or BSM) changes data on the falling edge of TCK, and it is clocked into the DUT on the rising edge. Lucent Technologies Inc. 59 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs ORCA Timing Characteristics To define speed grades, the ORCA Series part number designation (see Table 54) uses a single-digit number to designate a speed grade. This number is not related to any single ac parameter. Higher numbers indicate a faster set of timing parameters. The actual speed sorting is based on testing the delay in a path consisting of an input buffer, combinatorial delay through all PLCs in a row, and an output buffer. Other tests are then done to verify other delay parameters, such as routing delays, setup times to FFs, etc. The most accurate timing characteristics are reported by the timing analyzer in the ORCA Foundry Development System. A timing report provided by the development system after layout divides path delays into logic and routing delays. The timing analyzer can also provide logic delays prior to layout. While this allows routing budget estimates, there is wide variance in routing delays associated with different layouts. The logic timing parameters noted in the Electrical Characteristics section of this data sheet are the same as those in the design tools. In the PFU timing given in Tables 31—79, symbol names are generally a concatenation of the PFU operating mode (as defined in Table 3) and the parameter type. The wildcard character (*) is used in symbol names to indicate that the parameter applies to any sub-LUT. The setup, hold, and propagation delay parameters, defined below, are designated in the symbol name by the SET, HLD, and DEL characters, respectively. The values given for the parameters are the same as those used during production testing and speed binning of the devices. The junction temperature and supply voltage used to characterize the devices are listed in the delay tables. Actual delays at nominal temperature and voltage for best-case processes can be much better than the values given. It should be noted that the junction temperature used in the tables is generally 85 °C. The junction temperature for the FPGA depends on the power dissipated by the device, the package thermal characteristics (ΘJA), and the ambient temperature, as calculated in the following equation and as discussed further in the Package Thermal Characteristics section: TJmax = TAmax + (P • ΘJA) °C Table 14A and 14B and provide approximate power supply and junction temperature derating for OR2CxxA commercial and industrial devices. Table 15A and 15B provides the same information for the OR2TxxA and OR2TxxB devices (both commercial and industrial). The delay values in this data sheet and reported by ORCA Foundry are shown as 1.00 in the tables. The method for determining the maximum junction temperature is defined in the Thermal Characteristics section. Taken cumulatively, the range of parameter values for best-case vs. worst-case processing, supply voltage, and junction temperature can approach 3 to 1. Table 14A. Derating for Commercial Devices (OR2CxxA) TJ (°C) 0 25 85 100 125 Power Supply Voltage 4.75 V 0.81 0.85 1.00 1.05 1.12 5.0 V 0.79 0.83 0.97 1.02 1.09 5.25 V 0.77 0.81 0.95 1.00 1.07 Table 14B. Derating for Industrial Devices (OR2CxxA) TJ (°C) –40 0 25 85 100 125 Power Supply Voltage 4.5 V 0.71 0.80 0.84 1.00 1.05 1.12 4.75 V 0.70 0.78 0.82 0.97 1.01 1.09 5.0 V 0.68 0.76 0.80 0.94 0.99 1.06 5.25 V 0.66 0.74 0.78 0.93 0.97 1.04 5.5 V 0.65 0.73 0.77 0.91 0.95 1.02 Table 15A. Derating for Commercial/Industrial Devices (OR2TxxA) TJ (°C) –40 0 25 85 100 125 Power Supply Voltage 3.0 V 0.73 0.82 0.87 1.00 1.04 1.10 3.3 V 0.66 0.73 0.78 0.90 0.94 1.00 3.6 V 0.61 0.68 0.72 0.83 0.87 0.92 Note: The user must determine this junction temperature to see if the delays from ORCA Foundry should be derated based on the following derating tables. 60 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs ORCA Timing Characteristics transition of a clock or latch enable signal, during which the data must be stable to ensure it is recognized as the intended value. (continued) Table 15B. Derating for Commercial/Industrial Devices (OR2TxxB) Power Supply Voltage TJ (°C) 3.0 V 3.15 V 3.3 V 3.45 V 3.6 V –40 0 25 85 100 125 0.81 0.86 0.9 1.0 1.02 1.06 0.78 0.83 0.87 0.95 0.98 1.03 0.76 0.80 0.83 0.93 0.95 0.98 0.74 0.77 0.8 0.88 0.91 0.95 0.73 0.76 0.78 0.86 0.88 0.92 Note: The derating tables shown above are for a typical critical path that contains 33% logic delay and 66% routing delay. Since the routing delay derates at a higher rate than the logic delay, paths with more than 66% routing delay will derate at a higher rate than shown in the table. The approximate derating values vs. temperature are 0.26% per °C for logic delay and 0.45% per °C for routing delay. The approximate derating values vs. voltage are 0.13% per mV for both logic and routing delays at 25 °C. In addition to supply voltage, process variation, and operating temperature, circuit and process improvements of the ORCA series FPGAs over time will result in significant improvement of the actual performance over those listed for a speed grade. Even though lower speed grades may still be available, the distribution of yield to timing parameters may be several speed bins higher than that designated on a product brand. Design practices need to consider best-case timing parameters (e.g., delays = 0), as well as worst-case timing. The routing delays are a function of fan-out and the capacitance associated with the CIPs and metal interconnect in the path. The number of logic elements that can be driven (or fan-out) by PFUs is unlimited, although the delay to reach a valid logic level can exceed timing requirements. It is difficult to make accurate routing delay estimates prior to design compilation based on fan-out. This is because the CAE software may delete redundant logic inserted by the designer to reduce fan-out, and/or it may also automatically reduce fan-out by net splitting. The waveform test points are given in the Measurement Conditions section of this data sheet. The timing parameters given in the electrical characteristics tables in this data sheet follow industry practices, and the values they reflect are described below. ■ ■ Propagation Delay—the time between the specified reference points. The delays provided are the worst case of the tphh and tpll delays for noninverting functions, tplh and tphl for inverting functions, and tphz and tplz for 3-state enable. Setup Time—the interval immediately preceding the Lucent Technologies Inc. ■ Hold Time—the interval immediately following the transition of a clock or latch enable signal, during which the data must be held stable to ensure it is recognized as the intended value. ■ 3-state Enable—the time from when a TS[3:0] signal becomes active and the output pad reaches the highimpedance state. Estimating Power Dissipation OR2CxxA The total operating power dissipated is estimated by summing the standby (IDDSB), internal, and external power dissipated. The internal and external power is the power consumed in the PLCs and PICs, respectively. In general, the standby power is small and may be neglected. The total operating power is as follows: PT = Σ PPLC + Σ PPIC The internal operating power is made up of two parts: clock generation and PFU output power. The PFU output power can be estimated based upon the number of PFU outputs switching when driving an average fan-out of two: PPFU = 0.16 mW/MHz For each PFU output that switches, 0.16 mW/MHz needs to be multiplied times the frequency (in MHz) that the output switches. Generally, this can be estimated by using one-half the clock rate, multiplied by some activity factor; for example, 20%. The power dissipated by the clock generation circuitry is based upon four parts: the fixed clock power, the power/clock branch row or column, the clock power dissipated in each PFU that uses this particular clock, and the power from the subset of those PFUs that is configured in either of the two synchronous modes (SSPM or SDPM). Therefore, the clock power can be calculated for the four parts using the following equations: OR2C04A Clock Power P = [0.62 mW/MHz + (0.22 mW/MHz – Branch) (# Branches) + (0.022 mW/MHz – PFU) (# PFUs) + (0.006 mW/MHz – SMEM_PFU) (# SMEM_PFUs)] fCLK For a quick estimate, the worst-case (typical circuit) OR2C04A clock power ≈ 3.9 mW/MHz. 61 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Estimating Power Dissipation (continued) + (0.022 mW/MHz – PFU) (# PFUs) + (0.006 mW/MHz – SMEM_PFU) (# SMEM_PFUs)] fCLK OR2C06A Clock Power P = [0.63 mW/MHz + (0.25 mW/MHz – Branch) (# Branches) + (0.022 mW/MHz – PFU) (# PFUs) + (0.006 mW/MHz – SMEM_PFU) (# SMEM_PFUs)] fCLK For a quick estimate, the worst-case (typical circuit) OR2C06A clock power ≈ 5.3 mW/MHz. OR2C08A Clock Power P = [0.65 mW/MHz + (0.29 mW/MHz – Branch) (# Branches) + (0.022 mW/MHz – PFU) (# PFUs) + (0.006 mW/MHz – SMEM_PFU) (# SMEM_PFUs)] fCLK For a quick estimate, the worst-case (typical circuit) OR2C08A clock power ≈ 6.6 mW/MHz. OR2C10A Clock Power P = [0.66 mW/MHz + (0.32 mW/MHz – Branch) (# Branches) + (0.022 mW/MHz – PFU) (# PFUs) + (0.006 mW/MHz – SMEM_PFU) (# SMEM_PFUs)] fCLK For a quick estimate, the worst-case (typical circuit) OR2C10A clock power ≈ 8.6 mW/MHz. OR2C12A Clock Power P = [0.68 mW/MHz + (0.35 mW/MHz – Branch) (# Branches) + (0.022 mW/MHz – PFU) (# PFUs) + (0.006 mW/MHz – SMEM_PFU) (# SMEM_PFUs)] fCLK For a quick estimate, the worst-case (typical circuit) OR2C12A clock power ≈ 10.5 mW/MHz. OR2C15A Clock Power P = [0.69 mW/MHz + (0.38 mW/MHz – Branch) (# Branches) + (0.022 mW/MHz – PFU) (# PFUs) + (0.006 mW/MHz – SMEM_PFU) (# SMEM_PFUs)] fCLK For a quick estimate, the worst-case (typical circuit) OR2C15A clock power ≈ 12.7 mW/MHz. OR2C26A Clock Power P 62 = [0.73 mW/MHz + (0.44 mW/MHz – Branch) (# Branches) For a quick estimate, the worst-case (typical circuit) OR2C26A clock power ≈ 17.8 mW/MHz. OR2C40A Clock Power P = [0.77 mW/MHz + (0.53 mW/MHz – Branch) (# Branches) + (0.022 mW/MHz – PFU) (# PFUs) + (0.006 mW/MHz – SMEM_PFU) (# SMEM_PFUs)] fCLK For a quick estimate, the worst-case (typical circuit) OR2C40A clock power ≈ 26.6 mW/MHz. The power dissipated in a PIC is the sum of the power dissipated in the four I/Os in the PIC. This consists of power dissipated by inputs and ac power dissipated by outputs. The power dissipated in each I/O depends on whether it is configured as an input, output, or input/ output. If an I/O is operating as an output, then there is a power dissipation component for PIN, as well as POUT. This is because the output feeds back to the input. The power dissipated by a TTL input buffer is estimated as: PTTL = 2.2 mW + 0.17 mW/MHz The power dissipated by an input buffer is estimated as: PCMOS = 0.17 mW/MHz The ac power dissipation from an output or bidirectional is estimated by the following: POUT = (CL + 8.8 pF) x VDD2 x F Watts where the unit for CL is farads, and the unit for F is Hz. As an example of estimating power dissipation, suppose that a fully utilized OR2C15A has an average of three outputs for each of the 400 PFUs, that all 20 clock branches are used, that 150 of the 400 PFUs have FFs clocked at 40 MHz (16 of which are operating in a synchronous memory mode), and that the PFU outputs have an average activity factor of 20%. Twenty TTL-configured inputs, 20 CMOS-configured inputs, 32 outputs driving 30 pF loads, and 16 bidirectional I/Os driving 50 pF loads are also generated from the 40 MHz clock with an average activity factor of 20%. The worst-case (VDD = 5.25 V) power dissipation is estimated as follows: PPFU = 400 x 3 (0.16 mW/MHz x 20 MHz x 20%) = 768 mW Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Estimating Power Dissipation (continued) PCLK = [0.69 mW/MHz + (0.38 mW/MHz – Branch) (20 Branches) + (0.022 mW/MHz – PFU) (150 PFUs) + (0.006 mW/MHz – SMEM_PFU) (16 SMEM_PFUs)] [40 MHz] = 427 mW PTTL = 20 x [2.2 mW + (0.17 mW/MHz x 20 MHz x 20%)] = 57 mW PCMOS = 20 x [0.17 mW x 20 MHz x 20%] = 13 mW SDPM). Therefore, the clock power can be calculated for the four parts using the following equations: OR2T04A Clock Power P For a quick estimate, the worst-case (typical circuit) OR2T04A clock power ≈ 1.8 mW/MHz. OR2T06A Clock Power P POUT = 30 x [(30 pF + 8.8 pF) x (5.25)2 x 20 MHz x 20%] = 128 mW PBID = 16 x [(50 pF + 8.8 pF) x (5.25)2 x 20 MHz x 20%] = 104 mW = [0.29 mW/MHz + (0.10 mW/MHz – Branch) (# Branches) + (0.01 mW/MHz – PFU) (# PFUs) + (0.003 mW/MHz – SMEM_PFU) (# SMEM_PFUs)] fCLK = [0.30 mW/MHz + (0.11 mW/MHz – Branch) (# Branches) + (0.01 mW/MHz – PFU) (# PFUs) + (0.003 mW/MHz – SMEM_PFU) (# SMEM_PFUs)] fCLK For a quick estimate, the worst-case (typical circuit) OR2T06A clock power ≈ 2.4 mW/MHz. OR2T08A Clock Power TOTAL = 1.50 W P OR2TxxA The total operating power dissipated is estimated by summing the standby (IDDSB), internal, and external power dissipated. The internal and external power is the power consumed in the PLCs and PICs, respectively. In general, the standby power is small and may be neglected. The total operating power is as follows: PT = Σ PPLC + Σ PPIC The internal operating power is made up of two parts: clock generation and PFU output power. The PFU output power can be estimated based upon the number of PFU outputs switching when driving an average fan-out of two: PPFU = 0.08 mW/MHz For each PFU output that switches, 0.08 mW/MHz needs to be multiplied times the frequency (in MHz) that the output switches. Generally, this can be estimated by using one-half the clock rate, multiplied by some activity factor; for example, 20%. The power dissipated by the clock generation circuitry is based upon four parts: the fixed clock power, the power/clock branch row or column, the clock power dissipated in each PFU that uses this particular clock, and the power from the subset of those PFUs that is configured in either of the two synchronous modes (SSPM or Lucent Technologies Inc. = [0.31 mW/MHz + (0.12 mW/MHz – Branch) (# Branches) + (0.01 mW/MHz – PFU) (# PFUs) + (0.003 mW/MHz – SMEM_PFU) (# SMEM_PFUs)] fCLK For a quick estimate, the worst-case (typical circuit) OR2T08A clock power ≈ 3.2 mW/MHz. OR2T10A Clock Power P = [0.32 mW/MHz + (0.14 mW/MHz – Branch) (# Branches) + (0.01 mW/MHz – PFU) (# PFUs) + (0.003 mW/MHz – SMEM_PFU) (# SMEM_PFUs)] fCLK For a quick estimate, the worst-case (typical circuit) OR2T10A clock power ≈ 4.0 mW/MHz. OR2T12A Clock Power P = [0.33 mW/MHz + (0.15 mW/MHz – Branch) (# Branches) + (0.01 mW/MHz – PFU) (# PFUs) + (0.003 mW/MHz – SMEM_PFU) (# SMEM_PFUs)] fCLK For a quick estimate, the worst-case (typical circuit) OR2T12A clock power ≈ 4.9 mW/MHz. 63 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Estimating Power Dissipation (continued) Table 16. dc Power for 5 V Tolerant I/Os for OR2TxxA deviced OR2T15A Clock Power P = [0.34 mW/MHz + (0.17 mW/MHz – Branch) (# Branches) + (0.01 mW/MHz – PFU) (# PFUs) + (0.003 mW/MHz – SMEM_PFU) (# SMEM_PFUs)] fCLK For a quick estimate, the worst-case (typical circuit) OR2T15A clock power ≈ 5.9 mW/MHz. OR2T26A Clock Power P = [0.35 mW/MHz + (0.19 mW/MHz – Branch) (# Branches) + (0.01 mW/MHz – PFU) (# PFUs) + (0.003 mW/MHz – SMEM_PFU) (# SMEM_PFUs)] fCLK For a quick estimate, the worst-case (typical circuit) OR2T26A clock power ≈ 8.3 mW/MHz. OR2T40A Clock Power P = [0.37 mW/MHz + (0.23 mW/MHz – Branch) (# Branches) + (0.01 mW/MHz – PFU) (# PFUs) + (0.003 mW/MHz – SMEM_PFU) (# SMEM_PFUs)] fCLK For a quick estimate, the worst-case (typical circuit) OR2T40A clock power ≈ 12.4 mW/MHz. The power dissipated in a PIC is the sum of the power dissipated in the four I/Os in the PIC. This consists of power dissipated by inputs and ac power dissipated by outputs. The power dissipated in each I/O depends on whether it is configured as an input, output, or input/ output. If an I/O is operating as an output, then there is a power dissipation component for PIN, as well as POUT. This is because the output feeds back to the input. The power dissipated by an input buffer (VIH = VDD – 0.3 V or higher) is estimated as: PTOL (VDD5 = 5.25 V) 2T04A 2T06A 2T08A 2T10A 2T12A 2T15A 2T26A 2T40A 1.7 mW 2.0 mW 2.4 mW 2.7 mW 3.0 mW 3.4 mW 4.0 mW 5.0 mW The ac power dissipation from an output or bidirectional is estimated by the following: POUT = (CL + 8.8 pF) x VDD2 x F Watts where the unit for CL is farads, and the unit for F is Hz. As an example of estimating power dissipation, suppose that a fully utilized OR2T15A has an average of three outputs for each of the 400 PFUs, that all 20 clock branches are used, that 150 of the 400 PFUs have FFs clocked at 40 MHz (16 of which are operating in a synchronous memory mode), and that the PFU outputs have an average activity factor of 20%. Twenty inputs, 32 outputs driving 30 pF loads, and 16 bidirectional I/Os driving 50 pF loads are also generated from the 40 MHz clock with an average activity factor of 20%. The worst-case (VDD = 3.6 V) power dissipation is estimated as follows: PPFU = 400 x 3 (0.08 mW/MHz x 20 MHz x 20%) = 384 mW PCLK = [0.34 mW/MHz + (0.17 mW/MHz – Branch) (20 Branches) + (0.01 mW/MHz – PFU) (150 PFUs) + (0.003 mW/MHz – SMEM_PFU) (16 SMEM_PFUs)] [40 MHz] = 212 mW PIN = 20 x [0.09 mW/MHz x 20 MHz x 20%] = 7 mW PTOL = 3.4 mW PIN = 0.09 mW/MHz The 5 V tolerant input buffer feature dissipates additional dc power. The dc power, PTOL, is always dissipated for the OR2TxxA, regardless of the number of 5 V tolerant input buffers used when the VDD5 pins are connected to a 5 V supply as shown in Table 16. This power is not dissipated when the VDD5 pins are connected to the 3.3 V supply. Device POUT = 30 x [(30 pF + 8.8 pF) x (3.6)2 x 20 MHz x 20%] = 60 mW PBID = 16 x [(50 pF + 8.8 pF) x (3.6)2 x 20 MHz x 20%] = 49 mW TOTAL = 0.72 W 64 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Estimating Power Dissipation (continued) OR2T15B and OR2T40B The total operating power dissipated is estimated by summing the standby (IDDSB), internal, and external power dissipated. The internal and external power is the power consumed in the PLCs and PICs, respectively. In general, the standby power is small and may be neglected. The total operating power is as follows: PT = Σ PPLC + Σ PPIC The internal operating power is made up of two parts: clock generation and PFU output power. The PFU output power can be estimated based upon the number of PFU outputs switching when driving an average fan-out of two: PPFU = 0.08 mW/MHz For each PFU output that switches, 0.08 mW/MHz needs to be multiplied times the frequency (in MHz) that the output switches. Generally, this can be estimated by using one-half the clock rate, multiplied by some activity factor; for example, 20%. The power dissipated by the clock generation circuitry is based upon four parts: the fixed clock power, the power/clock branch row or column, the clock power dissipated in each PFU that uses this particular clock, and the power from the subset of those PFUs that is configured in either of the two synchronous modes (SSPM or SDPM). Therefore, the clock power can be calculated for the four parts using the following equations: OR2T15B Clock Power P = [0.30 mW/MHz + (0.85 mW/MHz – Branch) (# Branches) + (0.008 mW/MHz – PFU) (# PFUs) + (0.002 mW/MHz – SMEM_PFU) (# SMEM_PFUs)] fCLK For a quick estimate, the worst-case (typical circuit) OR2T15B clock power ≈ 3.9 mW/MHz. power dissipated by inputs and ac power dissipated by outputs. The power dissipated in each I/O depends on whether it is configured as an input, output, or input/ output. If an I/O is operating as an output, then there is a power dissipation component for PIN, as well as POUT. This is because the output feeds back to the input. The power dissipated by an input buffer (VIH = VDD – 0.3 V or higher) is estimated as: PIN = 0.033 mW/MHz The OR2TxxB 5 V tolerant input buffer feature does not dissipate additional dc power. The ac power dissipation from an output or bidirectional is estimated by the following: POUT = (CL + 8.8 pF) x VDD2 x F Watts where the unit for CL is farads, and the unit for F is Hz. As an example of estimating power dissipation, suppose that a fully utilized OR2T15B has an average of three outputs for each of the 400 PFUs, that all 20 clock branches are used, that 150 of the 400 PFUs have FFs clocked at 40 MHz (16 of which are operating in a synchronous memory mode), and that the PFU outputs have an average activity factor of 20%. Twenty inputs, 32 outputs driving 30 pF loads, and 16 bidirectional I/Os driving 50 pF loads are also generated from the 40 MHz clock with an average activity factor of 20%. The worst-case (VDD = 3.6 V) power dissipation is estimated as follows: PPFU = 400 x 3 (0.08 mW/MHz x 20 MHz x 20%) = 384 mW PCLK = [0.30 mW/MHz + (0.085 mW/MHz – Branch) (20 Branches) + (0.008 mW/MHz – PFU) (150 PFUs) + (0.002 mW/MHz – SMEM_PFU) (16 SMEM_PFUs)] [40 MHz] = 129 mW PIN = 20 x [0.033 mW/MHz x 20 MHz x 20%] = 3 mW PTOL = 3.4 mW OR2T40B Clock Power P = [0.42 mW/MHz + (0.118 mW/MHz – Branch) (# Branches) + (0.008 mW/MHz – PFU) (# PFUs) + (0.002 mW/MHz – SMEM_PFU) (# SMEM_PFUs)] fCLK For a quick estimate, the worst-case (typical circuit) OR2T40B clock power ≈ 5.5 mW/MHz. The power dissipated in a PIC is the sum of the power dissipated in the four I/Os in the PIC. This consists of Lucent Technologies Inc. POUT = 30 x [(30 pF + 8.8 pF) x (3.6)2 x 20 MHz x 20%] = 60 mW PBID = 16 x [(50 pF + 8.8 pF) x (3.6)2 x 20 MHz x 20%] = 49 mW TOTAL = 0.72 W 65 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information Pin Descriptions This section describes the pins found on the Series 2 FPGAs. Any pin not described in this table is a user-programmable I/O. During configuration, the user-programmable I/Os are 3-stated with an internal pull-up resistor enabled. Table 17. Pin Descriptions Symbol I/O Description Dedicated Pins VDD — Positive power supply. GND — Ground supply. I/O-VDD5 — 5 V tolerant select. (For 2TxxA only.) All VDD5 pins must be tied to either the 5 V power supply if 5 V tolerant I/O buffers are to be used, or to the 3.3 V power supply (VDD) if they are not. For 2CxxA and 2TxxB devices, these pins are user-programmable I/Os. RESET I During configuration, RESET forces the restart of configuration and a pull-up is enabled. After configuration, RESET can be used as a general FPGA input or as a direct input, which causes all PLC latches/FFs to be asynchronously set/reset. CCLK I In the master and asynchronous peripheral modes, CCLK is an output which strobes configuration data in. In the slave or synchronous peripheral mode, CCLK is input synchronous with the data on DIN or D[7:0]. DONE I/O DONE is a bidirectional pin with an optional pull-up resistor. As an active-high, opendrain output, a high-level on this signal indicates that configuration is complete. As an input, a low level on DONE delays FPGA start-up after configuration*. PRGM I PRGM is an active-low input that forces the restart of configuration and resets the boundary-scan circuitry. This pin always has an active pull-up. RD_CFG I This pin must be held high during device initialization until the INIT pin goes high. This pin always has an active pullup. During configuration, RD_CFG is an active-low input that activates the TS_ALL function and 3-states all of the I/O. After configuration, RD_CFG can be selected (via a bit stream option) to activate the TS_ALL function as described above, or, if readback is enabled via a bit stream option, a high-to-low transition on RD_CFG will initiate readback of the configuration data, including PFU output states, starting with frame address 0. RD_DATA/TDO O RD_DATA/TDO is a dual-function pin. If used for readback, RD_DATA provides configuration data out. If used in boundary scan, TDO is test data out. Special-Purpose Pins (Become User I/O After Configuration) RDY/RCLK O During configuration in peripheral mode, RDY indicates another byte can be written to the FPGA. If a read operation is done when the device is selected, the same status is also available on D7 in asynchronous peripheral mode. After configuration, the pin is a user-programmable I/O*. During the master parallel configuration mode RCLK, which is a read output signal to an external memory. This output is not normally used. After configuration, this pin is a userprogrammable I/O pin*. DIN I During slave serial or master serial configuration modes, DIN accepts serial configuration data synchronous with CCLK. During parallel configuration modes, DIN is the D0 input. During configuration, a pull-up is enabled, and after configuration, this pin is a user-programmable I/O pin*. * The FPGA States of Operation section contains more information on how to control these signals during start-up. The timing of DONE release is controlled by one set of bit stream options, and the timing of the simultaneous release of all other configuration pins (and the activation of all user I/Os) is controlled by a second set of options. 66 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 17. Pin Descriptions (continued) Symbol I/O Description Special-Purpose Pins Special-Purpose Pins (Become User I/O After Configuration) (continued) M0, M1, M2 I During powerup and initialization, M0—M2 are used to select the configuration mode with their values latched on the rising edge of INIT. See Table 7 for the configuration modes. During configuration, a pull-up is enabled, and after configuration, the pins are user-programmable I/O*. M3 I During powerup and initialization, M3 is used to select the speed of the internal oscillator during configuration, with its value latched on the rising edge of INIT. When M3 is low, the oscillator frequency is 10 MHz. When M3 is high, the oscillator is 1.25 MHz. During configuration, a pull-up is enabled, and after configuration, this pin is a user-programmable I/O pin*. TDI, TCK, TMS I If boundary scan is used, these pins are Test Data In, Test Clock, and Test Mode Select inputs. If boundary scan is not selected, all boundary-scan functions are inhibited once configuration is complete, and these pins are user-programmable I/O pins. Even if boundary scan is not used, either TCK or TMS must be held at logic 1 during configuration. Each pin has a pull-up enabled during configuration*. HDC O High During Configuration is output high until configuration is complete. It is used as a control output indicating that configuration is not complete. After configuration, this pin is a user-programmable I/O pin*. LDC O Low During Configuration is output low until configuration is complete. It is used as a control output indicating that configuration is not complete. After configuration, this pin is a user-programmable I/O pin*. INIT I/O INIT is a bidirectional signal before and during configuration. During configuration, a pull-up is enabled, but an external pull-up resistor is recommended. As an active-low open-drain output, INIT is held low during power stabilization and internal clearing of memory. As an active-low input, INIT holds the FPGA in the wait-state before the start of configuration. After configuration, the pin is a user-programmable I/O pin*. CS0, CS1, WR, RD I CS0, CS1, WR, RD are used in the asynchronous peripheral configuration modes. The FPGA is selected when CS0 is low and CS1 is high. When selected, a low on the write strobe, WR, loads the data on D[7:0] inputs into an internal data buffer. WR, CS0, and CS1 are also used as chip selects in the slave parallel mode. A low on RD changes D7 into a status output. As a status indication, a high indicates ready and a low indicates busy. WR and RD should not be used simultaneously. If they are, the write strobe overrides. During configuration, a pull-up is enabled, and after configuration, the pins are user-programmable I/O pins*. A[17:0] O During master parallel configuration mode, A[17:0] address the configuration EPROM. During configuration, a pull-up is enabled, and after configuration, the pins are userprogrammable I/O pins*. D[7:0] I During master parallel, peripheral, and slave parallel configuration modes, D[7:0] receive configuration data and each pin has a pull-up enabled. After configuration, the pins are user-programmable I/O pins*. DOUT O During configuration, DOUT is the serial data output that can drive the DIN of daisychained slave LCA devices. Data out on DOUT changes on the falling edge of CCLK. After configuration, DOUT is a user-programmable I/O pin*. * The FPGA States of Operation section contains more information on how to control these signals during start-up. The timing of DONE release is controlled by one set of bit stream options, and the timing of the simultaneous release of all other configuration pins (and the activation of all user I/Os) is controlled by a second set of options. Lucent Technologies Inc. 67 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Package Compatibility The package pinouts are consistent across ORCA Series FPGAs with the following exception: some user I/O pins that do not have any special functions will be converted to VDD5 pins for the OR2TxxA series. If the designer does not use these pins for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, then pinout compatibility will be maintained between the ORCA OR2CxxA, OR2TxxA, and OR2TxxB series of FPGAs. Note that they must be connected to a power supply for the OR2TxxA series. Package pinouts being consistent across all ORCA Series FPGAs enables a designer to select a package based on I/O requirements and change the FPGA without laying out the printed-circuit board again. The change might be to a larger FPGA if additional functionality is needed, or it might be to a smaller FPGA to decrease unit cost. Table 18A provides the number of user I/Os available for the ORCA OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB Series FPGAs for each available package, and Table 18B provides the number of user I/Os available in the ORCA OR2TxxA series. It should be noted that the number of user I/Os available for the OR2TxxA series is reduced from the equivalent OR2CxxA devices by the number of required VDD5 pins, as shown in Table 18B. The pins that are converted from user I/O to VDD5 are denoted as I/O-VDD5 in the pin information tables (Table 19 through 28). Each package has six dedicated configuration pins. Table 19—Table 28. provide the package pin and pin function for the ORCA Series 2 FPGAs and packages. The bond pad name is identified in the PIC nomenclature used in the ORCA Foundry design editor. When the number of FPGA bond pads exceeds the number of package pins, bond pads are unused. When the number of package pins exceeds the number of bond pads, package pins are left unconnected (no connects). When a package pin is to be left as a no connect for a specific die, it is indicated as a note in the device pad column for the FPGA. The tables provide no information on unused pads. Table 18A. ORCA OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB Series FPGA I/Os Summary Device 84-Pin 100-Pin 144-Pin 160-Pin PLCC TQFP TQFP QFP OR2C04A User I/Os 64 VDD/VSS 14 OR2C06A User I/Os 64 VDD/VSS 14 OR2C08A User I/Os 64 VDD/VSS 14 OR2C10A User I/Os 64 VDD/VSS 14 OR2C12A User I/Os 64 VDD/VSS 14 OR2C15A/OR2T15B User I/Os 64 VDD/VSS 14 OR2C26A User I/Os — VDD/VSS — OR2C40A/OR2T40B User I/Os — VDD/VSS — 208-Pin SQFP/ SQFP2 240-Pin SQFP/ SQFP2 256-Pin PBGA 304-Pin SQFP/ SQFP2 352-Pin 432-Pin PBGA EBGA 77 17 114 24 130 24 160 31 — — — — — — — — — — 77 17 114 24 130 24 171 31 192 42 192 26 — — — — — — — — — — 130 24 171 31 192 40 221 26 — — — — — — — — — — 130 24 171 31 192 40 221 26 — — 256 48 — — — — — — — — 171 31 192 42 223 26 252 46 288 48 — — — — — — — — 171 31 192 42 223 26 252 46 298 48 320* 84 — — — — — — 171 31 192 42 — — 252 46 298 48 342 84 — — — — — — 171 31 192 42 — — 252 46 — — 342 84 * 432 EBGA not available for OR2T15B 68 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 18B. ORCA OR2TxxA Series FPGA I/Os Summary Device OR2T04A User I/Os VDD/VSS VDD5 OR2T06A User I/Os VDD/VSS VDD5 OR2T08A User I/Os VDD/VSS VDD5 OR2T10A User I/Os VDD/VSS VDD5 OR2T12A User I/Os VDD/VSS VDD5 OR2T15A User I/Os VDD/VSS VDD5 OR2T26A User I/Os VDD/VSS VDD5 OR2T40A User I/Os VDD/VSS VDD5 84-Pin PLCC 100-Pin TQFP 144-Pin TQFP 160-Pin QFP 208-Pin SQFP/ SQFP2 240-Pin SQFP/ SQFP2 256-Pin PBGA 352-Pin PBGA 432-Pin EBGA 62 14 2 74 17 3 110 24 4 126 24 4 152 31 8 — — — — — — — — — — — — 62 14 2 74 17 3 110 24 4 126 24 4 163 31 8 184 42 8 182 26 10 — — — — — — 62 14 2 — — — — — — 126 24 4 163 31 8 184 40 8 209 26 12 — — — — — — 62 14 2 — — — — — — 126 24 4 163 31 8 184 40 8 209 26 12 244 48 12 — — — 62 14 2 — — — — — — — — — 163 31 8 184 42 8 211 26 12 276 48 12 — — — 62 14 2 — — — — — — — — — 163 31 8 184 42 8 211 26 12 286 48 12 307 84 12 — — — — — — — — — — — — 163 31 8 184 42 8 — — — 286 48 12 326 84 16 — — — — — — — — — — — — 163 31 8 184 42 8 — — — 286 48 12 326 84 16 Lucent Technologies Inc. 69 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Compatibility with Series 3 FPGAs Pinouts for the OR2CxxA, OR2TxxA, and OR2TxxB devices will be consistent with the Series 3 FPGAs for all devices offered in the same packages. This includes the following pins: VDD, VSS, VDD5 (OR3C/Txxx series only), and all configuration pins. Identical to the OR2TxxB devices, Series 3 devices provide 5 V tolerant I/Os without a dedicated VDD5 supply The following restrictions apply: 1. There are two configuration modes supported in the OR2C/TxxA series that are not supported in the Series 3 FPGAs series: master parallel down and synchronous peripheral modes. The Series 3 FPGAs have two new microprocessor interface (MPI) configuration modes that are unavailable in the Series 2. 2. There are 4 pins—one per each device side—that are user I/O in the OR2C/TxxA series which can only be used as fast dedicated clocks or global inputs in the Series 3 series. These pins are also used to drive the ExpressCLK to the I/O FFs on their given side of the device. These four middle ExpressCLK pins should not be used to connect to a programmable clock manager (PCM). A corner ExpressCLK input should be used instead (see note below). See Table 18C for a list of these pins in each package. 3. There are two other pins that are user I/O in both the Series 2 and Series 3 series but also have optional added functionality in the Series 3 series. Each of these pins drives the ExpressCLKs on two sides of the device. They also have fast connectivity to the programmable clock manager (PCM). See Table 18C for a preliminary list of these pins in each package. Table 18C. Series 3 ExpressCLK Pins Pin Name/ Package 208-Pin SQFP2 240-Pin SQFP2 256-Pin PBGA 352-Pin PBGA 432-Pin EBGA 600-Pin EBGA ECKL ECKB ECKR ECKT I/O—SECKLL I/O—SECKUR 22 80 131 178 49 159 26 91 152 207 56 184 K3 W11 K18 B11 W1 A19 N2 AE14 N23 B14 AB4 A25 R29 AH16 T2 C15 AG29 D5 U33 AM18 V2 C17 AK34 D5 Note: The ECKR, ECKL, ECKT, and ECKB pins drive the ExpressCLK on their given edge of the device, while I/O—SECKLL and I/O—SECKUR drive an ExpressCLK on two edges of the device and provide connectivity to the programmable clock manager. 70 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 19. OR2C/2T04A, OR2C/2T06A, OR2C/2T08A, OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, and OR2C/2T15A 84-Pin PLCC Pinout Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 2C/2T04A Pad 2C/2T06A Pad 2C/2T08A Pad 2C/2T10A Pad 2C/2T12A Pad 2C/2T15A Pad Function VSS PT5A VSS PT4D PT4A PT3A PT2D PT2A PT1D PT1A VSS PT6A VSS PT5D PT5A PT4A PT3D PT3A PT2A PT1A VSS PT7A VSS PT6D PT6A PT5A PT4D PT4A PT3A PT1A VSS PT8A VSS PT7D PT7A PT6A PT5D PT4A PT3A PT1A VSS PT9A VSS PT8D PT8A PT7A PT6D PT5A PT3A PT1A VSS PT10A VSS PT9D PT9A PT8A PT7D PT6A PT4A PT1A VSS I/O-D2 VSS I/O-D1 I/O-D0/DIN I/O-DOUT I/O-VDD5 I/O-TDI I/O-TMS I/O-TCK RD_DATA/TDO RD_DATA/TDO RD_DATA/TDO RD_DATA/TDO RD_DATA/TDO RD_DATA/TDO VDD VSS PL1C PL1A PL2D PL2A PL3A PL4D PL4A PL5A VDD PL6A VSS PL7D PL7A PL8A PL9D PL9A PL10D PL10A CCLK VDD VSS PB1A PB1D PB2A PB2D PB3A PB4A PB4D PB5A VDD VSS PL1A PL2A PL3D PL3A PL4A PL5D PL5A PL6A VDD PL7A VSS PL8D PL8A PL9A PL10D PL10A PL11A PL12A CCLK VDD VSS PB1A PB2A PB3A PB3D PB4A PB5A PB5D PB6A VDD VSS PL2D PL3A PL4D PL4A PL5A PL6D PL6A PL7A VDD PL8A VSS PL9D PL9A PL10A PL11D PL11A PL12A PL14A CCLK VDD VSS PB1A PB3A PB3D PB4D PB5A PB6A PB6D PB7A VDD VSS PL2D PL3A PL4A PL5A PL6A PL7D PL7A PL8A VDD PL9A VSS PL10D PL10A PL11A PL12D PL13D PL14C PL16A CCLK VDD VSS PB1A PB3B PB4D PB5D PB6A PB7A PB7D PB8A VDD VSS PL2D PL4A PL5A PL6A PL7A PL8D PL8A PL9A VDD PL10A VSS PL11D PL11A PL12A PL13D PL14B PL16D PL18A CCLK VDD VSS PB1A PB3D PB5B PB6D PB7A PB8A PB8D PB9A VDD VSS PL2D PL5A PL6A PL7A PL8A PL9D PL9A PL10A VDD PL11A VSS PL12D PL12A PL13A PL14D PL15B PL17D PL20A CCLK VDD VSS PB1A PB4D PB6B PB7D PB8A PB9A PB9D PB10A RD_DATA/TDO VDD VSS I/O-A0 I/O-A1 I/O-A2 I/O-A3 I/O-A4 I/O-A5 I/O-A6 I/O-A7 VDD I/O-A8 VSS I/O-A9 I/O-A10 I/O-A11 I/O-A12 I/O-A13 I/O-A14 I/O-A15 CCLK VDD VSS I/O-A16 I/O-A17 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O Note: The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. Lucent Technologies Inc. 71 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 19. OR2C/2T04A, OR2C/2T06A, OR2C/2T08A, OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, and OR2C/2T15A 84-Pin PLCC Pinout (continued) Pin 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 2C/2T04A Pad 2C/2T06A Pad 2C/2T08A Pad 2C/2T10A Pad 2C/2T12A Pad 2C/2T15A Pad Function VSS PB6A VSS PB7A PB7D PB8A PB9A PB9D PB10A PB10D DONE VSS PB7A VSS PB8A PB8D PB9A PB10A PB10D PB11A PB12A DONE VSS PB8A VSS PB9A PB9D PB10A PB11A PB11D PB12C PB13D DONE VSS PB9A VSS PB10A PB10D PB11A PB12A PB13A PB13D PB15D DONE VSS PB10A VSS PB11A PB11D PB12A PB13A PB13D PB15A PB18D DONE VSS PB11A VSS PB12A PB12D PB13A PB14A PB14D PB16A PB20D DONE VSS I/O VSS I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O-HDC I/O-LDC I/O I/O-INIT I/O DONE RESET PRGM RESET PRGM RESET PRGM RESET PRGM RESET PRGM RESET PRGM RESET PRGM PR10A PR10D PR9A PR9D PR8A PR7A PR7D PR6A VDD PR5A VSS PR4A PR4D PR3A PR2A PR2D PR1A PR1D PR12A PR11A PR10A PR10D PR9A PR8A PR8D PR7A VDD PR6A VSS PR5A PR5D PR4A PR3A PR3D PR2A PR1A PR14A PR12A PR11A PR11D PR10A PR9A PR9D PR8D VDD PR7A VSS PR6A PR6D PR5A PR4A PR4D PR3A PR2A PR16A PR14A PR13B PR12B PR11A PR10A PR10D PR9D VDD PR8A VSS PR7A PR7D PR6A PR5A PR4D PR3A PR2A PR18A PR16A PR15D PR13A PR12A PR11A PR11D PR10A VDD PR9A VSS PR8A PR8D PR7A PR6A PR5D PR4A PR2A PR20A PR17A PR16D PR14A PR13A PR12A PR12D PR11A VDD PR10A VSS PR9A PR9D PR8A PR7A PR6D PR5A PR3A I/O-M0 I/O I/O-M1 I/O I/O-M2 I/O-M3 I/O I/O VDD I/O VSS I/O I/O I/O-CS1 I/O-CS0 I/O I/O-RD I/O-WR RD_CFG RD_CFG RD_CFG RD_CFG RD_CFG RD_CFG RD_CFG VDD VSS PT10C PT9D PT9C PT9A PT8A PT7D PT7A PT6A VDD VSS PT12A PT11A PT10D PT10A PT9A PT8D PT8A PT7A VDD VSS PT13D PT12C PT11D PT11B PT10A PT9D PT9A PT8A VDD VSS PT15D PT13D PT13A PT12B PT11A PT10D PT10A PT9A VDD VSS PT17D PT15D PT14D PT13B PT12A PT11D PT11A PT10A VDD VSS PT19A PT16D PT15D PT14B PT13A PT12D PT12A PT11A VDD VSS I/O-RDY/RCLK I/O-D7 I/O I/O-D6 I/O-D5 I/O I/O-D4 I/O-D3 Note: The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. 72 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 20. OR2C/2T04A and OR2C/2T06A 100-Pin TQFP Pinout Pin 2C/2T04A Pad 2C/2T06A Pad Function Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 VDD VSS PL1C PL1A PL2D PL2A PL3D PL3A PL4D PL4A PL5D PL5A VDD PL6A VSS PL7D PL7A PL8A PL9D PL9C PL9A PL10D PL10A VSS CCLK VDD VSS PB1A PB1C PB1D PB2A PB2D PB3A PB4A PB4D PB5A VSS PB6A VSS PB7A PB7D PB8A VDD VSS PL1A PL2A PL3D PL3A PL4D PL4A PL5D PL5A PL6D PL6A VDD PL7A VSS PL8D PL8A PL9A PL10D PL10C PL10A PL11A PL12A VSS CCLK VDD VSS PB1A PB1D PB2A PB3A PB3D PB4A PB5A PB5D PB6A VSS PB7A VSS PB8A PB8D PB9A VDD VSS I/O-A0 I/O-A1 I/O-A2 I/O-A3 I/O I/O-A4 I/O-A5 I/O-A6 I/O I/O-A7 VDD I/O-A8 VSS I/O-A9 I/O-A10 I/O-A11 I/O-A12 I/O I/O-A13 I/O-A14 I/O-A15 VSS CCLK VDD VSS I/O-A16 I/O I/O-A17 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O VSS I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O-HDC 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 2C/2T04A Pad 2C/2T06A Pad Function PB8C PB8D PB9A PB9D PB10A PB10D DONE VDD PB9C PB9D PB10A PB10D PB11A PB12A DONE VDD I/O I/O I/O-LDC I/O I/O-INIT I/O DONE VDD RESET PRGM RESET PRGM RESET PRGM PR10A PR10D PR9A PR9D PR8A PR8D PR7A PR7D VSS PR6A VDD PR5A VSS PR4A PR4D PR3A PR3D PR2A PR2D PR1A PR1C PR1D PR12A PR11A PR10A PR10D PR9A PR9D PR8A PR8D VSS PR7A VDD PR6A VSS PR5A PR5D PR4A PR4D PR3A PR3D PR2A PR2D PR1A I/O-M0 I/O I/O-M1 I/O I/O-M2 I/O I/O-M3 I/O VSS I/O VDD I/O VSS I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O-CS1 I/O I/O-CS0 I/O I/O-RD I/O I/O-WR RD_CFG RD_CFG RD_CFG VDD VSS PT10C PT9D PT9C PT9A PT8D PT8A PT7D VDD VSS PT12A PT11A PT10D PT10A PT9D PT9A PT8D VDD VSS I/O-RDY/RCLK I/O-D7 I/O I/O-D6 I/O I/O-D5 I/O Note: The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. Lucent Technologies Inc. 73 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 20. OR2C/2T04A and OR2C/2T06A 100-Pin TQFP Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T04A Pad 2C/2T06A Pad Function Pin 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 PT7A PT6D PT6A VSS PT5A VSS PT4D PT4A PT8A PT7D PT7A VSS PT6A VSS PT5D PT5A I/O-D4 I/O I/O-D3 VSS I/O-D2 VSS I/O-D1 I/O-D0/DIN 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 2C/2T04A Pad 2C/2T06A Pad Function PT3D PT3A PT2D PT2A PT1D PT1C PT1A PT4D PT4A PT3D PT3A PT2A PT1D PT1A I/O I/O-DOUT I/O-VDD5 I/O-TDI I/O-TMS I/O I/O-TCK RD_DATA/ TDO RD_DATA/TDO RD_DATA/TDO Note: The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. 74 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 21. OR2C/2T04A and OR2C/2T06A 144-Pin TQFP Pinout Pin 2C/2T04A Pad 2C/2T06A Pad Function Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 VDD VSS PL1C PL1B PL1A PL2D PL2A PL3D PL3C PL3A PL4D PL4C PL4A VSS PL5D PL5C PL5A VDD PL6D PL6C PL6A VSS PL7D PL7A PL8D PL8C PL8A PL9D PL9C PL9A PL10D PL10C PL10B PL10A VSS CCLK VDD VSS PB1A PB1C PB1D PB2A VDD VSS PL1A PL2D PL2A PL3D PL3A PL4D PL4C PL4A PL5D PL5C PL5A VSS PL6D PL6C PL6A VDD PL7D PL7C PL7A VSS PL8D PL8A PL9D PL9C PL9A PL10D PL10C PL10A PL11A PL12D PL12B PL12A VSS CCLK VDD VSS PB1A PB1D PB2A PB3A VDD VSS I/O-A0 I/O I/O-A1 I/O-A2 I/O-A3 I/O I/O I/O-A4 I/O-A5 I/O I/O-A6 VSS I/O I/O I/O-A7 VDD I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O-A8 VSS I/O-A9 I/O-A10 I/O I/O I/O-A11 I/O-A12 I/O I/O-A13 I/O-A14 I/O I/O I/O-A15 VSS CCLK VDD VSS I/O-A16 I/O I/O-A17 I/O 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 2C/2T04A Pad 2C/2T06A Pad Function PB2B PB2D VDD PB3A PB3D PB4A PB4C PB4D PB5A PB5C PB5D VSS PB6A PB6C PB6D PB7A PB7D PB8A PB8C PB8D VDD PB9A PB9C PB9D PB10A PB10C PB10D VSS DONE VDD VSS PB3B PB3D VDD PB4A PB4D PB5A PB5C PB5D PB6A PB6C PB6D VSS PB7A PB7C PB7D PB8A PB8D PB9A PB9C PB9D VDD PB10A PB10C PB10D PB11A PB11D PB12A VSS DONE VDD VSS I/O I/O VDD I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O-HDC I/O I/O VDD I/O-LDC I/O I/O I/O-INIT I/O I/O VSS DONE VDD VSS RESET PRGM RESET PRGM RESET PRGM PR10A PR10B PR10D PR9A PR9C PR9D PR8A PR8B PR8D PR12A PR12D PR11A PR10A PR10C PR10D PR9A PR9B PR9D I/O-M0 I/O I/O I/O-M1 I/O I/O I/O-M2 I/O I/O Note: The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. Lucent Technologies Inc. 75 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 21. OR2C/2T04A and OR2C/2T06A 144-Pin TQFP Pinout (continued) Pin 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 2C/2T04A Pad 2C/2T06A Pad Function Pin PR7A PR7D VSS PR6A PR6C PR6D VDD PR5A PR5C PR5D VSS PR4A PR4C PR4D PR3A PR3D PR2A PR2D PR1A PR1B PR1C PR1D VSS PR8A PR8D VSS PR7A PR7C PR7D VDD PR6A PR6C PR6D VSS PR5A PR5C PR5D PR4A PR4D PR3A PR3D PR2A PR2C PR2D PR1A VSS I/O-M3 I/O VSS I/O I/O I/O VDD I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O-CS1 I/O I/O-CS0 I/O I/O-RD I/O I/O I/O-WR VSS RD_CFG RD_CFG RD_CFG VDD VSS PT10D PT10C PT10B PT9D VDD VSS PT12D PT12A PT11D PT11A VDD VSS I/O I/O-RDY/RCLK I/O I/O-D7 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 2C/2T04A Pad 2C/2T06A Pad Function PT9C PT9B PT9A VDD PT8D PT8A PT7D PT7B PT7A PT6D PT6C PT6A VSS PT5D PT5C PT5A PT4D PT4C PT4A PT3D PT3A VDD PT2D PT2C PT2A PT1D PT1C PT1A VSS PT10D PT10C PT10A VDD PT9D PT9A PT8D PT8B PT8A PT7D PT7C PT7A VSS PT6D PT6C PT6A PT5D PT5C PT5A PT4D PT4A VDD PT3D PT3C PT3A PT2A PT1D PT1A VSS I/O I/O I/O-D6 VDD I/O I/O-D5 I/O I/O I/O-D4 I/O I/O I/O-D3 VSS I/O I/O I/O-D2 I/O-D1 I/O I/O-D0/DIN I/O I/O-DOUT VDD I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O-TDI I/O-TMS I/O I/O-TCK VSS RD_DATA/ TDO RD_DATA/ TDO RD_DATA/TDO Note: The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. 76 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 22. OR2C/2T04A, OR2C/2T06A, OR2C/2T08A, and OR2C/2T10A 160-Pin QFP Pinout Pin 2C/2T04A Pad 2C/2T06A Pad 2C/2T08A Pad 2C/2T10A Pad Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 VDD VSS PL1D PL1C PL1B PL1A PL2D PL2C PL2A PL3D PL3C PL3A PL4D PL4C PL4A VSS PL5D PL5C PL5A VDD PL6D PL6C PL6A VSS PL7D PL7B PL7A PL8D PL8C PL8A PL9D PL9C PL9B PL9A PL10D PL10C PL10B PL10A CCLK VSS VDD VSS PL1D PL1A PL2D PL2A PL3D PL3C PL3A PL4D PL4C PL4A PL5D PL5C PL5A VSS PL6D PL6C PL6A VDD PL7D PL7C PL7A VSS PL8D PL8B PL8A PL9D PL9C PL9A PL10D PL10C PL10B PL10A PL11A PL12D PL12B PL12A CCLK VSS VDD VSS PL1D PL2D PL3D PL3A PL4D PL4C PL4A PL5D PL5C PL5A PL6D PL6C PL6A VSS PL7D PL7C PL7A VDD PL8D PL8C PL8A VSS PL9D PL9B PL9A PL10D PL10C PL10A PL11D PL11C PL11B PL11A PL12A PL13D PL14D PL14A CCLK VSS VDD VSS PL1D PL2D PL3D PL3A PL4A PL5C PL5A PL6D PL6C PL6A PL7D PL7C PL7A VSS PL8D PL8C PL8A VDD PL9D PL9C PL9A VSS PL10D PL10B PL10A PL11D PL11C PL11A PL12D PL12C PL12B PL13D PL14C PL15D PL16D PL16A CCLK VSS VDD VSS I/O I/O-A0 I/O I/O-A1 I/O-A2 I/O I/O-A3 I/O I/O I/O-A4 I/O-A5 I/O I/O-A6 VSS I/O I/O I/O-A7 VDD I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O-A8 VSS I/O-A9 I/O I/O-A10 I/O I/O I/O-A11 I/O-A12 I/O I/O I/O-A13 I/O-A14 I/O I/O I/O-A15 CCLK VSS Note: The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. Lucent Technologies Inc. 77 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 22. OR2C/2T04A, OR2C/2T06A, OR2C/2T08A, and OR2C/2T10A 160-Pin QFP Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T04A Pad 2C/2T06A Pad 2C/2T08A Pad 2C/2T10A Pad Function 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 VDD VSS PB1A PB1B PB1C PB1D PB2A PB2B PB2C PB2D VDD PB3A PB3D PB4A PB4C PB4D PB5A PB5C PB5D VSS PB6A PB6C PB6D PB7A PB7D PB8A PB8C PB8D VDD PB9A PB9B PB9C PB9D PB10A PB10B PB10C PB10D VSS DONE VDD VSS VDD VSS PB1A PB1C PB1D PB2A PB3A PB3B PB3C PB3D VDD PB4A PB4D PB5A PB5C PB5D PB6A PB6C PB6D VSS PB7A PB7C PB7D PB8A PB8D PB9A PB9C PB9D VDD PB10A PB10B PB10C PB10D PB11A PB11C PB11D PB12A VSS DONE VDD VSS VDD VSS PB1A PB2A PB2D PB3A PB3D PB4A PB4C PB4D VDD PB5A PB5D PB6A PB6C PB6D PB7A PB7C PB7D VSS PB8A PB8C PB8D PB9A PB9D PB10A PB10C PB10D VDD PB11A PB11D PB12A PB12B PB12C PB12D PB13D PB14D VSS DONE VDD VSS VDD VSS PB1A PB2A PB2D PB3B PB4D PB5A PB5C PB5D VDD PB6A PB6D PB7A PB7C PB7D PB8A PB8C PB8D VSS PB9A PB9C PB9D PB10A PB10D PB11A PB11C PB11D VDD PB12A PB13A PB13B PB13C PB13D PB14A PB15D PB16D VSS DONE VDD VSS VDD VSS I/O-A16 I/O I/O I/O-A17 I/O I/O I/O I/O VDD I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O-HDC I/O I/O VDD I/O-LDC I/O I/O I/O I/O-INIT I/O I/O I/O VSS DONE VDD VSS Note: The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. 78 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 22. OR2C/2T04A, OR2C/2T06A, OR2C/2T08A, and OR2C/2T10A 160-Pin QFP Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T04A Pad 2C/2T06A Pad 2C/2T08A Pad 2C/2T10A Pad Function 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 RESET RESET RESET RESET RESET PRGM PRGM PRGM PRGM PRGM PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D PR9A PR9B PR9C PR9D PR8A PR8B PR8D PR7A PR7D VSS PR6A PR6C PR6D VDD PR5A PR5C PR5D VSS PR4A PR4C PR4D PR3A PR3B PR3D PR2A PR2C PR2D PR1A PR1B PR1C PR1D VSS PR12A PR12D PR11A PR11B PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D PR9A PR9B PR9D PR8A PR8D VSS PR7A PR7C PR7D VDD PR6A PR6C PR6D VSS PR5A PR5C PR5D PR4A PR4B PR4D PR3A PR3C PR3D PR2A PR2C PR2D PR1A VSS PR14A PR13A PR13D PR12A PR11A PR11B PR11C PR11D PR10A PR10B PR10D PR9A PR9D VSS PR8A PR8C PR8D VDD PR7A PR7C PR7D VSS PR6A PR6C PR6D PR5A PR5B PR5D PR4A PR4B PR4D PR3A PR3C PR3D PR2A VSS PR16A PR15A PR15D PR14A PR13B PR13C PR12A PR12B PR11A PR11B PR11D PR10A PR10D VSS PR9A PR9C PR9D VDD PR8A PR8C PR8D VSS PR7A PR7C PR7D PR6A PR6B PR6D PR5A PR4B PR4D PR3A PR3C PR3D PR2A VSS I/O-M0 I/O I/O I/O I/O-M1 I/O I/O I/O I/O-M2 I/O I/O I/O-M3 I/O VSS I/O I/O I/O VDD I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O-CS1 I/O I/O I/O-CS0 I/O I/O I/O-RD I/O I/O I/O-WR VSS RD_CFG RD_CFG RD_CFG RD_CFG RD_CFG VDD VSS VDD VSS VDD VSS VDD VSS VDD VSS Note: The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. Lucent Technologies Inc. 79 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 22. OR2C/2T04A, OR2C/2T06A, OR2C/2T08A, and OR2C/2T10A 160-Pin QFP Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T04A Pad 2C/2T06A Pad 2C/2T08A Pad 2C/2T10A Pad Function 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 PT10D PT10C PT10B PT10A PT9D PT9C PT9B PT9A VDD PT8D PT8A PT7D PT7B PT7A PT6D PT6C PT6A VSS PT5D PT5C PT5A PT4D PT4C PT4A PT3D PT3C PT3A VDD PT2D PT2C PT2B PT2A PT1D PT1C PT1B PT1A VSS RD_DATA/TDO PT12D PT12A PT11D PT11C PT11A PT10D PT10C PT10A VDD PT9D PT9A PT8D PT8B PT8A PT7D PT7C PT7A VSS PT6D PT6C PT6A PT5D PT5C PT5A PT4D PT4C PT4A VDD PT3D PT3C PT3B PT3A PT2A PT1D PT1C PT1A VSS RD_DATA/TDO PT14D PT13D PT13A PT12D PT12C PT12A PT11D PT11B VDD PT10D PT10A PT9D PT9B PT9A PT8D PT8C PT8A VSS PT7D PT7C PT7A PT6D PT6C PT6A PT5D PT5C PT5A VDD PT4D PT4C PT4B PT4A PT3A PT2A PT1D PT1A VSS RD_DATA/TDO PT16D PT15D PT15A PT14D PT13D PT13B PT13A PT12B VDD PT11D PT11A PT10D PT10B PT10A PT9D PT9C PT9A VSS PT8D PT8C PT8A PT7D PT7C PT7A PT6D PT6C PT6A VDD PT5D PT5A PT4D PT4A PT3A PT2A PT1D PT1A VSS RD_DATA/TDO I/O I/O-RDY/RCLK I/O I/O I/O-D7 I/O I/O I/O-D6 VDD I/O I/O-D5 I/O I/O I/O-D4 I/O I/O I/O-D3 VSS I/O I/O I/O-D2 I/O-D1 I/O I/O-D0/DIN I/O I/O I/O-DOUT VDD I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O-TDI I/O-TMS I/O I/O I/O-TCK VSS RD_DATA/TDO Note: The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. 80 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 23. OR2C/2T04A, OR2C/2T06A, OR2C/2T08A, OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, OR2C/2T15A/B, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2C/2T40A/B 208-Pin SQFP/SQFP2 Pinout Pin 2C/2T04A Pad 2C/2T06A Pad 2C/2T08A Pad 2C/2T10A Pad 2C/2T12A 2C/2T15A/B 2C/2T26A 2C/2T40A/B Pad Pad Pad Pad 1 2 3 VSS VSS PL1D VSS VSS PL1D VSS VSS PL1D VSS VSS PL1D VSS VSS PL1D VSS VSS PL1D VSS VSS PL1D VSS VSS PL1D VSS VSS I/O 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 PL1C PL1B See Note PL1A PL2D PL2C PL2B PL2A VDD PL3D PL3C PL3B PL3A PL4D PL4C PL4B PL4A VSS PL5D PL5C PL5B PL5A VDD PL6D PL6C PL6B PL6A VSS PL7D PL7C PL7B PL7A PL8D PL8C PL8B PL8A VDD PL9D PL9C PL9B PL1A PL2D PL2C PL2A PL3D PL3C PL3B PL3A VDD PL4D PL4C PL4B PL4A PL5D PL5C PL5B PL5A VSS PL6D PL6C PL6B PL6A VDD PL7D PL7C PL7B PL7A VSS PL8D PL8C PL8B PL8A PL9D PL9C PL9B PL9A VDD PL10D PL10C PL10B PL2D PL3D PL3C PL3A PL4D PL4C PL4B PL4A VDD PL5D PL5C PL5B PL5A PL6D PL6C PL6B PL6A VSS PL7D PL7C PL7B PL7A VDD PL8D PL8C PL8B PL8A VSS PL9D PL9C PL9B PL9A PL10D PL10C PL10B PL10A VDD PL11D PL11C PL11B PL2D PL3D PL3C PL3A PL4A PL5C PL5B PL5A VDD PL6D PL6C PL6B PL6A PL7D PL7C PL7B PL7A VSS PL8D PL8C PL8B PL8A VDD PL9D PL9C PL9B PL9A VSS PL10D PL10C PL10B PL10A PL11D PL11C PL11B PL11A VDD PL12D PL12C PL12B PL2D PL3D PL3A PL4A PL5A PL6D PL6B PL6A VDD PL7D PL7C PL7B PL7A PL8D PL8C PL8B PL8A VSS PL9D PL9C PL9B PL9A VDD PL10D PL10C PL10B PL10A VSS PL11D PL11C PL11B PL11A PL12D PL12C PL12B PL12A VDD PL13D PL13B PL14D PL2D PL4D PL4A PL5A PL6A PL7D PL7B PL7A VDD PL8D PL8C PL8B PL8A PL9D PL9C PL9B PL9A VSS PL10D PL10C PL10B PL10A VDD PL11D PL11C PL11B PL11A VSS PL12D PL12C PL12B PL12A PL13D PL13C PL13B PL13A VDD PL14D PL14B PL15D PL2D PL4D PL4A PL5A PL6A PL7D PL7B PL7A VDD PL8D PL8A PL9D PL9A PL10D PL10A PL11D PL11A VSS PL12D PL12C PL12B PL12A VDD PL13D PL13C PL13B PL13A VSS PL14D PL14A PL15D PL15A PL16D PL16A PL17D PL17A VDD PL18D PL18B PL19D PL3D PL5D PL6D PL8D PL9A PL10D PL10B PL10A VDD PL11D PL11A PL12D PL12A PL13D PL13A PL14D PL14A VSS PL15D PL15C PL15B PL15A VDD PL16D PL16C PL16B PL16A VSS PL17D PL17A PL18D PL18A PL19D PL19A PL20D PL20A VDD PL21D PL21B PL22D I/O-A0 I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O-A1 I/O-A2 I/O I/O I/O-A3 VDD I/O I/O I/O I/O-A4 I/O-A5 I/O I/O I/O-A6 VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O-A7 VDD I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O-A8 VSS I/O-A9 I/O I/O I/O-A10 I/O I/O I/O I/O-A11 VDD I/O-A12 I/O I/O Function Notes: The OR2C04A and OR2T04A do not have bond pads connected to 208-pin SQFP package pin numbers 6, 45, 47, 56, 60, 102, 153, 154, 166, 201, and 203. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. Lucent Technologies Inc. 81 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 23. OR2C/2T04A, OR2C/2T06A, OR2C/2T08A, OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, OR2C/2T15A/B, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2C/2T40A/B 208-Pin SQFP/SQFP2 Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T04A Pad 2C/2T06A Pad 2C/2T08A Pad 2C/2T10A Pad 2C/2T12A 2C/2T15A/B 2C/2T26A 2C/2T40A/B Pad Pad Pad Pad 44 45 46 PL9A See Note PL10D PL10A PL11D PL11A PL11A PL12D PL12A PL13D PL13B PL14C PL14B PL15D PL16D PL15B PL16D PL17D PL19B PL20D PL21D PL22B PL23D PL25A I/O-A13 I/O I/O-A14 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 See Note PL10C PL10B PL10A VSS CCLK VSS VSS PB1A See Note PB1B PB1C PB1D See Note PB2A PB2B PB2C PB2D VDD PB3A PB3B PB3C PB3D PB4A PB4B PB4C PB4D VSS PB5A PB5B PB5C PB5D VSS PB6A PB6B PB6C PL12D PL12C PL12B PL12A VSS CCLK VSS VSS PB1A PB1B PB1C PB1D PB2A PB2D PB3A PB3B PB3C PB3D VDD PB4A PB4B PB4C PB4D PB5A PB5B PB5C PB5D VSS PB6A PB6B PB6C PB6D VSS PB7A PB7B PB7C PL13D PL13A PL14D PL14A VSS CCLK VSS VSS PB1A PB1D PB2A PB2D PB3A PB3D PB4A PB4B PB4C PB4D VDD PB5A PB5B PB5C PB5D PB6A PB6B PB6C PB6D VSS PB7A PB7B PB7C PB7D VSS PB8A PB8B PB8C PL15D PL15A PL16D PL16A VSS CCLK VSS VSS PB1A PB1D PB2A PB2D PB3B PB4D PB5A PB5B PB5C PB5D VDD PB6A PB6B PB6C PB6D PB7A PB7B PB7C PB7D VSS PB8A PB8B PB8C PB8D VSS PB9A PB9B PB9C PL17D PL17A PL18C PL18A VSS CCLK VSS VSS PB1A PB1D PB2A PB2D PB3D PB4D PB5B PB5D PB6B PB6D VDD PB7A PB7B PB7C PB7D PB8A PB8B PB8C PB8D VSS PB9A PB9B PB9C PB9D VSS PB10A PB10B PB10C PL18D PL19D PL19A PL20A VSS CCLK VSS VSS PB1A PB2A PB2D PB3D PB4D PB5D PB6B PB6D PB7B PB7D VDD PB8A PB8B PB8C PB8D PB9A PB9B PB9C PB9D VSS PB10A PB10B PB10C PB10D VSS PB11A PB11B PB11C PL22D PL23D PL23A PL24A VSS CCLK VSS VSS PB1A PB2A PB2D PB3D PB4D PB5D PB6B PB6D PB7B PB7D VDD PB8A PB8D PB9A PB9D PB10A PB10D PB11A PB11D VSS PB12A PB12B PB12C PB12D VSS PB13A PB13B PB13C PL27D PL28D PL28A PL30A VSS CCLK VSS VSS PB1A PB3A PB3D PB4D PB5D PB6D PB7D PB8D PB9D PB10D VDD PB11A PB11D PB12A PB12D PB13A PB13D PB14A PB14D VSS PB15A PB15B PB15C PB15D VSS PB16A PB16B PB16C I/O I/O I/O I/O-A15 VSS CCLK VSS VSS I/O-A16 I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O-A17 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O VDD I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O I/O I/O 83 84 85 86 PB6D VSS PB7A PB7B PB7D VSS PB8A PB8B PB8D VSS PB9A PB9B PB9D VSS PB10A PB10B PB10D VSS PB11A PB11B PB11D VSS PB12A PB12B PB13D VSS PB14A PB14D PB16D VSS PB17A PB17D I/O VSS I/O-VDD5 I/O Function Notes: The OR2C04A and OR2T04A do not have bond pads connected to 208-pin SQFP package pin numbers 6, 45, 47, 56, 60, 102, 153, 154, 166, 201, and 203. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. 82 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 23. OR2C/2T04A, OR2C/2T06A, OR2C/2T08A, OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, OR2C/2T15A/B, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2C/2T40A/B 208-Pin SQFP/SQFP2 Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T04A Pad 2C/2T06A Pad 2C/2T08A Pad 2C/2T10A Pad 2C/2T12A 2C/2T15A/B 2C/2T26A 2C/2T40A/B Pad Pad Pad Pad 87 88 89 PB7C PB7D PB8A PB8C PB8D PB9A PB9C PB9D PB10A PB10C PB10D PB11A PB11C PB11D PB12A PB12C PB12D PB13A PB15A PB15D PB16A PB18A PB18D PB19A I/O I/O I/O-HDC 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 PB8B PB8C PB8D VDD PB9A PB9B PB9C PB9D PB10A PB10B PB10C PB10D See Note VSS DONE VSS RESET PRGM PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D PR9A PR9B PR9C PR9D VDD PR8A PR8B PR8C PR8D PR7A PR7B PR7C PR7D VSS PR6A PR6B PR6C PR6D PB9B PB9C PB9D VDD PB10A PB10B PB10C PB10D PB11A PB11C PB11D PB12A PB12D VSS DONE VSS RESET PRGM PR12A PR12D PR11A PR11B PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D VDD PR9A PR9B PR9C PR9D PR8A PR8B PR8C PR8D VSS PR7A PR7B PR7C PR7D PB10B PB10C PB10D VDD PB11A PB11D PB12A PB12B PB12C PB12D PB13A PB13D PB14D VSS DONE VSS RESET PRGM PR14A PR13A PR13D PR12A PR11A PR11B PR11C PR11D VDD PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D PR9A PR9B PR9C PR9D VSS PR8A PR8B PR8C PR8D PB11B PB11C PB11D VDD PB12A PB13A PB13B PB13C PB13D PB14A PB15A PB15D PB16D VSS DONE VSS RESET PRGM PR16A PR15A PR15D PR14A PR13B PR13C PR12A PR12B VDD PR11A PR11B PR11C PR11D PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D VSS PR9A PR9B PR9C PR9D PB12B PB12C PB12D VDD PB13A PB13D PB14A PB14D PB15A PB16A PB17A PB18A PB18D VSS DONE VSS RESET PRGM PR18A PR18D PR17B PR16A PR15D PR14A PR14D PR13A VDD PR12A PR12B PR12C PR12D PR11A PR11B PR11C PR11D VSS PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D PB13B PB13C PB13D VDD PB14A PB14D PB15A PB15D PB16A PB17A PB18A PB19D PB20D VSS DONE VSS RESET PRGM PR20A PR19A PR18A PR17A PR16D PR15A PR15D PR14A VDD PR13A PR13B PR13C PR13D PR12A PR12B PR12C PR12D VSS PR11A PR11B PR11C PR11D PB16D PB17A PB17D VDD PB18A PB18D PB19A PB19D PB20A PB21A PB22A PB23D PB24D VSS DONE VSS RESET PRGM PR24A PR23A PR22A PR21A PR20D PR19A PR19D PR18A VDD PR17A PR17D PR16A PR16D PR15A PR15D PR14A PR14D VSS PR13A PR13B PR13C PR13D PB19D PB20A PB20D VDD PB21A PB22D PB23A PB24D PB25A PB26A PB27A PB28D PB30D VSS DONE VSS RESET PRGM PR30A PR28A PR27A PR26A PR23D PR22A PR22D PR21A VDD PR20A PR20D PR19A PR19D PR18A PR18D PR17A PR17D VSS PR16A PR16B PR16C PR16D I/O I/O I/O VDD I/O-LDC I/O I/O I/O I/O-INIT I/O I/O I/O I/O VSS DONE VSS RESET PRGM I/O-M0 I/O I/O I/O I/O-M1 I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O VDD I/O-M2 I/O I/O I/O I/O-M3 I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O Function Notes: The OR2C04A and OR2T04A do not have bond pads connected to 208-pin SQFP package pin numbers 6, 45, 47, 56, 60, 102, 153, 154, 166, 201, and 203. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. Lucent Technologies Inc. 83 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 23. OR2C/2T04A, OR2C/2T06A, OR2C/2T08A, OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, OR2C/2T15A/B, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2C/2T40A/B 208-Pin SQFP/SQFP2 Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T04A Pad 2C/2T06A Pad 2C/2T08A Pad 2C/2T10A Pad 2C/2T12A 2C/2T15A/B 2C/2T26A 2C/2T40A/B Pad Pad Pad Pad 130 131 132 VDD PR5A PR5B VDD PR6A PR6B VDD PR7A PR7B VDD PR8A PR8B VDD PR9A PR9B VDD PR10A PR10B VDD PR12A PR12B VDD PR15A PR15B VDD I/O I/O 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 PR5C PR5D VSS PR4A PR4B PR4C PR4D PR3A PR3B PR3C PR3D VDD PR2A PR2B PR2C PR2D PR1A PR1B PR1C PR1D See Note See Note VSS RD_CFG 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 VSS VSS PT10D PT10C PT10B PT10A PT9D PT9C PT9B See Note PT9A VDD PT8D PT8C PT8B PT8A PR6C PR6D VSS PR5A PR5B PR5C PR5D PR4A PR4B PR4C PR4D VDD PR3A PR3B PR3C PR3D PR2A PR2C PR2D PR1A PR1C PR1D VSS RD_CFG VSS VSS PT12D PT12A PT11D PT11C PT11A PT10D PT10C PT10B PT10A VDD PT9D PT9C PT9B PT9A PR7C PR7D VSS PR6A PR6B PR6C PR6D PR5A PR5B PR5C PR5D VDD PR4A PR4B PR4C PR4D PR3A PR3C PR3D PR2A PR2D PR1A VSS RD_CFG VSS VSS PT14D PT13D PT13A PT12D PT12C PT12A PT11D PT11C PT11B VDD PT10D PT10C PT10B PT10A PR8C PR8D VSS PR7A PR7B PR7C PR7D PR6A PR6B PR6C PR6D VDD PR5A PR4B PR4C PR4D PR3A PR3C PR3D PR2A PR2D PR1A VSS RD_CFG VSS VSS PT16D PT15D PT15A PT14D PT13D PT13B PT13A PT12D PT12B VDD PT11D PT11C PT11B PT11A PR9C PR9D VSS PR8A PR8B PR8C PR8D PR7A PR7B PR7C PR7D VDD PR6A PR6B PR5B PR5D PR4A PR4D PR3A PR2A PR2C PR1A VSS RD_CFG VSS VSS PT18D PT17D PT16D PT16A PT15D PT14D PT14A PT13D PT13B VDD PT12D PT12C PT12B PT12A PR10C PR10D VSS PR9A PR9B PR9C PR9D PR8A PR8B PR8C PR8D VDD PR7A PR7B PR6B PR6D PR5A PR5D PR4A PR3A PR2A PR1A VSS RD_CFG VSS VSS PT20D PT19A PT17D PT17A PT16D PT15D PT15A PT14D PT14B VDD PT13D PT13C PT13B PT13A PR12C PR12D VSS PR11A PR11D PR10A PR10D PR9A PR9D PR8A PR8D VDD PR7A PR7B PR6B PR6D PR5A PR5D PR4A PR3A PR2A PR1A VSS RD_CFG VSS VSS PT24D PT23A PT21D PT21A PT20D PT19D PT19A PT18D PT18B VDD PT17D PT17A PT16D PT16A PR15C PR15D VSS PR14A PR14D PR13A PR13D PR12A PR12D PR11A PR11D VDD PR10A PR10B PR9B PR9D PR8A PR6A PR5A PR4A PR3A PR2A VSS RD_CFG VSS VSS PT30D PT28A PT26D PT26A PT25D PT24D PT23D PT22D PT21D VDD PT20D PT20A PT19D PT19A I/O I/O VSS I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O-CS1 I/O I/O I/O VDD I/O-CS0 I/O I/O I/O I/O-RD I/O I/O I/O-WR I/O I/O VSS RD_CFG VSS VSS I/O I/O-RDY/RCLK I/O I/O I/O-D7 I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O-D6 VDD I/O I/O I/O I/O-D5 Function Notes: The OR2C04A and OR2T04A do not have bond pads connected to 208-pin SQFP package pin numbers 6, 45, 47, 56, 60, 102, 153, 154, 166, 201, and 203. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. 84 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 23. OR2C/2T04A, OR2C/2T06A, OR2C/2T08A, OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, OR2C/2T15A/B, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2C/2T40A/B 208-Pin SQFP/SQFP2 Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T04A Pad 2C/2T06A Pad 2C/2T08A Pad 2C/2T10A Pad 2C/2T12A 2C/2T15A/B 2C/2T26A 2C/2T40A/B Pad Pad Pad Pad 173 174 175 PT7D PT7C PT7B PT8D PT8C PT8B PT9D PT9C PT9B PT10D PT10C PT10B PT11D PT11C PT11B PT12D PT12C PT12B PT15D PT15A PT14D PT18D PT18A PT17D I/O I/O I/O 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 PT7A VSS PT6D PT6C PT6B PT6A VSS PT5D PT5C PT5B PT5A VSS PT4D PT4C PT4B PT4A PT3D PT3C PT3B PT3A VDD PT2D PT2C PT2B PT2A See Note PT1D See Note PT1C PT1B PT1A VSS RD_DATA/ TDO PT8A VSS PT7D PT7C PT7B PT7A VSS PT6D PT6C PT6B PT6A VSS PT5D PT5C PT5B PT5A PT4D PT4C PT4B PT4A VDD PT3D PT3C PT3B PT3A PT2D PT2A PT1D PT1C PT1B PT1A VSS RD_DATA/ TDO PT9A VSS PT8D PT8C PT8B PT8A VSS PT7D PT7C PT7B PT7A VSS PT6D PT6C PT6B PT6A PT5D PT5C PT5B PT5A VDD PT4D PT4C PT4B PT4A PT3D PT3A PT2D PT2A PT1D PT1A VSS RD_DATA/ TDO PT10A VSS PT9D PT9C PT9B PT9A VSS PT8D PT8C PT8B PT8A VSS PT7D PT7C PT7B PT7A PT6D PT6C PT6B PT6A VDD PT5D PT5A PT4D PT4A PT3D PT3A PT2D PT2A PT1D PT1A VSS RD_DATA/ TDO PT11A VSS PT10D PT10C PT10B PT10A VSS PT9D PT9C PT9B PT9A VSS PT8D PT8C PT8B PT8A PT7D PT7C PT7B PT7A VDD PT6D PT6A PT5C PT5A PT4A PT3A PT2C PT2A PT1D PT1A VSS RD_DATA/ TDO PT12A VSS PT11D PT11C PT11B PT11A VSS PT10D PT10C PT10B PT10A VSS PT9D PT9C PT9B PT9A PT8D PT8C PT8B PT8A VDD PT7D PT7A PT6C PT6A PT5A PT4A PT3A PT2A PT1D PT1A VSS RD_DATA/ TDO PT14A VSS PT13D PT13C PT13B PT13A VSS PT12D PT12C PT12B PT12A VSS PT11D PT11A PT10D PT10A PT9D PT9A PT8D PT8A VDD PT7D PT7A PT6C PT6A PT5A PT4A PT3A PT2A PT1D PT1A VSS RD_DATA/ TDO PT17A VSS PT16D PT16C PT16B PT16A VSS PT15D PT15C PT15B PT15A VSS PT14D PT14A PT13D PT13A PT12D PT12A PT11D PT11A VDD PT10D PT9A PT8A PT7A PT6A PT5A PT4A PT3A PT2D PT1A VSS RD_DATA/ TDO I/O-D4 VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O-D3 VSS I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O-D2 VSS I/O-D1 I/O I/O I/O-D0/DIN I/O I/O I/O I/O-DOUT VDD I/O I/O I/O I/O-TDI I/O I/O-TMS I/O I/O I/O I/O-TCK VSS RD_DATA/TDO Function Notes: The OR2C04A and OR2T04A do not have bond pads connected to 208-pin SQFP package pin numbers 6, 45, 47, 56, 60, 102, 153, 154, 166, 201, and 203. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. Lucent Technologies Inc. 85 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 24. OR2C/2T06A, OR2C/2T08A, OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, OR2C/2T15A/B, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2C/2T40A/B 240-Pin SQFP/SQFP2 Pinout Pin 2C/2T06A Pad 2C/2T08A Pad 2C/2T10A Pad 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 VSS VDD PL1D PL1C PL1B PL1A VSS PL2D PL2C PL2B PL2A PL3D PL3C PL3B PL3A VDD PL4D PL4C PL4B PL4A PL5D PL5C PL5B PL5A VSS PL6D PL6C PL6B PL6A VDD PL7D PL7C PL7B PL7A VSS PL8D PL8C PL8B PL8A PL9D PL9C PL9B VSS VDD PL1D PL1B PL1A PL2D VSS PL3D PL3C PL3B PL3A PL4D PL4C PL4B PL4A VDD PL5D PL5C PL5B PL5A PL6D PL6C PL6B PL6A VSS PL7D PL7C PL7B PL7A VDD PL8D PL8C PL8B PL8A VSS PL9D PL9C PL9B PL9A PL10D PL10C PL10B VSS VDD PL1D PL1B PL1A PL2D VSS PL3D PL3C PL3B PL3A PL4A PL5C PL5B PL5A VDD PL6D PL6C PL6B PL6A PL7D PL7C PL7B PL7A VSS PL8D PL8C PL8B PL8A VDD PL9D PL9C PL9B PL9A VSS PL10D PL10C PL10B PL10A PL11D PL11C PL11B 2C/2T12A 2C/2T15A/B 2C/2T26A 2C/2T40A/B Pad Pad Pad Pad VSS VDD PL1D PL1C PL1B PL2D VSS PL3D PL3A PL4D PL4A PL5A PL6D PL6B PL6A VDD PL7D PL7C PL7B PL7A PL8D PL8C PL8B PL8A VSS PL9D PL9C PL9B PL9A VDD PL10D PL10C PL10B PL10A VSS PL11D PL11C PL11B PL11A PL12D PL12C PL12B VSS VDD PL1D PL1C PL1B PL2D VSS PL4D PL4A PL5D PL5A PL6A PL7D PL7B PL7A VDD PL8D PL8C PL8B PL8A PL9D PL9C PL9B PL9A VSS PL10D PL10C PL10B PL10A VDD PL11D PL11C PL11B PL11A VSS PL12D PL12C PL12B PL12A PL13D PL13C PL13B VSS VDD PL1D PL1C PL1B PL2D VSS PL4D PL4A PL5D PL5A PL6A PL7D PL7B PL7A VDD PL8D PL8A PL9D PL9A PL10D PL10A PL11D PL11A VSS PL12D PL12C PL12B PL12A VDD PL13D PL13C PL13B PL13A VSS PL14D PL14A PL15D PL15A PL16D PL16A PL17D VSS VDD PL1D PL1A PL2D PL3D VSS PL5D PL6D PL7D PL8D PL9A PL10D PL10B PL10A VDD PL11D PL11A PL12D PL12A PL13D PL13A PL14D PL14A VSS PL15D PL15C PL15B PL15A VDD PL16D PL16C PL16B PL16A VSS PL17D PL17A PL18D PL18A PL19D PL19A PL20D Function VSS VDD I/O I/O I/O I/O-A0 VSS I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O-A1 I/O-A2 I/O I/O I/O-A3 VDD I/O I/O I/O I/O-A4 I/O-A5 I/O I/O I/O-A6 VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O-A7 VDD I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O-A8 VSS I/O-A9 I/O I/O I/O-A10 I/O I/O I/O Notes: The OR2C/2T08A and OR2C/2T10A do not have bond pads connected to 240-pin SQFP package pin numbers 113 and 188. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. 86 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 24. OR2C/2T06A, OR2C/2T08A, OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, OR2C/2T15A/B, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2C/2T40A/B 240-Pin SQFP/SQFP2 Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T06A Pad 2C/2T08A Pad 2C/2T10A Pad 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 PL9A VDD PL10D PL10C PL10B PL10A PL11D PL11C PL11B PL11A VSS PL12D PL12C PL12B PL12A VSS CCLK VDD VSS VSS PB1A PB1B PB1C PB1D VSS PB2A PB2B PB2C PB2D PB3A PB3B PB3C PB3D VDD PB4A PB4B PB4C PB4D PB5A PB5B PB5C PB5D PL10A VDD PL11D PL11C PL11B PL11A PL12D PL12C PL12B PL12A VSS PL13D PL13A PL14D PL14A VSS CCLK VDD VSS VSS PB1A PB1D PB2A PB2D VSS PB3A PB3B PB3C PB3D PB4A PB4B PB4C PB4D VDD PB5A PB5B PB5C PB5D PB6A PB6B PB6C PB6D PL11A VDD PL12D PL12C PL12B PL13D PL13B PL13A PL14D PL14C VSS PL15D PL15A PL16D PL16A VSS CCLK VDD VSS VSS PB1A PB1D PB2A PB2D VSS PB3B PB4B PB4C PB4D PB5A PB5B PB5C PB5D VDD PB6A PB6B PB6C PB6D PB7A PB7B PB7C PB7D 2C/2T12A 2C/2T15A/B 2C/2T26A 2C/2T40A/B Pad Pad Pad Pad PL12A VDD PL13D PL13B PL14D PL14B PL14A PL15D PL15B PL16D VSS PL17D PL17A PL18C PL18A VSS CCLK VDD VSS VSS PB1A PB1D PB2A PB2D VSS PB3D PB4D PB5A PB5B PB5D PB6A PB6B PB6D VDD PB7A PB7B PB7C PB7D PB8A PB8B PB8C PB8D PL13A VDD PL14D PL14B PL15D PL15B PL15A PL16D PL16B PL17D VSS PL18D PL19D PL19A PL20A VSS CCLK VDD VSS VSS PB1A PB2A PB2D PB3D VSS PB4D PB5D PB6A PB6B PB6D PB7A PB7B PB7D VDD PB8A PB8B PB8C PB8D PB9A PB9B PB9C PB9D PL17A VDD PL18D PL18B PL19D PL19B PL19A PL20D PL20B PL21D VSS PL22D PL23D PL23A PL24A VSS CCLK VDD VSS VSS PB1A PB2A PB2D PB3D VSS PB4D PB5D PB6A PB6B PB6D PB7A PB7B PB7D VDD PB8A PB8D PB9A PB9D PB10A PB10D PB11A PB11D PL20A VDD PL21D PL21B PL22D PL22B PL22A PL23D PL24D PL25A VSS PL27D PL28D PL28A PL30A VSS CCLK VDD VSS VSS PB1A PB3A PB3D PB4D VSS PB5D PB6D PB7A PB7D PB8D PB9A PB9D PB10D VDD PB11A PB11D PB12A PB12D PB13A PB13D PB14A PB14D Function I/O-A11 VDD I/O-A12 I/O I/O I/O-A13 I/O I/O I/O I/O-A14 VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O-A15 VSS CCLK VDD VSS VSS I/O-A16 I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O VSS I/O-A17 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O VDD I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O Notes: The OR2C/2T08A and OR2C/2T10A do not have bond pads connected to 240-pin SQFP package pin numbers 113 and 188. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. Lucent Technologies Inc. 87 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 24. OR2C/2T06A, OR2C/2T08A, OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, OR2C/2T15A/B, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2C/2T40A/B 240-Pin SQFP/SQFP2 Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T06A Pad 2C/2T08A Pad 2C/2T10A Pad 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 VSS PB6A PB6B PB6C PB6D VSS PB7A PB7B PB7C PB7D VSS PB8A PB8B PB8C PB8D PB9A PB9B PB9C PB9D VDD PB10A PB10B PB10C PB10D PB11A PB11B PB11C PB11D VSS PB12A PB12B PB12C PB12D VSS DONE VDD VSS RESET PRGM PR12A PR12B PR12C VSS PB7A PB7B PB7C PB7D VSS PB8A PB8B PB8C PB8D VSS PB9A PB9B PB9C PB9D PB10A PB10B PB10C PB10D VDD PB11A PB11D PB12A PB12B PB12C PB12D PB13A PB13B See Note PB13D PB14A PB14B PB14D VSS DONE VDD VSS RESET PRGM PR14A PR14D PR13A VSS PB8A PB8B PB8C PB8D VSS PB9A PB9B PB9C PB9D VSS PB10A PB10B PB10C PB10D PB11A PB11B PB11C PB11D VDD PB12A PB13A PB13B PB13C PB13D PB14A PB15A PB15B See Note PB15D PB16A PB16B PB16D VSS DONE VDD VSS RESET PRGM PR16A PR16D PR15A 2C/2T12A 2C/2T15A/B 2C/2T26A 2C/2T40A/B Pad Pad Pad Pad VSS PB9A PB9B PB9C PB9D VSS PB10A PB10B PB10C PB10D VSS PB11A PB11B PB11C PB11D PB12A PB12B PB12C PB12D VDD PB13A PB13D PB14A PB14D PB15A PB15D PB16A PB16D VSS PB17A PB17D PB18A PB18D VSS DONE VDD VSS RESET PRGM PR18A PR18C PR18D VSS PB10A PB10B PB10C PB10D VSS PB11A PB11B PB11C PB11D VSS PB12A PB12B PB12C PB12D PB13A PB13B PB13C PB13D VDD PB14A PB14D PB15A PB15D PB16A PB16D PB17A PB17D VSS PB18A PB19A PB19D PB20D VSS DONE VDD VSS RESET PRGM PR20A PR20D PR19A VSS PB12A PB12B PB12C PB12D VSS PB13A PB13B PB13C PB13D VSS PB14A PB14D PB15A PB15D PB16A PB16D PB17A PB17D VDD PB18A PB18D PB19A PB19D PB20A PB20D PB21A PB21D VSS PB22A PB23A PB23D PB24D VSS DONE VDD VSS RESET PRGM PR24A PR24D PR23A VSS PB15A PB15B PB15C PB15D VSS PB16A PB16B PB16C PB16D VSS PB17A PB17D PB18A PB18D PB19A PB19D PB20A PB20D VDD PB21A PB22D PB23A PB24D PB25A PB25D PB26A PB26D VSS PB27A PB28A PB28D PB30D VSS DONE VDD VSS RESET PRGM PR30A PR29D PR28A Function VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O-HDC I/O I/O I/O VDD I/O-LDC I/O I/O I/O I/O-INIT I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O VSS DONE VDD VSS RESET PRGM I/O-M0 I/O I/O Notes: The OR2C/2T08A and OR2C/2T10A do not have bond pads connected to 240-pin SQFP package pin numbers 113 and 188. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. 88 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 24. OR2C/2T06A, OR2C/2T08A, OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, OR2C/2T15A/B, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2C/2T40A/B 240-Pin SQFP/SQFP2 Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T06A Pad 2C/2T08A Pad 2C/2T10A Pad 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 PR12D VSS PR11A PR11B PR11C PR11D PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D VDD PR9A PR9B PR9C PR9D PR8A PR8B PR8C PR8D VSS PR7A PR7B PR7C PR7D VDD PR6A PR6B PR6C PR6D VSS PR5A PR5B PR5C PR5D PR4A PR4B PR4C PR4D VDD PR3A PR3B PR3C PR13D VSS PR12A PR12B PR12C PR12D PR11A PR11B PR11C PR11D VDD PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D PR9A PR9B PR9C PR9D VSS PR8A PR8B PR8C PR8D VDD PR7A PR7B PR7C PR7D VSS PR6A PR6B PR6C PR6D PR5A PR5B PR5C PR5D VDD PR4A PR4B PR4C PR15D VSS PR14A PR14C PR14D PR13A PR13B PR13C PR12A PR12B VDD PR11A PR11B PR11C PR11D PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D VSS PR9A PR9B PR9C PR9D VDD PR8A PR8B PR8C PR8D VSS PR7A PR7B PR7C PR7D PR6A PR6B PR6C PR6D VDD PR5A PR4B PR4C 2C/2T12A 2C/2T15A/B 2C/2T26A 2C/2T40A/B Pad Pad Pad Pad PR17B VSS PR16A PR16D PR15A PR15C PR15D PR14A PR14D PR13A VDD PR12A PR12B PR12C PR12D PR11A PR11B PR11C PR11D VSS PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D VDD PR9A PR9B PR9C PR9D VSS PR8A PR8B PR8C PR8D PR7A PR7B PR7C PR7D VDD PR6A PR6B PR5B PR18A VSS PR17A PR17D PR16A PR16C PR16D PR15A PR15D PR14A VDD PR13A PR13B PR13C PR13D PR12A PR12B PR12C PR12D VSS PR11A PR11B PR11C PR11D VDD PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D VSS PR9A PR9B PR9C PR9D PR8A PR8B PR8C PR8D VDD PR7A PR7B PR6B PR22A VSS PR21A PR21D PR20A PR20C PR20D PR19A PR19D PR18A VDD PR17A PR17D PR16A PR16D PR15A PR15D PR14A PR14D VSS PR13A PR13B PR13C PR13D VDD PR12A PR12B PR12C PR12D VSS PR11A PR11D PR10A PR10D PR9A PR9D PR8A PR8D VDD PR7A PR7B PR6B PR27A VSS PR26A PR25A PR24A PR24D PR23D PR22A PR22D PR21A VDD PR20A PR20D PR19A PR19D PR18A PR18D PR17A PR17D VSS PR16A PR16B PR16C PR16D VDD PR15A PR15B PR15C PR15D VSS PR14A PR14D PR13A PR13D PR12A PR12D PR11A PR11D VDD PR10A PR10B PR9B Function I/O VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-M1 I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O VDD I/O-M2 I/O I/O I/O I/O-M3 I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O VDD I/O I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O-CS1 I/O I/O I/O VDD I/O-CS0 I/O I/O Notes: The OR2C/2T08A and OR2C/2T10A do not have bond pads connected to 240-pin SQFP package pin numbers 113 and 188. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. Lucent Technologies Inc. 89 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 24. OR2C/2T06A, OR2C/2T08A, OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, OR2C/2T15A/B, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2C/2T40A/B 240-Pin SQFP/SQFP2 Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T06A Pad 2C/2T08A Pad 2C/2T10A Pad 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 PR3D PR2A PR2B PR2C PR2D VSS PR1A PR1B PR1C PR1D VSS RD_CFGN VSS VDD VSS PT12D PT12C PT12B PT12A VSS PT11D PT11C PT11B PT11A PT10D PT10C PT10B PT10A VDD PT9D PT9C PT9B PT9A PT8D PT8C PT8B PT8A VSS PT7D PT7C PT7B PT7A PR4D PR3A PR3B PR3C PR3D VSS PR2A PR2D PR1A PR1D VSS RD_CFGN VSS VDD VSS PT14D PT14C PT14A PT13D See Note PT13B PT13A PT12D PT12C PT12A PT11D PT11C PT11B VDD PT10D PT10C PT10B PT10A PT9D PT9C PT9B PT9A VSS PT8D PT8C PT8B PT8A PR4D PR3A PR3B PR3C PR3D VSS PR2A PR2D PR1A PR1D VSS RD_CFGN VSS VDD VSS PT16D PT16C PT16A PT15D See Note PT15B PT15A PT14D PT13D PT13B PT13A PT12D PT12B VDD PT11D PT11C PT11B PT11A PT10D PT10C PT10B PT10A VSS PT9D PT9C PT9B PT9A 2C/2T12A 2C/2T15A/B 2C/2T26A 2C/2T40A/B Pad Pad Pad Pad PR5D PR4A PR4B PR4D PR3A VSS PR2A PR2C PR1A PR1D VSS RD_CFGN VSS VDD VSS PT18D PT18B PT18A PT17D VSS PT16D PT16C PT16A PT15D PT14D PT14A PT13D PT13B VDD PT12D PT12C PT12B PT12A PT11D PT11C PT11B PT11A VSS PT10D PT10C PT10B PT10A PR6D PR5A PR5B PR5D PR4A VSS PR3A PR2A PR1A PR1D VSS RD_CFGN VSS VDD VSS PT20D PT20A PT19D PT19A VSS PT17D PT17C PT17A PT16D PT15D PT15A PT14D PT14B VDD PT13D PT13C PT13B PT13A PT12D PT12C PT12B PT12A VSS PT11D PT11C PT11B PT11A PR6D PR5A PR5B PR5D PR4A VSS PR3A PR2A PR1A PR1D VSS RD_CFGN VSS VDD VSS PT24D PT24A PT23D PT23A VSS PT21D PT21C PT21A PT20D PT19D PT19A PT18D PT18B VDD PT17D PT17A PT16D PT16A PT15D PT15A PT14D PT14A VSS PT13D PT13C PT13B PT13A PR9D PR8A PR7A PR6A PR5A VSS PR4A PR3A PR2A PR1D VSS RD_CFGN VSS VDD VSS PT30D PT29A PT28D PT28A VSS PT26D PT26C PT26A PT25D PT24D PT23D PT22D PT21D VDD PT20D PT20A PT19D PT19A PT18D PT18A PT17D PT17A VSS PT16D PT16C PT16B PT16A Function I/O I/O-RD I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O-WR I/O I/O I/O VSS RD_CFGN VSS VDD VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O-RDY/RCLK VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O-D7 I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O-D6 VDD I/O I/O I/O I/O-D5 I/O I/O I/O I/O-D4 VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O-D3 Notes: The OR2C/2T08A and OR2C/2T10A do not have bond pads connected to 240-pin SQFP package pin numbers 113 and 188. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. 90 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 24. OR2C/2T06A, OR2C/2T08A, OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, OR2C/2T15A/B, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2C/2T40A/B 240-Pin SQFP/SQFP2 Pinout (continued) Pin 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 2C/2T06A Pad 2C/2T08A Pad 2C/2T10A Pad VSS PT6D PT6C PT6B PT6A VSS PT5D PT5C PT5B PT5A PT4D PT4C PT4B PT4A VDD PT3D PT3C PT3B PT3A PT2D PT2C PT2B PT2A VSS PT1D PT1C PT1B PT1A VSS RD_DATA/ TDO VSS PT7D PT7C PT7B PT7A VSS PT6D PT6C PT6B PT6A PT5D PT5C PT5B PT5A VDD PT4D PT4C PT4B PT4A PT3D PT3C PT3B PT3A VSS PT2D PT2A PT1D PT1A VSS RD_DATA/ TDO VSS PT8D PT8C PT8B PT8A VSS PT7D PT7C PT7B PT7A PT6D PT6C PT6B PT6A VDD PT5D PT5A PT4D PT4A PT3D PT3C PT3B PT3A VSS PT2D PT2A PT1D PT1A VSS RD_DATA/ TDO 2C/2T12A 2C/2T15A/B 2C/2T26A 2C/2T40A/B Pad Pad Pad Pad VSS PT9D PT9C PT9B PT9A VSS PT8D PT8C PT8B PT8A PT7D PT7C PT7B PT7A VDD PT6D PT6A PT5C PT5A PT4D PT4A PT3D PT3A VSS PT2C PT2A PT1D PT1A VSS RD_DATA/ TDO VSS PT10D PT10C PT10B PT10A VSS PT9D PT9C PT9B PT9A PT8D PT8C PT8B PT8A VDD PT7D PT7A PT6C PT6A PT5D PT5A PT4D PT4A VSS PT3A PT2A PT1D PT1A VSS RD_DATA/ TDO VSS PT12D PT12C PT12B PT12A VSS PT11D PT11A PT10D PT10A PT9D PT9A PT8D PT8A VDD PT7D PT7A PT6C PT6A PT5D PT5A PT4D PT4A VSS PT3A PT2A PT1D PT1A VSS RD_DATA/ TDO VSS PT15D PT15C PT15B PT15A VSS PT14D PT14A PT13D PT13A PT12D PT12A PT11D PT11A VDD PT10D PT9A PT8A PT7A PT6D PT6A PT5D PT5A VSS PT4A PT3A PT2D PT1A VSS RD_DATA/ TDO Function VSS I/O I/O I/O-V DD5 I/O-D2 VSS I/O-D1 I/O I/O I/O-D0/DIN I/O I/O I/O I/O-DOUT VDD I/O I/O I/O I/O-TDI I/O I/O I/O I/O-TMS VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O-TCK VSS RD_DATA/TDO Notes: The OR2C/2T08A and OR2C/2T10A do not have bond pads connected to 240-pin SQFP package pin numbers 113 and 188. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. Lucent Technologies Inc. 91 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 25. OR2C/2T06A, OR2C/2T08A, OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, and OR2C/2T15A/B 256-Pin PBGA Pinout Pin 2C/2T06A Pad 2C/2T08A Pad 2C/2T10A Pad 2C/2T12A Pad 2C/2T15A/B Pad Function C2 D2 D3 E4 C1 D1 E3 E2 E1 F3 G4 F2 F1 G3 G2 G1 H3 H2 H1 J4 J3 J2 J1 K2 K3 K1 L1 L2 L3 L4 M1 M2 M3 M4 N1 N2 N3 P1 P2 R1 PL1D PL1C PL1B PL1A — — — PL2D PL2C PL2B PL2A — PL3D PL3C PL3B PL3A PL4D PL4C PL4B PL4A PL5D PL5C PL5B PL5A PL6D PL6C PL6B PL6A PL7D PL7C PL7B PL7A PL8D PL8C PL8B PL8A PL9D PL9C PL9B PL9A PL1D PL1B PL1A PL2D PL2C PL2B PL2A PL3D PL3C PL3B PL3A — PL4D PL4C PL4B PL4A PL5D PL5C PL5B PL5A PL6D PL6C PL6B PL6A PL7D PL7C PL7B PL7A PL8D PL8C PL8B PL8A PL9D PL9C PL9B PL9A PL10D PL10C PL10B PL10A PL1D PL1B PL1A PL2D PL2C PL2B PL2A PL3D PL3C PL3B PL3A PL4D PL4A PL5C PL5B PL5A PL6D PL6C PL6B PL6A PL7D PL7C PL7B PL7A PL8D PL8C PL8B PL8A PL9D PL9C PL9B PL9A PL10D PL10C PL10B PL10A PL11D PL11C PL11B PL11A PL1D PL1C PL1B PL2D PL2C PL2B PL2A PL3D PL3A PL4D PL4A PL5D PL5A PL6D PL6B PL6A PL7D PL7C PL7B PL7A PL8D PL8C PL8B PL8A PL9D PL9C PL9B PL9A PL10D PL10C PL10B PL10A PL11D PL11C PL11B PL11A PL12D PL12C PL12B PL12A PL1D PL1C PL1B PL2D PL2A PL3D PL3A PL4D PL4A PL5D PL5A PL6D PL6A PL7D PL7B PL7A PL8D PL8C PL8B PL8A PL9D PL9C PL9B PL9A PL10D PL10C PL10B PL10A PL11D PL11C PL11B PL11A PL12D PL12C PL12B PL12A PL13D PL13C PL13B PL13A I/O I/O I/O I/O-A0 I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O-A1 I/O I/O-A2 I/O I/O I/O-A3 I/O I/O I/O I/O-A4 I/O-A5 I/O I/O I/O-A6 I/O I/O I/O I/O-A7 I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O-A8 I/O-A9 I/O I/O I/O-A10 I/O I/O I/O I/O-A11 Notes: The W3 pin on the 256-pin PBGA package is unconnected for all devices listed in this table. The OR2C/2T08A do not have bond pads connected to the 256-pin PBGA package pins F2 and Y17. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. The pins labeled VSS-ETC are the 4 x 4 array of thermal balls located at the center of the package. The balls can be attached to the ground plane of the board for enhanced thermal capability (see Table 29), or they can be left unconnected. 92 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 25. OR2C/2T06A, OR2C/2T08A, OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, and OR2C/2T15A/B 256-Pin PBGA Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T06A Pad 2C/2T08A Pad 2C/2T10A Pad 2C/2T12A Pad 2C/2T15A/B Pad Function P3 R2 T1 P4 R3 T2 U1 T3 U2 V1 T4 U3 V2 W1 V3 W2 Y1 Y2 W4 V4 U5 Y3 Y4 V5 W5 Y5 V6 U7 W6 Y6 V7 W7 Y7 V8 W8 Y8 U9 V9 W9 Y9 PL10D PL10C PL10B PL10A PL11D PL11C PL11B PL11A — PL12D PL12C PL12B — — — PL12A CCLK PB1A — PB1B PB1C PB1D — — PB2A PB2B PB2C PB2D PB3A PB3B PB3C PB3D PB4A PB4B PB4C PB4D PB5A PB5B PB5C PB5D PL11D PL11C PL11B PL11A PL12D PL12C PL12B PL12A PL13D PL13C PL13B PL13A PL14D PL14C PL14B PL14A CCLK PB1A PB1C PB1D PB2A PB2B PB2C PB2D PB3A PB3B PB3C PB3D PB4A PB4B PB4C PB4D PB5A PB5B PB5C PB5D PB6A PB6B PB6C PB6D PL12D PL12C PL12B PL13D PL13B PL13A PL14D PL14C PL15D PL15C PL15B PL15A PL16D PL16C PL16B PL16A CCLK PB1A PB1C PB1D PB2A PB2B PB2C PB2D PB3B PB4B PB4C PB4D PB5A PB5B PB5C PB5D PB6A PB6B PB6C PB6D PB7A PB7B PB7C PB7D PL13D PL13B PL14D PL14B PL14A PL15D PL15B PL16D PL17D PL17C PL17B PL17A PL18D PL18C PL18B PL18A CCLK PB1A PB1C PB1D PB2A PB2B PB2C PB2D PB3D PB4D PB5A PB5B PB5D PB6A PB6B PB6D PB7A PB7B PB7C PB7D PB8A PB8B PB8C PB8D PL14D PL14B PL15D PL15B PL15A PL16D PL16B PL17D PL18D PL18C PL18A PL19D PL19C PL19A PL20D PL20A CCLK PB1A PB1D PB2A PB2D PB3A PB3C PB3D PB4D PB5D PB6A PB6B PB6D PB7A PB7B PB7D PB8A PB8B PB8C PB8D PB9A PB9B PB9C PB9D I/O-A12 I/O I/O I/O-A13 I/O I/O I/O I/O-A14 I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-A15 CCLK I/O-A16 I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O-A17 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O Notes: The W3 pin on the 256-pin PBGA package is unconnected for all devices listed in this table. The OR2C/2T08A do not have bond pads connected to the 256-pin PBGA package pins F2 and Y17. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. The pins labeled VSS-ETC are the 4 x 4 array of thermal balls located at the center of the package. The balls can be attached to the ground plane of the board for enhanced thermal capability (see Table 29), or they can be left unconnected. Lucent Technologies Inc. 93 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 25. OR2C/2T06A, OR2C/2T08A, OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, and OR2C/2T15A/B 256-Pin PBGA Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T06A Pad 2C/2T08A Pad 2C/2T10A Pad 2C/2T12A Pad 2C/2T15A/B Pad Function W10 V10 Y10 Y11 W11 V11 U11 Y12 W12 V12 U12 Y13 W13 V13 Y14 W14 Y15 V14 W15 Y16 U14 V15 W16 Y17 V16 W17 Y18 U16 V17 W18 Y19 V18 W19 Y20 W20 V19 U19 U18 T17 V20 PB6A PB6B PB6C PB6D PB7A PB7B PB7C PB7D PB8A PB8B PB8C PB8D PB9A PB9B PB9C PB9D PB10A PB10B PB10C PB10D — — PB11A — — PB11B PB11C PB11D PB12A PB12B PB12C PB12D — DONE PB7A PB7B PB7C PB7D PB8A PB8B PB8C PB8D PB9A PB9B PB9C PB9D PB10A PB10B PB10C PB10D PB11A PB11B PB11C PB11D PB12A PB12B PB12C — PB12D PB13A PB13B PB13C PB13D PB14A PB14B PB14C PB14D DONE PB8A PB8B PB8C PB8D PB9A PB9B PB9C PB9D PB10A PB10B PB10C PB10D PB11A PB11B PB11C PB11D PB12A PB12C PB12D PB13A PB13B PB13C PB13D PB14A PB14B PB15A PB15B PB15C PB15D PB16A PB16B PB16C PB16D DONE PB9A PB9B PB9C PB9D PB10A PB10B PB10C PB10D PB11A PB11B PB11C PB11D PB12A PB12B PB12C PB12D PB13A PB13B PB13C PB13D PB14A PB14D PB15A PB15D PB16A PB16D PB17A PB17C PB17D PB18A PB18B PB18C PB18D DONE PB10A PB10B PB10C PB10D PB11A PB11B PB11C PB11D PB12A PB12B PB12C PB12D PB13A PB13B PB13C PB13D PB14A PB14B PB14C PB14D PB15A PB15D PB16A PB16D PB17A PB17D PB18A PB18D PB19A PB19D PB20A PB20B PB20D DONE I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O-HDC I/O I/O I/O I/O-LDC I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-INIT I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O DONE RESET PRGM RESET PRGM RESET PRGM RESET PRGM RESET PRGM RESET PRGM PR12A — — — PR14A PR14C PR14D PR13A PR16A PR16C PR16D PR15A PR18A PR18C PR18D PR17A PR20A PR20D PR19A PR19D I/O-M0 I/O I/O I/O Notes: The W3 pin on the 256-pin PBGA package is unconnected for all devices listed in this table. The OR2C/2T08A do not have bond pads connected to the 256-pin PBGA package pins F2 and Y17. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. The pins labeled VSS-ETC are the 4 x 4 array of thermal balls located at the center of the package. The balls can be attached to the ground plane of the board for enhanced thermal capability (see Table 29), or they can be left unconnected. 94 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 25. OR2C/2T06A, OR2C/2T08A, OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, and OR2C/2T15A/B 256-Pin PBGA Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T06A Pad 2C/2T08A Pad 2C/2T10A Pad 2C/2T12A Pad 2C/2T15A/B Pad Function U20 T18 T19 T20 R18 P17 R19 R20 P18 P19 P20 N18 N19 N20 M17 M18 M19 M20 L19 L18 L20 K20 K19 K18 K17 J20 J19 J18 J17 H20 H19 H18 G20 G19 F20 G18 F19 E20 G17 F18 PR12B PR12C PR12D PR11A PR11B PR11C PR11D PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D PR9A PR9B PR9C PR9D PR8A PR8B PR8C PR8D PR7A PR7B PR7C PR7D PR6A PR6B PR6C PR6D PR5A PR5B PR5C PR5D PR4A PR4B PR4C PR4D PR3A PR3B PR3C PR3D PR2A PR13B PR13C PR13D PR12A PR12B PR12C PR12D PR11A PR11B PR11C PR11D PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D PR9A PR9B PR9C PR9D PR8A PR8B PR8C PR8D PR7A PR7B PR7C PR7D PR6A PR6B PR6C PR6D PR5A PR5B PR5C PR5D PR4A PR4B PR4C PR4D PR3A PR15B PR15C PR15D PR14A PR14C PR14D PR13A PR13B PR13C PR12A PR12B PR11A PR11B PR11C PR11D PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D PR9A PR9B PR9C PR9D PR8A PR8B PR8C PR8D PR7A PR7B PR7C PR7D PR6A PR6B PR6C PR6D PR5A PR4B PR4C PR4D PR3A PR17B PR17C PR17D PR16A PR16D PR15A PR15C PR15D PR14A PR14D PR13A PR12A PR12B PR12C PR12D PR11A PR11B PR11C PR11D PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D PR9A PR9B PR9C PR9D PR8A PR8B PR8C PR8D PR7A PR7B PR7C PR7D PR6A PR6B PR5B PR5D PR4A PR18A PR18B PR18D PR17A PR17D PR16A PR16C PR16D PR15A PR15D PR14A PR13A PR13B PR13C PR13D PR12A PR12B PR12C PR12D PR11A PR11B PR11C PR11D PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D PR9A PR9B PR9C PR9D PR8A PR8B PR8C PR8D PR7A PR7B PR6B PR6D PR5A I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-M1 I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O-M2 I/O I/O I/O I/O-M3 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O-CS1 I/O I/O I/O I/O-CS0 I/O I/O I/O I/O-RD Notes: The W3 pin on the 256-pin PBGA package is unconnected for all devices listed in this table. The OR2C/2T08A do not have bond pads connected to the 256-pin PBGA package pins F2 and Y17. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. The pins labeled VSS-ETC are the 4 x 4 array of thermal balls located at the center of the package. The balls can be attached to the ground plane of the board for enhanced thermal capability (see Table 29), or they can be left unconnected. Lucent Technologies Inc. 95 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 25. OR2C/2T06A, OR2C/2T08A, OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, and OR2C/2T15A/B 256-Pin PBGA Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T06A Pad 2C/2T08A Pad 2C/2T10A Pad 2C/2T12A Pad 2C/2T15A/B Pad Function E19 D20 E18 D19 C20 E17 D18 C19 B20 C18 B19 A20 A19 B18 B17 C17 D16 A18 A17 C16 B16 A16 C15 D14 B15 A15 C14 B14 A14 C13 B13 A13 D12 C12 B12 A12 B11 C11 A11 A10 PR2B PR2C PR2D PR1A PR1B PR1C PR1D — — — — PR3B PR3C PR3D PR2A PR2B PR2C PR2D PR1A PR1B PR1C PR1D PR3B PR3C PR3D PR2A PR2B PR2C PR2D PR1A PR1B PR1C PR1D PR4B PR4D PR3A PR2A PR2B PR2C PR2D PR1A PR1B PR1C PR1D PR5B PR5D PR4A PR3A PR3B PR2A PR2D PR1A PR1B PR1C PR1D I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O-WR I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O RD_CFGN RD_CFGN RD_CFGN RD_CFGN RD_CFGN RD_CFGN — PT12D PT12C PT12B PT12A — PT11D PT11C PT11B PT11A — PT10D PT10C PT10B PT10A PT9D PT9C — PT9B PT9A PT8D PT8C PT8B PT8A PT7D PT7C PT7B PT7A PT14D PT14C PT14B PT14A PT13D PT13C PT13B PT13A PT12D PT12C PT12B PT12A PT11D PT11C PT11B PT11A PT10D PT10C PT10B PT10A PT9D PT9C PT9B PT9A PT8D PT8C PT8B PT8A PT16D PT16C PT16B PT16A PT15D PT15C PT15B PT15A PT14D PT13D PT13C PT13B PT13A PT12D PT12B PT12A PT11D PT11C PT11B PT11A PT10D PT10C PT10B PT10A PT9D PT9C PT9B PT9A PT18D PT18C PT18B PT18A PT17D PT17A PT16D PT16C PT16A PT15D PT15A PT14D PT14A PT13D PT13B PT13A PT12D PT12C PT12B PT12A PT11D PT11C PT11B PT11A PT10D PT10C PT10B PT10A PT20D PT20C PT20A PT19D PT19A PT18A PT17D PT17C PT17A PT16D PT16A PT15D PT15A PT14D PT14B PT14A PT13D PT13C PT13B PT13A PT12D PT12C PT12B PT12A PT11D PT11C PT11B PT11A I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-RDY/RCLK I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-D7 I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O-D6 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-D5 I/O I/O I/O I/O-D4 I/O I/O I/O I/O-D3 Notes: The W3 pin on the 256-pin PBGA package is unconnected for all devices listed in this table. The OR2C/2T08A do not have bond pads connected to the 256-pin PBGA package pins F2 and Y17. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. The pins labeled VSS-ETC are the 4 x 4 array of thermal balls located at the center of the package. The balls can be attached to the ground plane of the board for enhanced thermal capability (see Table 29), or they can be left unconnected. 96 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 25. OR2C/2T06A, OR2C/2T08A, OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, and OR2C/2T15A/B 256-Pin PBGA Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T06A Pad 2C/2T08A Pad 2C/2T10A Pad 2C/2T12A Pad 2C/2T15A/B Pad Function B10 C10 D10 A9 B9 C9 D9 A8 B8 C8 A7 B7 A6 C7 B6 A5 D7 C6 B5 A4 C5 B4 A3 D5 C4 B3 B2 A2 C3 A1 D4 D8 D13 D17 H4 H17 N4 N17 U4 PT6D PT6C PT6B PT6A PT5D PT5C PT5B PT5A PT4D PT4C PT4B PT4A PT3D PT3C PT3B PT3A PT2D PT2C PT2B PT2A — PT1D PT1C PT1B — — — PT1A RD_DATA/TDO VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS PT7D PT7C PT7B PT7A PT6D PT6C PT6B PT6A PT5D PT5C PT5B PT5A PT4D PT4C PT4B PT4A PT3D PT3C PT3B PT3A PT2D PT2C PT2B PT2A PT1D PT1C PT1B PT1A RD_DATA/TDO VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS PT8D PT8C PT8B PT8A PT7D PT7C PT7B PT7A PT6D PT6C PT6B PT6A PT5D PT5A PT4D PT4A PT3D PT3C PT3B PT3A PT2D PT2C PT2B PT2A PT1D PT1C PT1B PT1A RD_DATA/TDO VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS PT9D PT9C PT9B PT9A PT8D PT8C PT8B PT8A PT7D PT7C PT7B PT7A PT6D PT6A PT5C PT5A PT4D PT4A PT3D PT3A PT2D PT2C PT2B PT2A PT1D PT1C PT1B PT1A RD_DATA/TDO VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS PT10D PT10C PT10B PT10A PT9D PT9C PT9B PT9A PT8D PT8C PT8B PT8A PT7D PT7A PT6C PT6A PT5D PT5A PT4D PT4A PT3D PT3A PT2D PT2A PT1D PT1C PT1B PT1A RD_DATA/TDO VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O-D2 I/O-D1 I/O I/O I/O-D0/DIN I/O I/O I/O I/O-DOUT I/O I/O I/O I/O-TDI I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O-TMS I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-TCK RD_DATA/TDO VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS Notes: The W3 pin on the 256-pin PBGA package is unconnected for all devices listed in this table. The OR2C/2T08A do not have bond pads connected to the 256-pin PBGA package pins F2 and Y17. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. The pins labeled VSS-ETC are the 4 x 4 array of thermal balls located at the center of the package. The balls can be attached to the ground plane of the board for enhanced thermal capability (see Table 29), or they can be left unconnected. Lucent Technologies Inc. 97 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 25. OR2C/2T06A, OR2C/2T08A, OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, and OR2C/2T15A/B 256-Pin PBGA Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T06A Pad 2C/2T08A Pad 2C/2T10A Pad 2C/2T12A Pad 2C/2T15A/B Pad Function U8 U13 U17 B1 D6 D11 D15 F4 F17 K4 L17 R4 R17 U6 U10 U15 W3 J10 J11 J12 J9 K10 K11 K12 K9 L10 L11 L12 L9 M10 M11 M12 M9 VSS VSS VSS VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD — VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD — VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD — VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD — VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD — VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD No Connect VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC Notes: The W3 pin on the 256-pin PBGA package is unconnected for all devices listed in this table. The OR2C/2T08A do not have bond pads connected to the 256-pin PBGA package pins F2 and Y17. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. The pins labeled VSS-ETC are the 4 x 4 array of thermal balls located at the center of the package. The balls can be attached to the ground plane of the board for enhanced thermal capability (see Table 29), or they can be left unconnected. 98 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 26. OR2C12A, OR2C15A, OR2C26A, and OR2C40A 304-Pin SQFP/SQFP2 Pinout Pin 2C12A Pad 2C15A Pad 2C26A Pad 2C40A Pad Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 VSS VDD VSS PL1D PL1C PL1B PL1A PL2D PL2C PL2B PL2A VSS PL3D PL3A PL4D PL4A PL5D PL5C PL5B PL5A PL6D PL6C PL6B PL6A VDD PL7D PL7C PL7B PL7A PL8D PL8C PL8B PL8A VSS PL9D PL9C PL9B PL9A VDD PL10D PL10C PL10B PL10A VSS VSS VDD VSS PL1D PL1C PL1B PL1A PL2D PL2A PL3D PL3A VSS PL4D PL4A PL5D PL5A PL6D PL6C PL6B PL6A PL7D PL7C PL7B PL7A VDD PL8D PL8C PL8B PL8A PL9D PL9C PL9B PL9A VSS PL10D PL10C PL10B PL10A VDD PL11D PL11C PL11B PL11A VSS VSS VDD VSS PL1D PL1C PL1B PL1A PL2D PL2A PL3D PL3A VSS PL4D PL4A PL5D PL5A PL6D PL6C PL6B PL6A PL7D PL7C PL7B PL7A VDD PL8D PL8A PL9D PL9A PL10D PL10A PL11D PL11A VSS PL12D PL12C PL12B PL12A VDD PL13D PL13C PL13B PL13A VSS VSS VDD VSS PL1D PL1A PL2D PL2A PL3D PL3A PL4D PL4A VSS PL5D PL6D PL7D PL8D PL9D PL9C PL9B PL9A PL10D PL10C PL10B PL10A VDD PL11D PL11A PL12D PL12A PL13D PL13A PL14D PL14A VSS PL15D PL15C PL15B PL15A VDD PL16D PL16C PL16B PL16A VSS VSS VDD VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-A0 I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O-A1 I/O I/O I/O I/O-A2 I/O I/O I/O I/O-A3 VDD I/O I/O I/O I/O-A4 I/O-A5 I/O I/O I/O-A6 VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O-A7 VDD I/O I/O I/O I/O-A8 VSS Note: The OR2TxxA and OR2TxxB series are not offered in the 304-pin SQFP/SQFP2 packages. Lucent Technologies Inc. 99 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 26. OR2C12A, OR2C15A, OR2C26A, and OR2C40A 304-Pin SQFP/SQFP2 Pinout (continued) Pin 2C12A Pad 2C15A Pad 2C26A Pad 2C40A Pad Function 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 PL11D PL11C PL11B PL11A PL12D PL12C PL12B PL12A VDD PL13D PL13B PL13A PL14D PL14B PL14A PL15D PL15B PL15A PL16D PL16A VSS PL17D PL17C PL17B PL17A PL18D PL18C PL18B PL18A VSS CCLK VDD VSS VDD VSS PB1A PB1B PB1C PB1D PB2A PB2B PB2C PB2D VSS PB3A PL12D PL12C PL12B PL12A PL13D PL13C PL13B PL13A VDD PL14D PL14B PL14A PL15D PL15B PL15A PL16D PL16B PL16A PL17D PL17A VSS PL18D PL18C PL18A PL19D PL19C PL19A PL20D PL20A VSS CCLK VDD VSS VDD VSS PB1A PB1C PB1D PB2A PB2D PB3A PB3C PB3D VSS PB4A PL14D PL14A PL15D PL15A PL16D PL16A PL17D PL17A VDD PL18D PL18B PL18A PL19D PL19B PL19A PL20D PL20B PL20A PL21D PL21A VSS PL22D PL22C PL22A PL23D PL23C PL23A PL24D PL24A VSS CCLK VDD VSS VDD VSS PB1A PB1C PB1D PB2A PB2D PB3A PB3C PB3D VSS PB4A PL17D PL17A PL18D PL18A PL19D PL19A PL20D PL20A VDD PL21D PL21B PL21A PL22D PL22B PL22A PL23D PL24D PL25D PL25A PL26A VSS PL27D PL27C PL27A PL28D PL28C PL28A PL29A PL30A VSS CCLK VDD VSS VDD VSS PB1A PB2A PB2D PB3A PB3D PB4A PB4C PB4D VSS PB5A I/O-A9 I/O I/O I/O-A10 I/O I/O I/O I/O-A11 VDD I/O-A12 I/O I/O I/O I/O-A13 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-A14 I/O VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-A15 VSS CCLK VDD VSS VDD VSS I/O-A16 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O Note: The OR2TxxA and OR2TxxB series are not offered in the 304-pin SQFP/SQFP2 packages. 100 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 26. OR2C12A, OR2C15A, OR2C26A, and OR2C40A 304-Pin SQFP/SQFP2 Pinout (continued) Pin 2C12A Pad 2C15A Pad 2C26A Pad 2C40A Pad Function 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 PB3D PB4A PB4D PB5A PB5B PB5C PB5D PB6A PB6B PB6C PB6D VDD PB7A PB7B PB7C PB7D PB8A PB8B PB8C PB8D VSS PB9A PB9B PB9C PB9D VSS PB10A PB10B PB10C PB10D VSS PB11A PB11B PB11C PB11D PB12A PB12B PB12C PB12D VDD PB13A PB13B PB13C PB13D PB14A PB4D PB5A PB5D PB6A PB6B PB6C PB6D PB7A PB7B PB7C PB7D VDD PB8A PB8B PB8C PB8D PB9A PB9B PB9C PB9D VSS PB10A PB10B PB10C PB10D VSS PB11A PB11B PB11C PB11D VSS PB12A PB12B PB12C PB12D PB13A PB13B PB13C PB13D VDD PB14A PB14B PB14C PB14D PB15A PB4D PB5A PB5D PB6A PB6B PB6C PB6D PB7A PB7B PB7C PB7D VDD PB8A PB8D PB9A PB9D PB10A PB10D PB11A PB11D VSS PB12A PB12B PB12C PB12D VSS PB13A PB13B PB13C PB13D VSS PB14A PB14D PB15A PB15D PB16A PB16D PB17A PB17D VDD PB18A PB18B PB18C PB18D PB19A PB5D PB6A PB6D PB7A PB7D PB8A PB8D PB9A PB9D PB10A PB10D VDD PB11A PB11D PB12A PB12D PB13A PB13D PB14A PB14D VSS PB15A PB15B PB15C PB15D VSS PB16A PB16B PB16C PB16D VSS PB17A PB17D PB18A PB18D PB19A PB19D PB20A PB20D VDD PB21A PB21D PB22A PB22D PB23A I/O-A17 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O VDD I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-HDC I/O I/O I/O VDD I/O-LDC I/O I/O I/O I/O Note: The OR2TxxA and OR2TxxB series are not offered in the 304-pin SQFP/SQFP2 packages. Lucent Technologies Inc. 101 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 26. OR2C12A, OR2C15A, OR2C26A, and OR2C40A 304-Pin SQFP/SQFP2 Pinout (continued) Pin 2C12A Pad 2C15A Pad 2C26A Pad 2C40A Pad Function 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 PB14B PB14D PB15A PB15D PB16A PB16D VSS PB17A PB17B PB17C PB17D PB18A PB18B PB18C PB18D VSS DONE VDD VSS PB15B PB15D PB16A PB16D PB17A PB17D VSS PB18A PB18B PB18D PB19A PB19D PB20A PB20B PB20D VSS DONE VDD VSS PB19B PB19D PB20A PB20D PB21A PB21D VSS PB22A PB22B PB22D PB23A PB23D PB24A PB24B PB24D VSS DONE VDD VSS PB24A PB24D PB25A PB25D PB26A PB26D VSS PB27A PB27B PB27D PB28A PB28D PB29A PB29D PB30D VSS DONE VDD VSS I/O I/O I/O-INIT I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O VSS DONE VDD VSS RESET PRGM RESET PRGM RESET PRGM RESET PRGM RESET PRGM PR18A PR18B PR18C PR18D PR17A PR17B PR17C PR17D VSS PR16A PR16D PR15A PR15C PR15D PR14A PR14C PR14D PR13A PR13C PR13D VDD PR12A PR12B PR12C PR20A PR20C PR20D PR19A PR19D PR18A PR18B PR18D VSS PR17A PR17D PR16A PR16C PR16D PR15A PR15C PR15D PR14A PR14C PR14D VDD PR13A PR13B PR13C PR24A PR24C PR24D PR23A PR23D PR22A PR22B PR22D VSS PR21A PR21D PR20A PR20C PR20D PR19A PR19C PR19D PR18A PR18C PR18D VDD PR17A PR17D PR16A PR30A PR29A PR29D PR28A PR28D PR27A PR27B PR27D VSS PR26A PR25A PR24A PR24D PR23D PR22A PR22C PR22D PR21A PR21C PR21D VDD PR20A PR20D PR19A I/O-M0 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-M1 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O VDD I/O-M2 I/O I/O Note: The OR2TxxA and OR2TxxB series are not offered in the 304-pin SQFP/SQFP2 packages. 102 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 26. OR2C12A, OR2C15A, OR2C26A, and OR2C40A 304-Pin SQFP/SQFP2 Pinout (continued) Pin 2C12A Pad 2C15A Pad 2C26A Pad 2C40A Pad Function 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 PR12D PR11A PR11B PR11C PR11D VSS PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D VDD PR9A PR9B PR9C PR9D VSS PR8A PR8B PR8C PR8D PR7A PR7B PR7C PR7D VDD PR6A PR6B PR6C PR6D PR5A PR5B PR5C PR5D PR4A PR4B PR4D PR3A VSS PR2A PR2B PR2C PR2D PR1A PR1B PR1C PR13D PR12A PR12B PR12C PR12D VSS PR11A PR11B PR11C PR11D VDD PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D VSS PR9A PR9B PR9C PR9D PR8A PR8B PR8C PR8D VDD PR7A PR7B PR7C PR7D PR6A PR6B PR6C PR6D PR5A PR5B PR5D PR4A VSS PR3A PR3B PR2A PR2D PR1A PR1B PR1C PR16D PR15A PR15D PR14A PR14D VSS PR13A PR13B PR13C PR13D VDD PR12A PR12B PR12C PR12D VSS PR11A PR11D PR10A PR10D PR9A PR9D PR8A PR8D VDD PR7A PR7B PR7C PR7D PR6A PR6B PR6C PR6D PR5A PR5B PR5D PR4A VSS PR3A PR3B PR2A PR2D PR1A PR1B PR1C PR19D PR18A PR18D PR17A PR17D VSS PR16A PR16B PR16C PR16D VDD PR15A PR15B PR15C PR15D VSS PR14A PR14D PR13A PR13D PR12A PR12D PR11A PR11D VDD PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D PR9A PR9B PR9C PR9D PR8A PR7A PR6A PR5A VSS PR4A PR4B PR3A PR3D PR2A PR2D PR1A I/O I/O-M3 I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O VDD I/O I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-CS1 I/O I/O I/O VDD I/O-CS0 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-RD I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O-WR I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O Note: The OR2TxxA and OR2TxxB series are not offered in the 304-pin SQFP/SQFP2 packages. Lucent Technologies Inc. 103 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 26. OR2C12A, OR2C15A, OR2C26A, and OR2C40A 304-Pin SQFP/SQFP2 Pinout (continued) Pin 2C12A Pad 2C15A Pad 2C26A Pad 2C40A Pad Function 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 PR1D VSS PR1D VSS PR1D VSS PR1D VSS I/O VSS RD_CFGN RD_CFGN RD_CFGN RD_CFGN RD_CFGN VDD VSS VDD VSS PT18D PT18C PT18B PT18A PT17D PT17C PT17B PT17A VSS PT16D PT16C PT16A PT15D PT15A PT14D PT14A PT13D PT13C PT13B PT13A VDD PT12D PT12C PT12B PT12A PT11D PT11C PT11B PT11A VSS PT10D PT10C PT10B PT10A VSS PT9D PT9C PT9B VDD VSS VDD VSS PT20D PT20C PT20A PT19D PT19A PT18D PT18C PT18A VSS PT17D PT17C PT17A PT16D PT16A PT15D PT15A PT14D PT14C PT14B PT14A VDD PT13D PT13C PT13B PT13A PT12D PT12C PT12B PT12A VSS PT11D PT11C PT11B PT11A VSS PT10D PT10C PT10B VDD VSS VDD VSS PT24D PT24C PT24A PT23D PT23A PT22D PT22C PT22A VSS PT21D PT21C PT21A PT20D PT20A PT19D PT19A PT18D PT18C PT18B PT18A VDD PT17D PT17A PT16D PT16A PT15D PT15A PT14D PT14A VSS PT13D PT13C PT13B PT13A VSS PT12D PT12C PT12B VDD VSS VDD VSS PT30D PT30A PT29A PT28D PT28A PT27D PT27C PT27A VSS PT26D PT26C PT26A PT25D PT25A PT24D PT23D PT22D PT22A PT21D PT21A VDD PT20D PT20A PT19D PT19A PT18D PT18A PT17D PT17A VSS PT16D PT16C PT16B PT16A VSS PT15D PT15C PT15B VDD VSS VDD VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-RDY/RCLK I/O I/O I/O VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O-D7 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-D6 I/O VDD I/O I/O I/O I/O-D5 I/O I/O I/O I/O-D4 VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O-D3 VSS I/O I/O I/O Note: The OR2TxxA and OR2TxxB series are not offered in the 304-pin SQFP/SQFP2 packages. 104 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 26. OR2C12A, OR2C15A, OR2C26A, and OR2C40A 304-Pin SQFP/SQFP2 Pinout (continued) Pin 2C12A Pad 2C15A Pad 2C26A Pad 2C40A Pad Function 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 PT9A VSS PT8D PT8C PT8B PT8A PT7D PT7C PT7B PT7A VDD PT6D PT6C PT6B PT6A PT5D PT5C PT5B PT5A PT4D PT4A PT3D PT3A VSS PT2D PT2C PT2B PT2A PT1D PT1C PT1B PT1A VSS PT10A VSS PT9D PT9C PT9B PT9A PT8D PT8C PT8B PT8A VDD PT7D PT7C PT7B PT7A PT6D PT6C PT6B PT6A PT5D PT5A PT4D PT4A VSS PT3D PT3A PT2D PT2A PT1D PT1C PT1B PT1A VSS PT12A VSS PT11D PT11A PT10D PT10A PT9D PT9A PT8D PT8A VDD PT7D PT7C PT7B PT7A PT6D PT6C PT6B PT6A PT5D PT5A PT4D PT4A VSS PT3D PT3A PT2D PT2A PT1D PT1C PT1B PT1A VSS PT15A VSS PT14D PT14A PT13D PT13A PT12D PT12A PT11D PT11A VDD PT10D PT10A PT9D PT9A PT8D PT8A PT7D PT7A PT6D PT6A PT5D PT5A VSS PT4D PT4A PT3D PT3A PT2D PT2A PT1D PT1A VSS I/O-D2 VSS I/O-D1 I/O I/O I/O-D0/DIN I/O I/O I/O I/O-DOUT VDD I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-TDI I/O I/O I/O I/O-TMS VSS I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-TCK VSS RD_DATA/TDO RD_DATA/TDO RD_DATA/TDO RD_DATA/TDO RD_DATA/TDO VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD Note: The OR2TxxA and OR2TxxB series are not offered in the 304-pin SQFP/SQFP2 packages. Lucent Technologies Inc. 105 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 27. OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, OR2C/2T15A/B, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2T40A/B 352-Pin PBGA Pinout Pin 2C/2T10A Pad 2C/2T12A Pad B1 C2 C1 D2 D3 D1 E2 E4 E3 E1 F2 G4 F3 F1 G2 G1 G3 H2 J4 H1 H3 J2 J1 K2 J3 K1 K4 L2 K3 L1 M2 M1 L3 N2 M4 N1 M3 P2 PL1D PL1C PL1B PL1A PL2D PL2C PL2B — PL2A PL3D — PL3C — PL3B — — PL3A PL4D PL4C PL4B PL4A PL5D PL5C PL5B PL5A PL6D PL6C PL6B PL6A PL7D PL7C PL7B PL7A PL8D PL8C PL8B PL8A PL9D PL1D PL1C PL1B PL1A PL2D PL2C PL2B — PL2A PL3D PL3C PL3B PL3A PL4D PL4C PL4B PL4A PL5D PL5C PL5B PL5A PL6D PL6C PL6B PL6A PL7D PL7C PL7B PL7A PL8D PL8C PL8B PL8A PL9D PL9C PL9B PL9A PL10D 2C/2T15A/B Pad 2C/2T26A Pad OR2T40A/B Pad PL1D PL1C PL1B PL1A PL2D PL2A PL3D PL3B PL3A PL4D PL4C PL4B PL4A PL5D PL5C PL5B PL5A PL6D PL6C PL6B PL6A PL7D PL7C PL7B PL7A PL8D PL8C PL8B PL8A PL9D PL9C PL9B PL9A PL10D PL10C PL10B PL10A PL11D PL1D PL1C PL1B PL1A PL2D PL2A PL3D PL3B PL3A PL4D PL4C PL4B PL4A PL5D PL5C PL5B PL5A PL6D PL6C PL6B PL6A PL7D PL7C PL7B PL7A PL8D PL8A PL9D PL9A PL10D PL10A PL11D PL11A PL12D PL12C PL12B PL12A PL13D PL1D PL1A PL2D PL2A PL3D PL3A PL4D PL4B PL4A VDD5 PL5C PL5B PL6D PL7D PL7C PL7B PL8D PL9D PL9C PL9B PL9A PL10D PL10C PL10B PL10A PL11D PL11A PL12D PL12A PL13D PL13A PL14D PL14A PL15D PL15C PL15B PL15A PL16D Function I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-A0 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-A1 I/O I/O I/O I/O-A2 I/O I/O I/O I/O-A3 I/O I/O I/O I/O-A4 I/O-A5 I/O I/O I/O-A6 I/O I/O I/O I/O-A7 I/O Notes: The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. The pins labeled VSS-ETC are the 6 x 6 array of thermal balls located at the center of the package. The balls can be attached to the ground plane of the board for enhanced thermal capability (see Table 29), or they can be left unconnected. 106 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 27. OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, OR2C/2T15A/B, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2T40A/B 352-Pin PBGA Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T10A Pad 2C/2T12A Pad P4 P1 N3 R2 P3 R1 T2 R3 T1 R4 U2 T3 U1 U4 V2 U3 V1 W2 W1 V3 Y2 W4 Y1 W3 AA2 Y4 AA1 Y3 AB2 AB1 AA3 AC2 AB4 AC1 AB3 AD2 AC3 AD1 AF2 PL9C PL9B PL9A PL10D PL10C PL10B PL10A PL11D PL11C PL11B PL11A PL12D — PL12C — PL12B PL12A PL13D PL13C PL13B PL13A PL14D — PL14C PL14B PL14A — PL15D PL15C PL15B PL15A PL16D PL16C PL16B — — PL16A CCLK PB1A PL10C PL10B PL10A PL11D PL11C PL11B PL11A PL12D PL12C PL12B PL12A PL13D PL13C PL13B PL13A PL14D PL14C PL14B PL14A PL15D PL15C PL15B PL15A PL16D PL16C PL16B PL16A PL17D PL17C PL17B PL17A PL18D PL18C PL18B — — PL18A CCLK PB1A 2C/2T15A/B Pad 2C/2T26A Pad OR2T40A/B Pad PL11C PL11B PL11A PL12D PL12C PL12B PL12A PL13D PL13C PL13B PL13A PL14D PL14C PL14B PL14A PL15D PL15C PL15B PL15A PL16D PL16C PL16B PL16A PL17D PL17C PL17B PL17A PL18D PL18C PL18A PL19D PL19C PL19A PL20D PL20C PL20B PL20A CCLK PB1A PL13C PL13B PL13A PL14D PL14A PL15D PL15A PL16D PL16A PL17D PL17A PL18D PL18C PL18B PL18A PL19D PL19C PL19B PL19A PL20D PL20C PL20B PL20A PL21D PL21C PL21B PL21A PL22D PL22C PL22A PL23D PL23C PL23A PL24D PL24C PL24B PL24A CCLK PB1A VDD5 PL16B PL16A PL17D PL17A PL18D PL18A PL19D PL19A PL20D PL20A PL21D PL21C PL21B PL21A PL22D PL22C PL22B PL22A PL23D PL23C PL24D PL25D PL25A PL26C PL26B PL26A VDD5 PL27C PL27A PL28D PL28C PL28A PL29A PL30C PL30B PL30A PCCLK PB1A Function I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O-A8 I/O-A9 I/O I/O I/O-A10 I/O I/O I/O I/O-A11 I/O-A12 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-A13 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-A14 I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-A15 CCLK I/O-A16 Notes: The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. The pins labeled VSS-ETC are the 6 x 6 array of thermal balls located at the center of the package. The balls can be attached to the ground plane of the board for enhanced thermal capability (see Table 29), or they can be left unconnected. Lucent Technologies Inc. 107 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 27. OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, OR2C/2T15A/B, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2T40A/B 352-Pin PBGA Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T10A Pad 2C/2T12A Pad AE3 AF3 AE4 AD4 AF4 AE5 AC5 AD5 AF5 AE6 AC7 AD6 AF6 AE7 AF7 AD7 AE8 AC9 AF8 AD8 AE9 AF9 AE10 AD9 AF10 AC10 AE11 AD10 AF11 AE12 AF12 AD11 AE13 AC12 AF13 AD12 AE14 AC14 AF14 — PB1B PB1C PB1D PB2A — PB2B — PB2C PB2D PB3A PB3B — PB3C — PB3D PB4A PB4B PB4C PB4D PB5A PB5B PB5C PB5D PB6A PB6B PB6C PB6D PB7A PB7B PB7C PB7D PB8A PB8B PB8C PB8D PB9A PB9B PB9C — PB1B PB1C PB1D PB2A PB2B PB2C PB2D PB3A PB3B PB3C PB3D PB4A PB4B PB4C PB4D PB5A PB5B PB5C PB5D PB6A PB6B PB6C PB6D PB7A PB7B PB7C PB7D PB8A PB8B PB8C PB8D PB9A PB9B PB9C PB9D PB10A PB10B PB10C 2C/2T15A/B Pad 2C/2T26A Pad OR2T40A/B Pad PB1B PB1C PB1D PB2A PB2D PB3A PB3C PB3D PB4A PB4B PB4C PB4D PB5A PB5B PB5C PB5D PB6A PB6B PB6C PB6D PB7A PB7B PB7C PB7D PB8A PB8B PB8C PB8D PB9A PB9B PB9C PB9D PB10A PB10B PB10C PB10D PB11A PB11B PB11C PB1B PB1C PB1D PB2A PB2D PB3A PB3C PB3D PB4A PB4B PB4C PB4D PB5A PB5B PB5C PB5D PB6A PB6B PB6C PB6D PB7A PB7B PB7C PB7D PB8A PB8D PB9A PB9D PB10A PB10D PB11A PB11D PB12A PB12B PB12C PB12D PB13A PB13B PB13C PB1B PB2A PB2D PB3A VDD5 PB4A PB4C PB4D PB5A PB5B PB5C PB5D PB6A PB6B PB6C PB6D PB7A PB7D PB8A PB8D PB9A PB9D PB10A PB10D PB11A PB11D PB12A PB12D PB13A PB13D PB14A PB14D PB15A PB15B PB15C PB15D PB16A PB16B PB16C Function I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-A17 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O Notes: The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. The pins labeled VSS-ETC are the 6 x 6 array of thermal balls located at the center of the package. The balls can be attached to the ground plane of the board for enhanced thermal capability (see Table 29), or they can be left unconnected. 108 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 27. OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, OR2C/2T15A/B, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2T40A/B 352-Pin PBGA Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T10A Pad 2C/2T12A Pad AD13 AE15 AD14 AF15 AE16 AD15 AF16 AC15 AE17 AD16 AF17 AC17 AE18 AD17 AF18 AE19 AF19 AD18 AE20 AC19 AF20 AD19 AE21 AC20 AF21 AD20 AE22 AF22 AD21 AE23 AC22 AF23 AD22 AE24 AD23 AF24 AE26 AD25 AD26 PB9D PB10A PB10B PB10C PB10D PB11A PB11B PB11C PB11D PB12A PB12B PB12C PB12D PB13A PB13B — PB13C PB13D — PB14A — PB14B PB14C PB14D PB15A PB15B PB15C PB15D PB16A — PB16B PB16C PB16D — — DONE PB10D PB11A PB11B PB11C PB11D PB12A PB12B PB12C PB12D PB13A PB13B PB13C PB13D PB14A PB14B PB14C PB14D PB15A PB15B PB15C PB15D PB16A PB16B PB16C PB16D PB17A PB17B PB17C PB17D — PB18A PB18B PB18C — PB18D DONE PB11D PB12A PB12B PB12C PB12D PB13A PB13B PB13C PB13D PB14A PB14B PB14C PB14D PB15A PB15B PB15C PB15D PB16A PB16B PB16C PB16D PB17A PB17B PB17C PB17D PB18A PB18B PB18D PB19A PB19C PB19D PB20A PB20B PB20C PB20D DONE PB13D PB14A PB14D PB15A PB15D PB16A PB16D PB17A PB17D PB18A PB18B PB18C PB18D PB19A PB19B PB19C PB19D PB20A PB20B PB20C PB20D PB21A PB21B PB21C PB21D PB22A PB22B PB22D PB23A PB23B PB23D PB24A PB24B PB24C PB24D DONE RESET RESET RESET RESET PRGM PRGM PR18A PRGM PRGM PR24A PR16A 2C/2T15A/B Pad 2C/2T26A Pad OR2T40A/B Pad PR20A PB16D VDD5 PB17D PB18A PB18D PB19A PB19D PB20A PB20D PB21A PB21D PB22A PB22D PB23A PB24A PB24C PB24D PB25A PB25B PB25C PB25D VDD5 PB26B PB26C PB26D PB27A PB27B PB27D PB28A PB28B PB28D PB29A PB29D PB30C PB30D PDONE PRESETN PPRGMN PR30A Function I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O-HDC I/O I/O I/O I/O-LDC I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-INIT I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O DONE RESET PRGM I/O-M0 Notes: The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. The pins labeled VSS-ETC are the 6 x 6 array of thermal balls located at the center of the package. The balls can be attached to the ground plane of the board for enhanced thermal capability (see Table 29), or they can be left unconnected. Lucent Technologies Inc. 109 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 27. OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, OR2C/2T15A/B, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2T40A/B 352-Pin PBGA Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T10A Pad 2C/2T12A Pad AC25 AC24 AC26 AB25 AB23 AB24 AB26 AA25 Y23 AA24 AA26 Y25 Y26 Y24 W25 V23 W26 W24 V25 V26 U25 V24 U26 U23 T25 U24 T26 R25 R26 T24 P25 R23 P26 R24 N25 N23 N26 P24 M25 PR16B PR16C PR16D PR15A PR15B PR15C PR15D PR14A PR14B PR14C — PR14D — PR13A PR13B PR13C — PR13D PR12A PR12B — PR12C PR12D PR11A PR11B PR11C PR11D PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D PR9A PR9B PR9C PR9D PR8A PR8B PR8C PR8D PR18B PR18C PR18D PR17A PR17B PR17C PR17D PR16A PR16B PR16C PR16D PR15A PR15B PR15C PR15D PR14A PR14B PR14C PR14D PR13A PR13B PR13C PR13D PR12A PR12B PR12C PR12D PR11A PR11B PR11C PR11D PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D PR9A PR9B PR9C PR9D 2C/2T15A/B Pad 2C/2T26A Pad OR2T40A/B Pad PR20C PR20D PR19A PR19D PR18A PR18B PR18D PR17A PR17B PR17C PR17D PR16A PR16B PR16C PR16D PR15A PR15B PR15C PR15D PR14A PR14B PR14C PR14D PR13A PR13B PR13C PR13D PR12A PR12B PR12C PR12D PR11A PR11B PR11C PR11D PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D PR24C PR24D PR23A PR23D PR22A PR22B PR22D PR21A PR21B PR21C PR21D PR20A PR20B PR20C PR20D PR19A PR19B PR19C PR19D PR18A PR18B PR18C PR18D PR17A PR17D PR16A PR16D PR15A PR15D PR14A PR14D PR13A PR13B PR13C PR13D PR12A PR12B PR12C PR12D PR29A PR29D PR28A PR28D PR27A PR27B PR27D PR26A PR26B PR26C PR25A PR24A PR24B PR24D PR23D PR22A PR22B PR22C VDD5 PR21A PR21B PR21C PR21D PR20A PR20D PR19A PR19D PR18A PR18D PR17A PR17D PR16A PR16B PR16C PR16D PR15A PR15B PR15C PR15D Function I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-M1 I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-M2 I/O I/O I/O I/O-M3 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O Notes: The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. The pins labeled VSS-ETC are the 6 x 6 array of thermal balls located at the center of the package. The balls can be attached to the ground plane of the board for enhanced thermal capability (see Table 29), or they can be left unconnected. 110 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 27. OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, OR2C/2T15A/B, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2T40A/B 352-Pin PBGA Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T10A Pad 2C/2T12A Pad 2C/2T15A/B Pad 2C/2T26A Pad OR2T40A/B Pad Function N24 M26 L25 M24 L26 M23 K25 L24 K26 K23 J25 K24 J26 H25 H26 J24 G25 H23 G26 H24 F25 G23 F26 G24 E25 E26 F24 D25 E23 D26 E24 C25 D24 C26 A25 B24 A24 B23 C23 PR7A PR7B PR7C PR7D PR6A PR6B PR6C PR6D PR5A PR5B PR5C PR5D PR4A PR4B PR4C PR4D PR3A PR3B — PR3C PR3D — — — PR2A PR2B — PR2C PR2D PR1A PR1B PR1C PR1D PR8A PR8B PR8C PR8D PR7A PR7B PR7C PR7D PR6A PR6B PR6C PR6D PR5A PR5B PR5C PR5D PR4A PR4B PR4C PR4D PR3A PR3B PR3C PR3D PR2A PR2B — PR2C PR2D PR1A PR1B PR1C PR1D PR9A PR9B PR9C PR9D PR8A PR8B PR8C PR8D PR7A PR7B PR7C PR7D PR6A PR6B PR6C PR6D PR5A PR5B PR5C PR5D PR4A PR4B PR4C PR4D PR3A PR3B PR3D PR2A PR2D PR1A PR1B PR1C PR1D PR11A PR11D PR10A PR10D PR9A PR9D PR8A PR8D PR7A PR7B PR7C PR7D PR6A PR6B PR6C PR6D PR5A PR5B PR5C PR5D PR4A PR4B PR4C PR4D PR3A PR3B PR3D PR2A PR2D PR1A PR1B PR1C PR1D VDD5 PR14D PR13A PR13D PR12A PR12D PR11A PR11D PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D PR9A PR9B PR9C PR9D PR8A PR7A PR7C PR6A VDD5 PR5B PR5C PR5D PR4A PR4B PR4D PR3A PR3D PR2A PR2D PR1A PR1D I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O-CS1 I/O I/O I/O I/O-CS0 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-RD I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O-WR I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O RD_CFGN RD_CFGN RD_CFGN RD_CFGN RD_CFGN RD_CFGN PT16D PT16C — PT16B PT16A PT18D PT18C — PT18B PT18A PT20D PT20C PT20B PT20A PT19D PT24D PT24C PT24B PT24A PT23D PT30D PT30A PT29B PT29A PT28D I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O Notes: The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. The pins labeled VSS-ETC are the 6 x 6 array of thermal balls located at the center of the package. The balls can be attached to the ground plane of the board for enhanced thermal capability (see Table 29), or they can be left unconnected. Lucent Technologies Inc. 111 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 27. OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, OR2C/2T15A/B, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2T40A/B 352-Pin PBGA Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T10A Pad 2C/2T12A Pad 2C/2T15A/B Pad 2C/2T26A Pad OR2T40A/B Pad A23 PT15D PT17D PT19A PT23A PT28A B22 D22 C22 A22 B21 D20 C21 A21 B20 A20 C20 B19 D18 A19 C19 B18 A18 B17 C18 A17 D17 B16 C17 A16 B15 A15 C16 B14 D15 A14 C15 B13 D13 A13 C14 B12 C13 PT15C PT15B PT15A PT14D PT14C PT14B PT14A PT13D — PT13C — PT13B — PT13A — PT12D PT12C PT12B PT12A PT11D PT11C PT11B PT11A PT10D PT10C PT10B PT10A PT9D PT9C PT9B PT9A PT8D PT8C PT8B PT8A PT7D PT7C PT17C PT17B PT17A PT16D PT16C PT16B PT16A PT15D PT15C PT15B PT15A PT14D PT14C PT14B PT14A PT13D PT13C PT13B PT13A PT12D PT12C PT12B PT12A PT11D PT11C PT11B PT11A PT10D PT10C PT10B PT10A PT9D PT9C PT9B PT9A PT8D PT8C PT18D PT18C PT18A PT17D PT17C PT17B PT17A PT16D PT16C PT16B PT16A PT15D PT15C PT15B PT15A PT14D PT14C PT14B PT14A PT13D PT13C PT13B PT13A PT12D PT12C PT12B PT12A PT11D PT11C PT11B PT11A PT10D PT10C PT10B PT10A PT9D PT9C PT22D PT22C PT22A PT21D PT21C PT21B PT21A PT20D PT20C PT20B PT20A PT19D PT19C PT19B PT19A PT18D PT18C PT18B PT18A PT17D PT17A PT16D PT16A PT15D PT15A PT14D PT14A PT13D PT13C PT13B PT13A PT12D PT12C PT12B PT12A PT11D PT11A PT27D PT27C PT27A PT26D PT26C PT26B PT26A PT25D PT25C PT25B PT25A VDD5 PT24C PT24B PT23D PT22D PT22A PT21D PT21A PT20D PT20A PT19D PT19A PT18D PT18A PT17D PT17A PT16D PT16C PT16B PT16A PT15D PT15C VDD5 PT15A PT14D PT14A Function I/O-RDY/ RCLK I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-D7 I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-D6 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-D5 I/O I/O I/O I/O-D4 I/O I/O I/O I/O-D3 I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O-D2 I/O-D1 I/O Notes: The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. The pins labeled VSS-ETC are the 6 x 6 array of thermal balls located at the center of the package. The balls can be attached to the ground plane of the board for enhanced thermal capability (see Table 29), or they can be left unconnected. 112 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 27. OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, OR2C/2T15A/B, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2T40A/B 352-Pin PBGA Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T10A Pad 2C/2T12A Pad 2C/2T15A/B Pad 2C/2T26A Pad OR2T40A/B Pad A12 B11 C12 A11 D12 B10 C11 A10 D10 B9 C10 A9 B8 A8 C9 B7 D8 A7 C8 B6 D7 A6 C7 B5 A5 C6 B4 D5 A4 C5 B3 C4 A3 PT7B PT7A PT6D PT6C PT6B PT6A PT5D PT5C PT5B PT5A PT4D PT4C PT4B PT4A — PT3D — PT3C — PT3B — PT3A PT2D PT2C PT2B — — PT2A PT1D PT1C PT1B PT1A RD_DATA/TDO PT8B PT8A PT7D PT7C PT7B PT7A PT6D PT6C PT6B PT6A PT5D PT5C PT5B PT5A PT4D PT4C PT4B PT4A PT3D PT3C PT3B PT3A PT2D PT2C PT2B — — PT2A PT1D PT1C PT1B PT1A RD_DATA/TDO PT9B PT9A PT8D PT8C PT8B PT8A PT7D PT7C PT7B PT7A PT6D PT6C PT6B PT6A PT5D PT5C PT5B PT5A PT4D PT4C PT4B PT4A PT3D PT3A PT2D PT2C PT2B PT2A PT1D PT1C PT1B PT1A RD_DATA/TDO PT10D PT10A PT9D PT9A PT8D PT8A/ PT7D PT7C PT7B PT7A PT6D PT6C PT6B PT6A PT5D PT5C PT5B PT5A PT4D PT4C PT4B PT4A PT3D PT3A PT2D PT2C PT2B PT2A PT1D PT1C PT1B PT1A RD_DATA/TDO PT13D PT13A PT12D PT12A PT11D PT11A PT10D PT10A PT9D PT9A PT8D PT8A PT7D PT7A PT6D PT6C PT6B VDD5 PT5D PT5C PT5B PT5A PT4D PT4A PT3D PT3C PT3B PT3A PT2D PT2A PT1D PT1A RD_DATA/TDO A1 A2 A26 AC13 AC18 AC23 VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS Function I/O I/O-D0/DIN I/O I/O I/O I/O-DOUT I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-TDI I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O-TMS I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-TCK RD_DATA/ TDO VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS Notes: The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. The pins labeled VSS-ETC are the 6 x 6 array of thermal balls located at the center of the package. The balls can be attached to the ground plane of the board for enhanced thermal capability (see Table 29), or they can be left unconnected. Lucent Technologies Inc. 113 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 27. OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, OR2C/2T15A/B, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2T40A/B 352-Pin PBGA Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T10A Pad 2C/2T12A Pad AC4 AC8 AD24 AD3 AE1 AE2 AE25 AF1 AF25 AF26 B2 B25 B26 C24 C3 D14 D19 D23 D4 D9 H4 J23 N4 P23 V4 W23 AA23 AA4 AC11 AC16 AC21 AC6 D11 D16 D21 D6 F23 F4 L23 VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD 2C/2T15A/B Pad 2C/2T26A Pad OR2T40A/B Pad VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD Function VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD Notes: The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. The pins labeled VSS-ETC are the 6 x 6 array of thermal balls located at the center of the package. The balls can be attached to the ground plane of the board for enhanced thermal capability (see Table 29), or they can be left unconnected. 114 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 27. OR2C/2T10A, OR2C/2T12A, OR2C/2T15A/B, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2T40A/B 352-Pin PBGA Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T10A Pad 2C/2T12A Pad L4 T23 T4 L11 L12 L13 L14 L15 L16 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16 VDD VDD VDD VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VDD VDD VDD VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS 2C/2T15A/B Pad 2C/2T26A Pad OR2T40A/B Pad VDD VDD VDD VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VDD VDD VDD VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VDD VDD VDD VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS Function VDD VDD VDD VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC VSS—ETC Notes: The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. The pins labeled VSS-ETC are the 6 x 6 array of thermal balls located at the center of the package. The balls can be attached to the ground plane of the board for enhanced thermal capability (see Table 29), or they can be left unconnected. Lucent Technologies Inc. 115 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 28. OR2C/2T15A, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2C/2T40A/B 432-Pin EBGA Pinout Pin 2C/2T15A Pad 2C/2T26A Pad 2C/2T40A/B Pad Function E28 D29 D30 D31 F28 E29 E30 E31 F29 F30 F31 H28 G29 G30 G31 J28 H29 H30 J29 K28 J30 J31 K29 K30 K31 L29 M28 L30 L31 M29 N28 M30 N29 N30 P28 N31 P29 P30 P31 R29 R30 R31 T29 PL1D PL1C PL1B PL1A PL2D PL2C PL2B PL2A PL3D PL3C PL3B PL3A PL4D PL4C PL4B PL4A PL5D PL5C PL5B PL5A PL6D PL6C PL6B PL6A PL7D PL7C PL7B PL7A — PL8D PL8C PL8B — PL8A PL9D — PL9C PL9B PL9A PL10D PL10C PL10B PL10A PL1D PL1C PL1B PL1A PL2D PL2C PL2B PL2A PL3D PL3C PL3B PL3A PL4D PL4C PL4B PL4A PL5D PL5C PL5B PL5A PL6D PL6C PL6B PL6A PL7D PL7C PL7B PL7A PL8D PL8C PL8A PL9D PL9C PL9A PL10D PL10C PL10A PL11D PL11A PL12D PL12C PL12B PL12A PL1D PL1A PL2D PL2A PL3D PL3C PL3B PL3A PL4D PL4C PL4B PL4A PL5D PL5C PL5B PL6D PL7D PL7C PL7B PL8D PL9D PL9C PL9B PL9A PL10D PL10C PL10B PL10A PL11D PL11C PL11A PL12D PL12C PL12A PL13D PL13C PL13A PL14D PL14A PL15D PL15C PL15B PL15A I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-A0 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-A1 I/O I/O I/O I/O-A2 I/O I/O I/O I/O-A3 I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-A4 I/O-A5 I/O I/O I/O I/O-A6 I/O I/O I/O I/O-A7 Notes: The OR2T15A pin AG2 is not connected in the 432-pin EBGA package. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. 116 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 28. OR2C/2T15A, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2C/2T40A/B 432-Pin EBGA Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T15A Pad 2C/2T26A Pad 2C/2T40A/B Pad Function T28 T30 U31 U30 U29 V31 V30 V29 W31 V28 W30 W29 Y30 W28 Y29 AA31 AA30 Y28 AA29 AB31 AB30 AB29 AC31 AC30 AB28 AC29 AD30 AD29 AC28 AE31 AE30 AE29 AD28 AF31 AF30 AF29 AG31 AG30 AG29 AF28 AH31 AH30 AH29 AG28 PL11D PL11C PL11B PL11A PL12D — PL12C PL12B — PL12A PL13D — PL13C PL13B PL13A PL14D PL14C PL14B PL14A PL15D PL15C PL15B PL15A PL16D PL16C PL16B PL16A PL17D PL17C PL17B PL17A PL18D PL18C PL18B PL18A PL19D PL19C PL19B PL19A PL20D PL20C PL20B PL20A CCLK PL13D PL13C PL13B PL13A PL14D PL14C PL14A PL15D PL15C PL15A PL16D PL16C PL16A PL17D PL17A PL18D PL18C PL18B PL18A PL19D PL19C PL19B PL19A PL20D PL20C PL20B PL20A PL21D PL21C PL21B PL21A PL22D PL22C PL22B PL22A PL23D PL23C PL23B PL23A PL24D PL24C PL24B PL24A CCLK PL16D PL16C PL16B PL16A PL17D PL17C PL17A PL18D PL18C PL18A PL19D PL19C PL19A PL20D PL20A PL21D PL21C PL21B PL21A PL22D PL22C PL22B PL22A PL23D PL23C PL24D PL25D PL25A PL26C PL26B PL26A PL27D PL27C PL27B PL27A PL28D PL28C PL28B PL28A PL29A PL30C PL30B PL30A CCLK I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O-A8 I/O-A9 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-A10 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-A11 I/O-A12 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-A13 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-A14 I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-A15 CCLK Notes: The OR2T15A pin AG2 is not connected in the 432-pin EBGA package. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. Lucent Technologies Inc. 117 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 28. OR2C/2T15A, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2C/2T40A/B 432-Pin EBGA Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T15A Pad 2C/2T26A Pad 2C/2T40A/B Pad Function AH27 AJ28 AK28 AL28 AH26 AJ27 AK27 AL27 AJ26 AK26 AL26 AH24 AJ25 AK25 AL25 AH23 AJ24 AK24 AJ23 AH22 AK23 AL23 AJ22 AK22 AL22 AJ21 AH20 AK21 AL21 AJ20 AH19 AK20 AJ19 AK19 AH18 AL19 AJ18 AK18 AL18 AJ17 AK17 AL17 AJ16 AH16 PB1A PB1B PB1C PB1D PB2A PB2B PB2C PB2D PB3A PB3B PB3C PB3D PB4A PB4B PB4C PB4D PB5A PB5B PB5C PB5D PB6A PB6B PB6C PB6D PB7A PB7B PB7C PB7D — PB8A PB8B PB8C — PB8D PB9A PB9B PB9C — PB9D PB10A PB10B PB10C PB10D PB11A PB1A PB1B PB1C PB1D PB2A PB2B PB2C PB2D PB3A PB3B PB3C PB3D PB4A PB4B PB4C PB4D PB5A PB5B PB5C PB5D PB6A PB6B PB6C PB6D PB7A PB7B PB7C PB7D PB8A PB8B PB8D PB9A PB9B PB9D PB10A PB10D PB11A PB11B PB11D PB12A PB12B PB12C PB12D PB13A PB1A PB1B PB2A PB2D PB3A PB3B PB3C PB3D PB4A PB4B PB4C PB4D PB5A PB5B PB5C PB5D PB6A PB6B PB6C PB6D PB7A PB7D PB8A PB8D PB9A PB9D PB10A PB10D PB11A PB11B PB11D PB12A PB12B PB12D PB13A PB13D PB14A PB14B PB14D PB15A PB15B PB15C PB15D PB16A I/O-A16 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-A17 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O Notes: The OR2T15A pin AG2 is not connected in the 432-pin EBGA package. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. 118 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 28. OR2C/2T15A, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2C/2T40A/B 432-Pin EBGA Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T15A Pad 2C/2T26A Pad 2C/2T40A/B Pad Function AK16 AL15 AK15 AJ15 AL14 AK14 AJ14 AL13 AH14 AK13 AJ13 AK12 AH13 AJ12 AL11 AK11 AH12 AJ11 AL10 AK10 AJ10 AL9 AK9 AH10 AJ9 AK8 AJ8 AH9 AL7 AK7 AJ7 AH8 AL6 AK6 AJ6 AL5 AK5 AJ5 AH6 AL4 AK4 AJ4 AH5 AG4 PB11B PB11C PB11D PB12A PB12B PB12C — PB12D PB13A — PB13B PB13C — PB13D PB14A PB14B PB14C PB14D PB15A PB15B PB15C PB15D PB16A PB16B PB16C PB16D PB17A PB17B PB17C PB17D PB18A PB18B PB18C PB18D PB19A PB19B PB19C PB19D PB20A PB20B PB20C PB20D DONE PB13B PB13C PB13D PB14A PB14D PB15A PB15B PB15D PB16A PB16B PB16D PB17A PB17B PB17D PB18A PB18B PB18C PB18D PB19A PB19B PB19C PB19D PB20A PB20B PB20C PB20D PB21A PB21B PB21C PB21D PB22A PB22B PB22C PB22D PB23A PB23B PB23C PB23D PB24A PB24B PB24C PB24D DONE PB16B PB16C PB16D PB17A PB17D PB18A PB18B PB18D PB19A PB19B PB19D PB20A PB20B PB20D PB21A PB21D PB22A PB22D PB23A PB24A PB24C PB24D PB25A PB25B PB25C PB25D PB26A PB26B PB26C PB26D PB27A PB27B PB27C PB27D PB28A PB28B PB28C PB28D PB29A PB29D PB30C PB30D DONE I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-HDC I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-LDC I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-INIT I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O DONE RESET RESET RESET RESET Notes: The OR2T15A pin AG2 is not connected in the 432-pin EBGA package. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. Lucent Technologies Inc. 119 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 28. OR2C/2T15A, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2C/2T40A/B 432-Pin EBGA Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T15A Pad 2C/2T26A Pad 2C/2T40A/B Pad Function AH3 AH2 AH1 AF4 AG3 AG2 AG1 AF3 AF2 AF1 AD4 AE3 AE2 AE1 AC4 AD3 AD2 AC3 AB4 AC2 AC1 AB3 AB2 AB1 AA3 Y4 AA2 AA1 Y3 W4 Y2 W3 W2 V4 W1 V3 V2 V1 U3 U2 U1 T3 T4 T2 PRGM PRGM PRGM PRGM PR20A PR20B PR20C PR20D PR19A PR19B PR19C PR19D PR18A PR18B PR18C PR18D PR17A PR17B PR17C PR17D PR16A PR16B PR16C PR16D PR15A PR15B PR15C PR15D PR14A PR14B PR14C PR14D PR13A PR13B PR13C PR13D — PR12A — PR12B PR12C PR12D PR11A PR11B PR11C PR11D PR10A PR24A PR24B PR24C PR24D PR23A PR23B PR23C PR23D PR22A PR22B PR22C PR22D PR21A PR21B PR21C PR21D PR20A PR20B PR20C PR20D PR19A PR19B PR19C PR19D PR18A PR18B PR18C PR18D PR17A PR17D PR16A PR16B PR16D PR15A PR15D PR14A PR14B PR14D PR13A PR13B PR13C PR13D PR12A PR30A PR30B PR29A PR29D PR28A PR28B PR28C PR28D PR27A PR27B PR27C PR27D PR26A PR26B PR26C PR25A PR24A PR24B PR24D PR23D PR22A PR22B PR22C PR22D PR21A PR21B PR21C PR21D PR20A PR20D PR19A PR19B PR19D PR18A PR18D PR17A PR17B PR17D PR16A PR16B PR16C PR16D PR15A I/O-M0 I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-M1 I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-M2 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-M3 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O Notes: The OR2T15A pin AG2 is not connected in the 432-pin EBGA package. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. 120 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 28. OR2C/2T15A, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2C/2T40A/B 432-Pin EBGA Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T15A Pad 2C/2T26A Pad 2C/2T40A/B Pad Function R1 R2 R3 P1 P2 P3 N1 P4 N2 N3 M2 N4 M3 L1 L2 M4 L3 K1 K2 K3 J1 J2 K4 J3 H2 H3 J4 G1 G2 G3 H4 F1 F2 F3 E1 E2 E3 F4 D1 D2 D3 E4 D5 C4 PR10B PR10C PR10D PR9A PR9B PR9C — PR9D — PR8A PR8B PR8C PR8D PR7A PR7B PR7C PR7D PR6A PR6B PR6C PR6D PR5A PR5B PR5C PR5D PR4A PR4B PR4C PR4D PR3A PR3B PR3C PR3D PR2A PR2B PR2C PR2D PR1A PR1B PR1C PR1D PR12B PR12C PR12D PR11A PR11C PR11D PR10A PR10C PR10D PR9A PR9D PR8A PR8D PR7A PR7B PR7C PR7D PR6A PR6B PR6C PR6D PR5A PR5B PR5C PR5D PR4A PR4B PR4C PR4D PR3A PR3B PR3C PR3D PR2A PR2B PR2C PR2D PR1A PR1B PR1C PR1D PR15B PR15C PR15D PR14A PR14C PR14D PR13A PR13C PR13D PR12A PR12D PR11A PR11D PR10A PR10B PR10C PR10D PR9A PR9B PR9C PR9D PR8A PR7A PR7C PR6A PR5A PR5B PR5C PR5D PR4A PR4B PR4C PR4D PR3A PR3B PR3C PR3D PR2A PR2D PR1A PR1D I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-CS1 I/O I/O I/O I/O-CS0 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-RD I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O-WR I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O RD_CFGN RD_CFGN RD_CFGN RD_CFGN PT20D PT20C PT24D PT24C PT30D PT30A I/O I/O Notes: The OR2T15A pin AG2 is not connected in the 432-pin EBGA package. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. Lucent Technologies Inc. 121 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 28. OR2C/2T15A, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2C/2T40A/B 432-Pin EBGA Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T15A Pad 2C/2T26A Pad 2C/2T40A/B Pad Function B4 A4 D6 C5 B5 A5 C6 B6 A6 D8 C7 B7 A7 D9 C8 B8 C9 D10 B9 A9 C10 B10 A10 C11 D12 B11 A11 C12 D13 B12 C13 B13 D14 A13 C14 B14 A14 C15 B15 A15 C16 D16 B16 A17 PT20B PT20A PT19D PT19C PT19B PT19A PT18D PT18C PT18B PT18A PT17D PT17C PT17B PT17A PT16D PT16C PT16B PT16A PT15D PT15C PT15B PT15A PT14D PT14C PT14B PT14A PT13D PT13C — PT13B PT13A PT12D — PT12C PT12B — PT12A PT11D PT11C PT11B PT11A PT10D PT10C PT10B PT24B PT24A PT23D PT23C PT23B PT23A PT22D PT22C PT22B PT22A PT21D PT21C PT21B PT21A PT20D PT20C PT20B PT20A PT19D PT19C PT19B PT19A PT18D PT18C PT18B PT18A PT17D PT17A PT16D PT16B PT16A PT15D PT15B PT15A PT14D PT14B PT14A PT13D PT13C PT13B PT13A PT12D PT12C PT12B PT29B PT29A PT28D PT28C PT28B PT28A PT27D PT27C PT27B PT27A PT26D PT26C PT26B PT26A PT25D PT25C PT25B PT25A PT24D PT24C PT24B PT23D PT22D PT22A PT21D PT21A PT20D PT20A PT19D PT19B PT19A PT18D PT18B PT18A PT17D PT17B PT17A PT16D PT16C PT16B PT16A PT15D PT15C PT15B I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-RDY/RCLK I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-D7 I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-D6 I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O-D5 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-D4 I/O I/O I/O I/O-D3 I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 Notes: The OR2T15A pin AG2 is not connected in the 432-pin EBGA package. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. 122 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 28. OR2C/2T15A, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2C/2T40A/B 432-Pin EBGA Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T15A Pad 2C/2T26A Pad 2C/2T40A/B Pad Function B17 C17 A18 B18 C18 A19 D18 B19 C19 B20 D19 C20 A21 B21 D20 C21 A22 B22 C22 A23 B23 D22 C23 B24 C24 D23 A25 B25 C25 D24 A26 B26 C26 A27 B27 C27 D26 A28 B28 C28 D27 A12 A16 A2 PT10A PT9D — PT9C PT9B — PT9A PT8D — PT8C PT8B PT8A PT7D PT7C PT7B PT7A PT6D PT6C PT6B PT6A PT5D PT5C PT5B PT5A PT4D PT4C PT4B PT4A PT3D PT3C PT3B PT3A PT2D PT2C PT2B PT2A PT1D PT1C PT1B PT1A RD_DATA/TDO VSS VSS VSS PT12A PT11D PT11C PT11A PT10D PT10C PT10A PT9D PT9C PT9A PT8D PT8A PT7D PT7C PT7B PT7A PT6D PT6C PT6B PT6A PT5D PT5C PT5B PT5A PT4D PT4C PT4B PT4A PT3D PT3C PT3B PT3A PT2D PT2C PT2B PT2A PT1D PT1C PT1B PT1A RD_DATA/TDO VSS VSS VSS PT15A PT14D PT14C PT14A PT13D PT13C PT13A PT12D PT12C PT12A PT11D PT11A PT10D PT10A PT9D PT9A PT8D PT8A PT7D PT7A PT6D PT6C PT6B PT6A PT5D PT5C PT5B PT5A PT4D PT4C PT4B PT4A PT3D PT3C PT3B PT3A PT2D PT2A PT1D PT1A RD_DATA/TDO VSS VSS VSS I/O-D2 D1 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-D0/DIN I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-DOUT I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-TDI I/O I/O I/O I/O-VDD5 I/O I/O I/O I/O-TMS I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O-TCK RD_DATA/TDO VSS VSS VSS Notes: The OR2T15A pin AG2 is not connected in the 432-pin EBGA package. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. Lucent Technologies Inc. 123 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 28. OR2C/2T15A, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2C/2T40A/B 432-Pin EBGA Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T15A Pad 2C/2T26A Pad 2C/2T40A/B Pad Function A20 A24 A29 A3 A30 A8 AD1 AD31 AJ1 AJ2 AJ30 AJ31 AK1 AK29 AK3 AK31 AL12 AL16 AL2 AL20 AL24 AL29 AL3 AL30 AL8 B1 B29 B3 B31 C1 C2 C30 C31 H1 H31 M1 M31 T1 T31 Y1 Y31 A1 A31 VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VDD VDD VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VDD VDD VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VDD VDD VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VDD VDD Notes: The OR2T15A pin AG2 is not connected in the 432-pin EBGA package. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. 124 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Pin Information (continued) Table 28. OR2C/2T15A, OR2C/2T26A, and OR2C/2T40A/B 432-Pin EBGA Pinout (continued) Pin 2C/2T15A Pad 2C/2T26A Pad 2C/2T40A/B Pad Function AA28 AA4 AE28 AE4 AH11 AH15 AH17 AH21 AH25 AH28 AH4 AH7 AJ29 AJ3 AK2 AK30 AL1 AL31 B2 B30 C29 C3 D11 D15 D17 D21 D25 D28 D4 D7 G28 G4 L28 L4 R28 R4 U28 U4 VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD VDD Notes: The OR2T15A pin AG2 is not connected in the 432-pin EBGA package. The pins labeled I/O-VDD5 are user I/Os for the OR2CxxA and OR2TxxB series, but they are connected to VDD5 for the OR2TxxA series. Lucent Technologies Inc. 125 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Package Thermal Characteristics There are three thermal parameters that are in common use: ΘJA, ψJC, and ΘJC. It should be noted that all the parameters are affected, to varying degrees, by package design (including paddle size) and choice of materials, the amount of copper in the test board or system board, and system airflow. The data base containing the thermal values for all of Lucent Technologies’ IC packages is currently being updated to conform to modern JEDEC standards. Thus, Table 29 contains the currently available thermal specifications for Lucent Technologies’ FPGA packages mounted on both JEDEC and non-JEDEC test boards. The thermal values for the newer package types correspond to those packages mounted on a JEDEC four-layer board (indicated as Note 2 in the table). The values for the older packages, however, correspond to those packages mounted on a non-JEDEC, single-layer, sparse copper board (see Note 1). It should also be noted that the values for the older packages are considered conservative. ΘJA This is the thermal resistance from junction to ambient (a.k.a. theta-JA, R-theta, etc.). TJ – TA Q is operating in the system. It is not considered a true thermal resistance, and it is defined by: J – TC ψ JC = T -------------------Q where TC is the case temperature at top dead center, TJ is the junction temperature, and Q is the chip power. During the ΘJA measurements described above, besides the other parameters measured, an additional temperature reading, TC, is made with a thermocouple attached at top-dead-center of the case. ψJC is also expressed in units of °C/watt. ΘJC This is the thermal resistance from junction to case. It is most often used when attaching a heat sink to the top of the package. It is defined by: TJ – TC Q Θ JC = -------------------- The parameters in this equation have been defined above. However, the measurements is performed with the case of the part pressed against a water-cooled heat sink so as to draw most of the heat generated by the chip out the top of the package. It is this difference in the measurement process that differentiates ΘJC from ψJC. ΘJC is a true thermal resistance and is expressed in units of °C/watt. Θ JA = -------------------where TJ is the junction temperature, TA is the ambient air temperature, and Q is the chip power. Experimentally, ΘJA is determined when a special thermal test die is assembled into the package of interest, and the part is mounted on the thermal test board. The diodes on the test chip are separately calibrated in an oven. The package/board is placed either in a JEDEC natural convection box or in the wind tunnel, the latter for forced convection measurements. A controlled amount of power (Q) is dissipated in the test chip’s heater resistor, the chip’s temperature (TJ) is determined by the forward drop on the diodes, and the ambient temperature (TA) is noted. Note that ΘJA is expressed in units of °C/watt. ΘJB This is the thermal resistance from junction to board (a.k.a., ΘJL). It is defined by: TJ – TB Q Θ JB = -------------------- where TB is the temperature of the board adjacent to a lead measured with a thermocouple. The other parameters on the right-hand side have been defined above. This is considered a true thermal resistance, and the measurement is made with a water-cooled heat sink pressed against the board so as to draw most of the heat out of the leads. Note that ΘJB is expressed in units of °C/watt, and that this parameter and the way it is measured is still in JEDEC committee. ψJC This JEDEC designated parameter correlates the junction temperature to the case temperature. It is generally used to infer the junction temperature while the device Lucent Technologies Inc. 126 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Package Thermal Characteristics (continued) FPGA Maximum Junction Temperature Once the power dissipated by the FPGA has been determined (see the Estimating Power Dissipation section), the maximum junction temperature of the FPGA can be found. This is needed to determine if speed derating of the device from the 85 °C junction temperature used in all of the delay tables is needed. Using the maximum ambient temperature, TAmax, and the power dissipated by the device, Q (expressed in °C), the maximum junction temperature is approximated by: TJmax = TAmax + (Q • ΘJA) Table 29 lists the thermal characteristics for all packages used with the Series 2 FPGAs. Table 29. Series 2 Plastic Package Thermal Guidelines 0 fpm ΘJA (°C/W) 200 fpm 500 fpm 40.0 30.0—27.0 52.0 24.0 26.5 12.8 25.5 13.0 22.5 26.0 27.5 12.0 19.0 25.5 11.0 35.0 26—23 39.0 21.5 23.0 10.3 22.5 10.0 19.0 22.0 24.0 10.0 16.0 22.0 8.5 — 24.0—21.0 — 20.5 21.0 9.1 21.0 9.0 17.5 20.5 22.5 9.0 15.0 20.5 7.5 Package 84-Pin PLCC1 100-Pin TQFP2 144-Pin TQFP1 160-Pin QFP2 208-Pin SQFP2 208-Pin SQFP22 240-Pin SQFP2 240-Pin SQFP22 256-Pin PBGA2, 3 256-Pin PBGA2, 4 304-Pin SQFP2 304-Pin SQFP22 352-Pin PBGA2, 3 352-Pin PBGA2, 4 432-Pin EBGA2 TA = 70 °C max TJ = 125 °C max @ 0 fpm (W) 1.4 1.8—2.0 1.1 2.3 2.1 4.3 2.2 4.2 2.4 2.1 2.0 4.6 2.9 2.1 5.0 1. 2. 3. 4. Mounted on a sparse copper one-layer test board. Mounted on four-layer JEDEC standard test board with two power/ground planes. With thermal balls connected to board ground plane. Without thermal balls connected to board ground plane. Note: The ψJC for the packages listed is <1 °C/W. This implies that virtually all of the heat is dissipated through the board on which the package is mounted. Package Coplanarity Package Parasitics The coplanarity limits of the Series 2 series packages are as follows: The electrical performance of an IC package, such as signal quality and noise sensitivity, is directly affected by the package parasitics. Table 30 lists eight parasitics associated with the ORCA packages. These parasitics represent the contributions of all components of a package, which include the bond wires, all internal package routing, and the external leads. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ TQFP: 3.15 mils PLCC and QFP: 4.0 mils PBGA: 8.0 mils SQFP: 4.0 mils (240 and 304 only) 3.15 mils (all other sizes) SQFP2: 3.15 mils EBGA: 8.0 mils Lucent Technologies Inc. Four inductances in nH are listed: LSW and LSL, the self-inductance of the lead; and LMW and LML, the mutual inductance to the nearest neighbor lead. 127 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Package Parasitics (continued) These parameters are important in determining ground bounce noise and inductive crosstalk noise. Three capacitances in pF are listed: CM, the mutual capacitance of the lead to the nearest neighbor lead; and C1 and C2, the total capacitance of the lead to all other leads (all other leads are assumed to be grounded). These parameters are important in determining capacitive crosstalk and the capacitive loading effect of the lead. The parasitic values in Table 30 are for the circuit model of bond wire and package lead parasitics. If the mutual capacitance value is not used in the designer’s model, then the value listed as mutual capacitance should be added to each of the C1 and C2 capacitors. Table 30. Series 2 Package Parasitics LSW LMW RW C1 C2 CM LSL LML 84-Pin PLCC 3 1 140 1 1 0.5 7—11 3—6 100-Pin TQFP 3 1 150 0.5 0.5 0.4 4—6 2—3 144-Pin TQFP 3 1 140 1 1 0.6 4—6 2—2.5 160-Pin QFP 4 1.5 180 1.5 1.5 1 10—13 6—8 208-Pin SQFP 4 2 200 1 1 1 7—10 4—6 208-Pin SQFP2 4 2 200 1 1 1 6—9 4—6 240-Pin SQFP 4 2 200 1 1 1 8—12 5—8 240-Pin SQFP2 4 2 200 1 1 1 7—11 4—7 256-Pin PBGA 5 2 220 1 1 1 5—8 2—4 304-Pin SQFP 5 2 220 1 1 1 12—18 7—12 304-Pin SQFP2 5 2 220 1 1 1 11—17 7—12 352-Pin PBGA 5 2 220 1.5 1.5 1.5 7—12 3—6 432-Pin EBGA 4 1.5 500 1 1 0.3 3—5.5 0.5—1 Package Type LW RW LL CIRCUIT BOARD PAD PAD N C1 LMW CM C2 LML PAD N + 1 LW RW LL C1 C2 5-3862(F).r2 Figure 53. Package Parasitics 128 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Absolute Maximum Ratings Stresses in excess of the absolute maximum ratings can cause permanent damage to the device. These are absolute stress ratings only. Functional operation of the device is not implied at these or any other conditions in excess of those given in the operations sections of this data sheet. Exposure to absolute maximum ratings for extended periods can adversely affect device reliability. The ORCA Series FPGAs include circuitry designed to protect the chips from damaging substrate injection currents and prevent accumulations of static charge. Nevertheless, conventional precautions should be observed during storage, handling, and use to avoid exposure to excessive electrical stress. Parameter Symbol Min Max Unit Storage Temperature Tstg –65 150 °C Supply Voltage with Respect to Ground VDD –0.5 7.0 V VDD5 Supply Voltage with Respect to Ground (OR2TxxA) VDD5 VDD 7.0 V Input Signal with Respect to Ground OR2TxxA only — –0.5 VDD + 0.3 VDD5 + 0.3 V Signal Applied to High-impedance Output OR2TxxA only — –0.5 VDD + 0.3 VDD5 + 0.3 V Maximum Soldering Temperature — — 260 °C Recommended Operating Conditions OR2CxxA Mode Commercial Industrial OR2TxxA/OR2TxxB Temperature Range (Ambient) Supply Voltage (VDD) Temperature Range (Ambient) Supply Voltage (VDD) Supply Voltage* (VDD5) 0 °C to 70 °C 5 V ± 5% 0 °C to 70 °C 3.0 V to 3.6 V VDD to 5.25 V –40 °C to +85 °C 5 V ± 10% –40 °C to +85 °C 3.0 V to 3.6 V VDD to 5.25 V Notes: During powerup and powerdown sequencing, VDD is allowed to be at a higher voltage level than VDD5 for up to 100 ms. During powerup sequencing of OR2TxxA devices VDD should reach 1.0 V before voltage applied to VDD5 can be greater than the voltage applied to VDD. The maximum recommended junction temperature (TJ) during operation is 125 °C. * VDD5 not used in OR2TxxB devices. Lucent Technologies Inc. 129 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Electrical Characteristics Table 31A. OR2CxxA and OR2TxxA Electrical Characteristics OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2CxxA Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxA Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Parameter Input Voltage: High Low Input Voltage: High Low Output Voltage: High Low Input Leakage Current Standby Current: OR2C04A/OR2T04A OR2C06A/OR2T06A OR2C08A/OR2T08A OR2C10A/OR2T10A OR2C12A/OR2T12A OR2C15A/OR2T15A OR2C26A/OR2T26A OR2C40A/OR2T40A Standby Current: OR2C04A/OR2T04A OR2C06A/OR2T06A OR2C08A/OR2T08A OR2C10A/OR2T10A OR2C12A/OR2T12A OR2C15A/OR2T15A OR2C26A/OR2T26A OR2C40A/OR2T40A Data Retention Voltage Input Capacitance Output Capacitance Symbol Test Conditions OR2CxxA Min Max OR2TxxA Min Max Unit Input configured as CMOS 50% VDD VDD + 0.3 50% VDD5 VDD5 + 0.3 GND – 0.5 30% VDD GND – 0.5 30% VDD5 VIH VIL VIH VIL VOH VOL IL IDDSB IDDSB VDR CIN COUT DONE Pull-up Resistor* M3, M2, M1, and M0 Pull-up Resistors* I/O Pad Static Pull-up Current* RDONE RM I/O Pad Static Pull-down Current IPD I/O Pad Pull-up Resistor* I/O Pad Pull-down Resistor RPU RPD IPU Input configured as TTL (valid for OR2CxxA only) VDD = min, IOH = 6 mA or 3 mA VDD = min, IOL = 12 mA or 6 mA VDD = Max, VIN = VSS or VDD OR2CxxA (TA = 25 °C, VDD = 5.0 V) OR2TxxA (TA = 25 °C, VDD = 3.3 V) internal oscillator running, no output loads, inputs at VDD or GND (after configuration) OR2CxxA (TA = 25 °C, VDD = 5.0 V) OR2TxxA (TA = 25 °C, VDD = 3.3 V) internal oscillator stopped, no output loads, inputs at VDD or GND (after configuration) TA = 25 °C OR2CxxA (TA = 25 °C, VDD = 5.0 V) OR2TxxA (TA = 25 °C, VDD = 3.3 V) Test frequency = 1 MHz OR2CxxA (TA = 25 °C, VDD = 5.0 V) OR2TxxA (TA = 25 °C, VDD = 3.3 V) Test frequency = 1 MHz — — OR2CxxA (VDD = 5.25 V, VIN = VSS, TA = 0 °C) OR2TxxA (VDD = 3.6 V, VIN = VSS, TA = 0 °C) OR2CxxA (VDD = 5.25 V, VIN = VSS, TA = 0 °C) OR2TxxA (VDD = 3.6 V, VIN = VSS, TA = 0 °C) VDD = All, VIN = VSS, TA = 0 °C VDD = All, VIN = VDD, TA = 0 °C V V 2.0 –0.5 VDD + 0.3 — — — 0.8 — V V 2.4 — –10 — 0.4 10 2.4 — –10 — 0.4 10 V V µA — — — — — — — — 6.5 7.0 7.7 8.4 9.2 10.0 12.2 16.3 — — — — — — — — 4.0 4.3 4.8 5.3 5.8 6.3 7.8 10.6 mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA — — — — — — — — 2.3 — 1.5 2.0 2.7 3.4 4.2 5.0 7.2 11.3 — 9 — — — — — — — — 2.3 — 1.0 1.3 1.8 2.3 2.8 3.3 4.8 7.6 — 9 mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA V pF — 9 — 9 pF 100k 100k — — 100k 100k — — Ω Ω 14.4 50.9 14.4 50.9 µA 26 103 26 103 µA 100k 50k — — 100k 50k — — Ω Ω * On the OR2TxxA devices, the pull-up resistor will externally pull the pin to a level 1.0 V below VDD. 130 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Electrical Characteristics (continued) Table 31B. OR2TxxB Electrical Characteristics OR2TxxB Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxB Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Parameter Input Voltage: High Low Output Voltage: High Low Input Leakage Current Standby Current: OR2T15B OR2T40B Standby Current: OR2T15B OR2T40B Data Retention Voltage Input Capacitance Output Capacitance DONE Pull-up Resistor* M3, M2, M1, and M0 Pull-up Resistors* I/O Pad Static Pull-up Current* I/O Pad Static Pull-down Current I/O Pad Pull-up Resistor* I/O Pad Pull-down Resistor Symbol OR2TxxB Test Conditions Unit Min Max 80% VDD GND – 0.5 VDD + 0.3 15% VDD V V 2.4 — –10 — 0.4 10 V V µA — — 5.5 8.0 mA mA — — 2.0 4.5 mA mA 2.3 — — 8 V pF Input configured as CMOS VIH VIL VOH VOL IL IDDSB IDDSB VDD = min, IOH = 6 mA or 3 mA VDD = min, IOL = 12 mA or 6 mA VDD = max, VIN = VSS or VDD OR2TxxB (TA = 25 °C, VDD = 3.3 V) internal oscillator running, no output loads, inputs at VDD or GND (after configuration) OR2TxxB (TA = 25 °C, VDD = 3.3 V) internal oscillator stopped, no output loads, inputs at VDD or GND (after configuration) TA = 25 °C OR2TxxB (TA = 25 °C, VDD = 3.3 V) Test frequency = 1 MHz OR2TxxB (TA = 25 °C, VDD = 3.3 V) Test frequency = 1 MHz — — — 8 pF 100k 100k — — Ω Ω IPU VDD = 3.6 V, VIN = VSS, TA = 0 °C 14.4 50.9 µA IPD VDD = 3.6 V, VIN = VDD, TA = 0 °C 26 103 µA RPU RPD VDD = all, VIN = VSS, TA = 0 °C VDD = all, VIN = VDD, TA = 0 °C 100k 50k — — Ω Ω VDR CIN COUT RDONE RM * On the OR2TxxB devices, the pull-up resistor will externally pull the pin to a level 1.0 V below VDD. Lucent Technologies Inc. 131 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics Table 32A. OR2CxxA and OR2TxxA Combinatorial PFU Timing Characteristics OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2CxxA Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxA Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Parameter Symbol -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 Unit -7 Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Combinatorial Delays (TJ = +85 °C, VDD = min): Four Input Variables (A[4:0], B[4:0] to F[3:0]) Five Input Variables (A[4:0], B[4:0] to F3, F0) PFUMUX (A[4:0], B[4:0] to F1) PFUMUX (C0 to f1) PFUNAND (A[4:0], B[4:0] to F2) PFUNAND (C0 to F2) PFUXOR (A[4:0], B[4:0] to F1) PFUXOR (C0 to F1) F4*_DEL — 4.0 — 2.8 — 2.1 — 1.7 — 1.4 — 1.3 ns F5*_DEL — 4.1 — 2.9 — 2.2 — 1.8 — 1.4 — 1.3 ns MUX_DEL C0MUX_DEL ND_DEL C0ND_DEL XOR_DEL C0XOR_DEL — — — — — — 4.7 3.0 4.7 2.7 5.6 3.1 — — — — — — 3.8 2.2 4.0 2.2 4.5 2.2 — — — — — — 3.2 1.9 3.3 1.8 3.8 2.0 — — — — — — 2.6 1.5 2.7 1.5 3.1 1.6 — — — — — — 1.9 1.1 1.8 1.0 2.3 1.1 — — — — — — 1.8 1.0 1.7 0.8 2.1 1.0 ns ns ns ns ns ns Note: Speed grades of -5, -6, and -7 are for OR2TxxA devices only. Table 32B. OR2TxxB Combinatorial PFU Timing Characteristics OR2TxxB Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxB Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Parameter Symbol -7 Unit -8 Min Max Min Max Combinatorial Delays (TJ = +85 °C, VDD = min): Four Input Variables (A[4:0], B[4:0] to F[3:0]) Five Input Variables (A[4:0], B[4:0] to F3, F0) PFUMUX (A[4:0], B[4:0] to F1) PFUMUX (C0 to F1) PFUNAND (A[4:0], B[4:0] to F2) PFUNAND (C0 to F2) PFUXOR (A[4:0], B[4:0] to F1) PFUXOR (C0 to F1) 132 F4*_DEL — 1.3 — 1.0 ns F5*_DEL — 1.3 — 1.0 ns MUX_DEL C0MUX_DEL ND_DEL C0ND_DEL XOR_DEL C0XOR_DEL — — — — — — 2.2 1.4 2.1 1.2 2.5 1.3 — — — — — — 1.8 1.0 1.7 0.9 2.0 1.0 ns ns ns ns ns ns Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) XSW LINES FDBK_DEL A[4:0], B[4:0] F4*_DEL (LUT) 4 F[3:0] A[4:0], B[4:0] F5*_DEL (LUT) 2 F3, F0 MUX_DEL F1 OMUX_DEL OUTPUT MUX PFU O[4:0] C A[4:0], B[4:0] (LUT) 2 XOR_DEL ND_DEL C0 F2 C0MUX_DEL, C0XOR_DEL, C0ND_DEL 5-4633(F).a C = controlled by configuration RAM. Notes: The parameters MUX_DEL, XOR_DEL, and ND_DEL include the delay through the LUT in F5A/F5B modes. See Table 41 for an explanation of FDBK_DEL and OMUX_DEL. Figure 54. Combinatorial PFU Timing Lucent Technologies Inc. 133 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 33A. OR2CxxA and OR2TxxA Sequential PFU Timing Characteristics OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2CxxA Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxA Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Parameter Symbol -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 Unit -7 Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Input Requirements Clock Low Time TCL 3.2 — 2.5 — 2.0 — 1.8 — 1.7 — 1.6 — ns Clock High Time TCH 3.2 — 2.5 — 2.0 — 1.8 — 1.7 — 1.6 — ns Global S/R Pulse Width (GSRN) TRW 2.8 — 2.5 — 2.0 — 1.8 — 1.7 — 1.6 — ns Local S/R Pulse Width TPW 3.0 — 2.5 — 2.0 — 1.8 — 1.7 — 1.6 — ns F4*_SET 2.4 — 1.7 — 1.3 — 1.1 — 1.0 — 0.9 — ns F5*_SET 2.5 — 1.9 — 1.3 — 1.2 — 1.0 — 0.9 — ns MUX_SET C0MUX_SET ND_SET C0ND_SET XOR_SET C0XOR_SET D*_SET CKEN_SET LSR_SET SELECT_SET PDIN_SET 3.9 1.5 3.9 1.7 4.8 1.6 0.5 1.6 1.7 1.9 0.0 — — — — — — — — — — — 2.9 1.2 2.9 1.2 3.6 1.2 0.1 1.2 1.4 1.5 0.0 — — — — — — — — — — — 2.3 0.9 2.2 0.6 3.0 0.9 0.1 1.0 1.3 1.4 0.0 — — — — — — — — — — — 2.1 0.8 2.0 0.5 2.7 0.8 0.0 0.9 1.2 1.3 0.0 — — — — — — — — — — — 1.6 0.7 1.7 0.5 2.1 0.7 0.1 0.9 1.1 1.2 0.0 — — — — — — — — — — — 1.5 0.6 1.6 0.5 2.0 0.6 0.1 0.6 0.8 1.0 0.0 — — — — — — — — — — — ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Combinatorial Hold Times (TJ = all, VDD = all): Data In (WD[3:0] from CK) D*_HLD Clock Enable (CE from CK) CKEN_HLD Local Set/Reset (synchronous) (LSR from CK) LSR_HLD Data Select (sel from CK) SELECT_HLD Pad Direct In Hold (DIA[3:0], DIB[3:0] to CK)1 PDIN_HLD All Others — 0.6 0.6 0.0 0.0 1.5 0.0 — — — — — — 0.4 0.4 0.0 0.0 1.4 0.0 — — — — — — 0.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 — — — — — — 0.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.9 0.0 — — — — — — 0.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.8 0.0 — — — — — — 0.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.8 0.0 — — — — — — ns ns ns ns ns ns — — — — — 4.5 2.9 2.4 2.5 3.5 — — — — — 3.4 2.3 2.0 2.0 2.7 — — — — — 3.1 2.0 1.9 1.9 2.5 — — — — — 2.5 1.6 1.5 1.5 2.0 — — — — — 2.0 1.3 1.3 1.3 2.0 — — — — — 1.6 1.2 1.0 1.0 1.8 ns ns ns ns ns Combinatorial Setup Times (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min): Four Input Variables to Clock (A[4:0], B[4:0] to CK) Five Input Variables to Clock (A[4:0], B[4:0] to CK) PFUMUX to Clock (A[4:0], B[4:0] to CK) PFUMUX to Clock (C0 to CK) PFUNAND to Clock (A[4:0], B[4:0] to CK) PFUNAND to Clock (C0 to CK) PFUXOR to Clock (A[4:0], B[4:0] to CK) PFUXOR to Clock (C0 to CK) Data In to Clock (WD[3:0] to CK) Clock Enable to Clock (CE to CK) Local Set/Reset (synchronous) (LSR to CK) Data Select to Clock (SEL to CK) Pad Direct In Output Characteristics Sequential Delays (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min): Local S/R (async) to PFU Out (LSR to Q[3:0]) Global S/R to PFU Out (GSRN to Q[3:0]) Clock to PFU Out (CK to Q[3:0])—Register Clock to PFU Out (CK to Q[3:0])—Latch Transparent Latch (WD[3:0] to Q[3:0]) LSR_DEL GSR_DEL REG_DEL LTCH_DEL LTCH_DDEL 1.The input buffers contain a programmable delay to allow the hold time vs. the external clock pin to be equal to 0. Note: Speed grades of -5, -6, and -7 are for OR2TxxA devices only. 134 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 33B. OR2TxxB Sequential PFU Timing Characteristics OR2TxxB Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxB Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Parameter Symbol -7 Unit -8 Min Max Min Max 1.4 ns 1.4 — — — — Input Requirements Clock Low Time TCL 1.7 Clock High Time TCH 1.7 Global S/R Pulse Width (GSRN) T RW 1.7 Local S/R Pulse Width TPW 1.7 — — — — F4*_SET 1.0 — 0.8 — ns 1.4 1.4 ns ns ns Combinatorial Setup Times (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min): Four Input Variables to Clock (A[4:0], B[4:0] to CK) Five Input Variables to Clock (A[4:0], B[4:0] to CK) PFUMUX to Clock (A[4:0], B[4:0] to CK) PFUMUX to Clock (C0 to CK) PFUNAND to Clock (A[4:0], B[4:0] to CK) PFUNAND to Clock (C0 to CK) PFUXOR to Clock (A[4:0], B[4:0] to CK) PFUXOR to Clock (C0 to CK) Data In to Clock (WD[3:0] to CK) Clock Enable to Clock (CE to CK) Local Set/Reset (synchronous) (LSR to CK) Data Select to Clock (SEL to CK) Pad Direct In F5*_SET 1.0 — 0.8 — ns MUX_SET C0MUX_SET ND_SET C0ND_SET XOR_SET C0XOR_SET D*_SET CKEN_SET LSR_SET SELECT_SET PDIN_SET 1.3 1.1 1.0 0.8 1.3 1.1 0.2 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.0 — — — — — — — — — — — 1.3 0.8 0.8 0.7 1.3 0.8 0.1 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.0 — — — — — — — — — — — ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Combinatorial Hold Times (TJ = all, VDD = all): Data In (WD[3:0] from CK) Clock Enable (CE from CK) Local Set/Reset (synchronous) (LSR from CK) Data Select (SEL from CK) Pad Direct In Hold (DIA[3:0], DIB[3:0] to CK)1 All Others D*_HLD CKEN_HLD LSR_HLD SELECT_HLD PDIN_HLD — 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.1 0.0 — — — — — — 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.1 0.0 — — — — — — ns ns ns ns ns ns LSR_DEL GSR_DEL REG_DEL LTCH_DEL LTCH_DDEL 2.2 1.4 1.0 1.0 1.7 — — — — — 1.8 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.4 — — — — — ns ns ns ns ns Output Characteristics Sequential Delays (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min): Local S/R (async) to PFU Out (LSR to Q[3:0]) Global S/R to PFU Out (GSRN to Q[3:0]) Clock to PFU Out (CK to Q[3:0])—Register Clock to PFU Out (CK to Q[3:0])—Latch Transparent Latch (WD[3:0] to Q[3:0]) 1.The input buffers contain a programmable delay to allow the hold time vs. the external clock pin to be equal to 0. Lucent Technologies Inc. 135 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 34A. OR2CxxA and OR2TxxA Ripple Mode PFU Timing Characteristics OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2CxxA Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxA Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Parameter Ripple Setup Times (TJ = +85 °C, VDD = min): Operands to Clock (A[3:0], B[3:0] to CK) Bitwise Operands to Clock (A[i], B[i] to CK at F[i]) Carry-in from Fast Carry to Clock (CIN to CK) Carry-in from General Routing to Clock (B4 to CK) Add/Subtract to Clock (A4 to CK) Ripple Hold Times (TJ = all, VDD = all): All Symbol -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 Unit -7 Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max RIP_SET FRIP_SET 6.7 2.4 — — 5.0 1.7 — — 3.7 1.3 — — 3.3 1.2 — — 2.8 1.0 — — 2.5 0.9 — — ns ns CIN_SET 4.0 — 3.2 — 1.9 — 1.7 — 1.4 — 1.3 — ns B4_SET 4.0 — 3.2 — 1.9 — 1.7 — 1.4 — 1.3 — ns AS_SET 8.2 — 5.6 — 4.3 — 3.9 — 3.2 — 3.1 — ns TH 0.0 — 0.0 — 0.0 — 0.0 — 0.0 — 0.0 — ns — 5.4 — 3.8 — 3.3 — 2.6 — 2.1 — 1.8 ns — 6.9 — 4.8 — 4.2 — 3.4 — 2.6 — 2.4 ns — 8.2 — 6.0 — 4.7 — 3.8 — 3.2 — 2.8 ns — 4.0 — 2.8 — 2.1 — 1.7 — 1.6 — 1.5 ns — 1.9 — 1.6 — 1.1 — 0.9 — 0.7 — 0.6 ns — 3.5 — 2.6 — 2.1 — 1.7 — 1.3 — 1.1 ns — 5.6 — 4.2 — 2.9 — 2.3 — 2.2 — 1.7 ns — 1.9 — 1.6 — 1.1 — 0.9 — 0.7 — 0.6 ns — 3.5 — 2.6 — 2.1 — 1.7 — 1.3 — 1.1 ns — 5.6 — 4.2 — 2.9 — 2.3 — 2.2 — 2.1 ns — — — 6.1 7.6 9.7 — — — 4.5 5.6 6.8 — — — 3.9 4.9 5.3 — — — 3.1 3.9 4.3 — — — 2.5 3.1 3.5 — — — 2.3 2.8 3.1 ns ns ns Ripple Delays (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min): Operands to Carry-out (A[3:0], B[3:0] RIP_CODEL to COUT) Operands to Carry-out (A[3:0], B[3:0] RIP_O4DEL to O4) Operands to PFU Out (A[3:0], B[3:0] RIP_DEL to F[3:0]) Bitwise Operands to PFU Out (A[i], B[i] FRIP_DEL to F[i]) Carry-in from Fast Carry to Carry-out CIN_CODEL (CIN to COUT) Carry-in from Fast Carry to Carry-out CIN_O4DEL (CIN to O4) Carry-in from Fast Carry to PFU Out CIN_DEL (CIN to F[3:0]) Carry-in from General Routing to CarryB4_CODEL out (B4 to COUT) Carry-in from General Routing to CarryB4_O4DEL out (B4 to O4) Carry-in from General Routing to PFU Out B4_DEL (B4 to F[3:0]) Add/Subtract to Carry-out (A4 to COUT) AS_CODEL Add/Subtract to Carry-out (A4 to O4) AS_O4DEL Add/Subtract to PFU Out (A4 to F[3:0]) AS_DEL Notes: The new 4 x 1 multiplier and 4-bit comparator submodes use the appropriate ripple mode timing shown above. Speed grades of -5, -6, and -7 are for OR2TxxA devices only. 136 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 34B. OR2TxxB Ripple Mode PFU Timing Characteristics OR2TxxB Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxB Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Parameter Ripple Setup Times (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min): Operands to Clock (A[3:0], B[3:0] to CK) Bitwise Operands to Clock (A[i], B[i] to CK at F[i]) Carry-in from Fast Carry to Clock (CIN to CK) Carry-in from General Routing to Clock (B4 to CK) Add/Subtract to Clock (A4 to CK) Ripple Hold Times (TJ = all, VDD = all): All Ripple Delays (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min): Operands to Carry-out (A[3:0], B[3:0] to COUT) Operands to Carry-out (A[3:0], B[3:0] to O4) Operands to PFU Out (A[3:0], B[3:0] to F[3:0]) Bitwise Operands to PFU Out (A[i], B[i] to F[i]) Carry-in from Fast Carry to Carry-out (CIN to COUT) Carry-in from Fast Carry to Carry-out (CIN to O4) Carry-in from Fast Carry to PFU Out (CIN to F[3:0]) Carry-in from General Routing to Carryout (B4 to COUT) Carry-in from General Routing to Carryout (B4 to O4) Carry-in from General Routing to PFU Out (B4 to F[3:0]) Add/Subtract to Carry-out (A4 to COUT) Add/Subtract to Carry-out (A4 to O4) Add/Subtract to PFU Out (A4 to F[3:0]) Symbol -7 Unit -8 Min Max Min Max RIP_SET FRIP_SET 2.4 1.1 — — 1.9 0.9 — — ns ns CIN_SET 1.6 — 1.3 — ns B4_SET 1.0 — 0.8 — ns AS_SET 2.9 — 2.3 — TH ns ns RIP_CODEL 2.2 — 1.8 — ns RIP_O4DEL 3.0 — 2.4 — ns RIP_DEL 3.1 — 2.5 — ns FRIP_DEL 1.4 — 1.1 — ns CIN_CODEL 0.7 — 0.6 — ns CIN_O4DEL 1.4 — 1.2 — ns CIN_DEL 1.9 — 1.5 — ns B4_CODEL 0.7 — 0.6 — ns B4_O4DEL 1.4 — 1.2 — ns B4_DEL 1.9 — 1.5 — ns AS_CODEL AS_O4DEL AS_DEL 2.7 3.4 3.6 — — — 2.2 2.8 2.9 — — — ns ns ns Notes: The new 4 x 1 multiplier and 4-bit comparator submodes use the appropriate ripple mode timing shown above. Lucent Technologies Inc. 137 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 35A. OR2CxxA and OR2TxxA Asynchronous Memory Read Characteristics (MA/MB Modes) OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2CxxA Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxA Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Parameter Symbol -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 Unit -7 Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Read Operation (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min): Read Cycle Time Data Valid after Address (A[3:0], B[3:0] to F[3:0]) TRC 5.1 MEM*_ADEL — — 4.0 3.6 — — 2.8 2.7 — — 2.1 2.4 — — 1.7 2.3 — — 1.4 2.0 — — 1.3 ns ns Read Operation, Clocking Data into Latch/Flip-flop (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min): Address to Clock Setup Time (A[3:0], B[3:0] to CK) Clock to PFU Out (CK to Q[3:0])—Register MEM*_ASET 2.4 REG_DEL — — 2.4 1.8 — — 2.0 1.2 — — 1.9 1.1 — — 1.5 1.0 — — 1.3 1.0 — — 1.0 ns ns Note: Speed grades of -5, -6, and -7 are for OR2TxxA devices only. Table 35B. OR2TxxB Asynchronous Memory Read Characteristics (MA/MB Modes) OR2TxxB Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxB Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Parameter (TJ Symbol -7 Unit -8 Min Max Min Max Read Operation = 85 °C, = min): Read Cycle Time Data Valid after Address (A[3:0], B[3:0] to F[3:0]) TRC MEM*_ADEL 1.9 — — 1.3 1.8 — — 1.0 ns ns Read Operation, Clocking Data into Latch/Flip-flop (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min): Address to Clock Setup Time (A[3:0], B[3:0] to CK) Clock to PFU Out (CK to Q[3:0])—Register MEM*_ASET REG_DEL 0.9 — — 1.0 0.8 — — 1.0 ns ns VDD TRC A[3:0], B[3:0] MEM*_ADEL F[3:0] 5-3226(F).r4 Figure 55. Read Operation—Flip-Flop Bypass A[3:0], B[3:0] MEM*_ASET CK REG_DEL Q[3:0] 5-3227(F).r4 Figure 56. Read Operation—LUT Memory Loading Flip-Flops 138 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 36A. OR2CxxA and OR2TxxA Asynchronous Memory Write Characteristics (MA/MB Modes) OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2CxxA Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxA Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Parameter Symbol -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 Unit -7 Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Write Operation (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min): Write Cycle Time Write Enable (WREN) Pulse Width (A4/B4) TWC TPW 9.3 3.0 — — 7.8 2.5 — — 6.3 2.0 — — 5.7 1.8 — — 5.2 1.7 — — 5.1 1.6 — — ns ns Setup Time (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min): Address to WREN (A[3:0]/B[3:0] to A4/B4) Data to WREN (WD[3:0] to A4/B4) Address to WPE (A[3:0]/B[3:0] to C0) Data to WPE (WD[3:0] to C0) WPE to WREN (C0 to A4/B4) MEM*_AWRSET MEM*_DWRSET MEM*_APWRSET MEM*_DPWRSET MEM*_WPESET 0.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.5 — — — — — 0.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.0 — — — — — 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.5 — — — — — 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.4 — — — — — 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.1 — — — — — 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.1 — — — — — ns ns ns ns ns Hold Time (TJ = all, VDD = all): Address from WREN (A[3:0]/B[3:0] from A4/B4) Data from WREN (WD[3:0] from A4/B4) Address from WPE (A[3:0/B[3:0] to C0) Data from WPE (WD[3:0] to C0) WPE from WREN (C0 from A4/B4) MEM*_WRAHLD MEM*_WRDHLD MEM*_PWRAHLD MEM*_PWRDHLD MEM*_WPEHLD 2.4 2.4 3.8 3.9 0.0 — — — — — 1.7 2.0 3.3 3.4 0.0 — — — — — 1.8 1.9 2.8 2.9 0.0 — — — — — 1.6 1.5 2.5 2.6 0.0 — — — — — 1.6 1.6 2.4 2.4 0.0 — — — — — 1.5 1.6 2.3 2.3 0.0 — — — — — ns ns ns ns ns Note: Speed grades of -5, -6, and -7 are for OR2TxxA devices only. Table 36B. OR2TxxB Asynchronous Memory Write Characteristics (MA/MB Modes) OR2TxxB Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxB Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Parameter Symbol -7 Unit -8 Min Max Min Max TWC TPW 5.1 1.7 — — 4.2 1.4 — — ns ns Setup Time (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min): Address to WREN (A[3:0]/B[3:0] to A4/B4) Data to WREN (WD[3:0] to A4/B4) Address to WPE (A[3:0]/B[3:0] to C0) Data to WPE (WD[3:0] to C0) WPE to WREN (C0 to A4/B4) MEM*_AWRSET MEM*_DWRSET MEM*_APWRSET MEM*_DPWRSET MEM*_WPESET 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 — — — — — 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.8 — — — — — ns ns ns ns ns Hold Time (TJ = all, VDD = all): Address from WREN (A[3:0]/B[3:0] from A4/B4) Data from WREN (WD[3:0] from A4/B4) Address from WPE (A[3:0/B[3:0] to C0) Data from WPE (WD[3:0] to C0) WPE from WREN (C0 from A4/B4) MEM*_WRAHLD MEM*_WRDHLD MEM*_PWRAHLD MEM*_PWRDHLD MEM*_WPEHLD 0.9 1.6 2.3 2.3 0.0 — — — — — 0.7 1.3 1.9 1.9 0.0 — — — — — ns ns ns ns ns Write Operation (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min): Write Cycle Time Write Enable (WREN) Pulse Width (A4/B4) Lucent Technologies Inc. 139 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) TWC A[3:0], B[3:0] MEM*_APWRSET MEM*_PWRAHLD C0 (WPE) MEM*_WPESET TPW MEM*_WPEHLD A4, B4 (WREN) MEM*_AWRSET MEM*_WRAHLD MEM*_DPWRSET MEM*_PWRDHLD MEM*_DWRSET MEM*_WRDHLD WD[3:0] 5-3228(F).r6 Figure 57. Write Operation 140 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 37A. OR2CxxA and OR2TxxA Asynchronous Memory Read During Write Operation (MA/MB Modes) OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2CxxA Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxA Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Parameter Symbol -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 Unit -7 Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Read During Write Operation (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min): Write Enable (WREN) to PFU Output Delay MEM*_WRDEL (A4/B4 to F[3:0]) Write-port Enable (WPE) to PFU Output MEM*_PWRDEL Delay (C0 to F[3:0]) Data to PFU Output Delay (WD[3:0] to F[3:0]) MEM*_DDEL — 7.0 — 4.9 — 4.8 — 3.9 — 4.0 — 3.9 ns — 9.0 — 6.4 — 5.8 — 4.7 — 4.7 — 4.5 ns — 5.0 — 3.6 — 3.1 — 2.5 — 2.5 — 2.2 ns Note: Speed grades of -5, -6, and -7 are for OR2TxxA devices only. Table 37B. OR2TxxB Asynchronous Memory Read During Write Operation (MA/MB Modes) OR2TxxB Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxB Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Parameter Read During Write Operation (TJ = +85 °C, VDD = min): Write Enable (WREN) to PFU Output Delay (A4/B4 to F[3:0]) Write-port Enable (WPE) to PFU Output Delay (C0 to F[3:0]) Data to PFU Output Delay (WD[3:0] to F[3:0]) Lucent Technologies Inc. Symbol -7 Unit -8 Min Max Min Max MEM*_WRDEL — 4.5 — 3.9 ns MEM*_PWRDEL — 4.6 — 4.0 ns MEM*_DDEL — 2.7 — 2.4 ns 141 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) A[3:0], B[3:0] CO (WPE) TPW A4, B4 (WREN) DATA STABLE DURING WREN AND WPE WD[3:0] MEM*_PWRDEL MEM*_WRDEL F[3:0] WD[3:0] DATA CHANGING DURING WREN AND WPE MEM*_PWRDEL MEM*_DDEL MEM*_WRDEL F[3:0] 5-3229(F).r6 Figure 58. Read During Write 142 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 38A. OR2CxxA and OR2TxxA Asynchronous Memory Read During Write, Clocking Data into Latch/ Flip-Flop (MA/MB Modes) OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2CxxA Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxA Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Parameter Symbol -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 Unit -7 Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Setup Time (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min): Address to Clock (A[3:0], B[3:0] to CK) Write Enable (WREN) to Clock (A4/B4 to CK) Write-port Enable (WPE) to Clock (C0 to CK) Data (WD[3:0] to CK) MEM*_ASET MEM*_WRSET MEM*_PWRSET MEM*_DSET 2.4 5.4 7.4 3.5 TH REG_DEL Hold Time (TJ = All, VDD = All): All Clock to PFU Out (CK to Q[3:0])—Register — — — — 1.8 4.4 5.9 2.6 — — — — 1.2 3.8 4.8 2.6 0.0 — — 2.4 — — — — 1.1 3.4 4.3 2.3 0.0 — — 2.0 — — — — 1.0 3.1 4.0 2.2 0.0 — — 1.9 — — — — 1.0 3.0 3.9 2.1 0.0 — — 1.5 — — — — ns ns ns ns 0.0 — 0.0 — ns — 1.3 — 1.0 ns Note: Speed grades of -5, -6, and -7 are for OR2TxxA devices only. Table 38B. OR2TxxB Asynchronous Memory Read During Write, Clocking Data into Latch/Flip-Flop (MA/MB Modes) OR2TxxB Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxB Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Parameter Setup Time (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min): Address to Clock (A[3:0], B[3:0] to CK) Write Enable (WREN) to Clock (A4/B4 to CK) Write-port Enable (WPE) to Clock (C0 to CK) Data (WD[3:0] to CK) Hold Time (TJ = all, VDD = all): All Clock to PFU Out (CK to Q[3:0])—Register Lucent Technologies Inc. Symbol -7 Unit -8 Min Max Min Max MEM*_ASET MEM*_WRSET MEM*_PWRSET MEM*_DSET 0.9 2.9 3.7 2.0 — — — — 0.8 2.5 3.2 1.7 — — — — TH 0.0 — 0.0 — ns REG_DEL — 1.0 — 1.0 ns ns ns ns ns 143 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) A[3:0], B[3:0] MEM*_ASET MEM*_PWRSET C0 (WPE) TPW A4, B4 (WREN) MEM*_WRSET WD[3:0] MEM*_DSET CK REG_DEL Q[3:0] 5-3230(F).r6 Figure 59. Read During Write—Clocking Data into Flip-Flop 144 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 39A. OR2CxxA and OR2TxxA Synchronous Memory Write Characteristics (SSPM and SDPM Modes) OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2CxxA Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxA Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Parameter Write Operation for Fast-RAM Mode1: Maximum Frequency Clock Low Time Clock High Time Clock to Data Valid (CK to F[3:0])2 Write Operation for Normal RAM Mode: Maximum Frequency Clock Low Time Clock High Time Clock to Data Valid (CK to F[3:0]) Symbol FFSCK TFSCL TFSCH FMEMS_DEL FSCK TSCL TSCH MEMS_DEL -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 Unit -7 Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max 38.2 13.1 13.1 — — — — 9.0 52.6 9.5 9.5 — — — — 7.4 83.3 6.0 6.0 — — — — 6.2 90.9 5.5 5.5 — — — — 5.0 92.6 5.4 5.4 — — — — 5.3 96.2 5.2 5.2 — — — — 5.2 MHz ns ns ns 24.3 — 33.3 20.6 — 15.0 20.6 — 15.0 — 10.9 — — — — 8.6 52.6 9.5 9.5 — — — — 7.5 58.0 8.5 8.5 — — — — 6.0 58.8 8.5 8.5 — — — — 6.4 59.8 8.4 8.4 — — — — 5.9 MHz ns ns ns 0.0 0.0 0.0 — — — 0.0 0.0 0.0 — — — 0.0 0.0 0.0 — — — 0.0 0.0 0.0 — — — 0.0 0.0 0.0 — — — 0.0 0.0 0.0 — — — ns ns ns 0.0 — 0.0 — 0.0 — 0.0 — 0.0 — 0.0 — ns 3.8 3.8 3.8 — — — 3.0 3.0 3.0 — — — 2.2 2.2 2.2 — — — 2.0 2.0 2.0 — — — 1.9 1.9 1.9 — — — 1.8 1.8 1.8 — — — ns ns ns 3.3 — 2.3 — 1.5 — 1.4 — 1.9 — 1.2 — ns Write Operation Setup Time: Address to Clock (A[3:0]/B[3:0] to CK) MEMS_ASET Data to Clock (WD[3:0] to CK) MEMS_DSET Write Enable (WREN) to Clock MEMS_WRSET (A4 to CK) Write-port Enable (WPE) to Clock MEMS_PWRSET (C0 to CK) Write Operation Hold Time: Address to Clock (A[3:0]/B[3:0] to CK) MEMS_AHLD Data to Clock (WD[3:0] to CK) MEMS_DHLD Write Enable (WREN) to Clock MEMS_WRHLD (A4 to CK) Write-port Enable (WPE) to Clock MEMS_PWRHLD (C0 to CK) 1. Readback of the configuration bit stream when simultaneously writing to a PFU in either SSPM fast mode or SDPM fast mode is not allowed. 2. Because the setup time of data into the latches/FFs is less than 0 ns, data written into the RAM can be loaded into a latch/FF in the same PFU on the next opposite clock edge (one-half clock period). Note: Speed grades of -5, -6, and -7 are for OR2TxxA devices only. Table 39.B OR2TxxB Synchronous Memory Write Characteristics (SSPM and SDPM Modes) OR2TxxB Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxB Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Parameter Write Operation for Fast-RAM Mode1: Maximum Frequency Clock Low Time Clock High Time Clock to Data Valid (CK to F[3:0])2 Write Operation for Normal RAM Mode: Maximum Frequency Clock Low Time Clock High Time Clock to Data Valid (CK to F[3:0]) Lucent Technologies Inc. -7 Symbol Unit -8 Min Max Min Max FFSCK TFSCL TFSCH FMEMS_DEL 97.7 5.1 5.1 — — — — 5.1 112.4 4.5 4.5 — — — — 4.5 MHz ns ns ns FSCK TSCL TSCH MEMS_DEL 60.8 8.2 8.2 — — — — 5.1 69.9 7.2 7.2 — — — — 4.5 MHz ns ns ns 145 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 39.B OR2TxxB Synchronous Memory Write Characteristics (SSPM and SDPM Modes) (continued) OR2TxxB Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxB Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Parameter -7 Symbol Write Operation Setup Time: Address to Clock (A[3:0]/B[3:0] to CK) Data to Clock (WD[3:0] to CK) Write Enable (WREN) to Clock (A4 to CK) Write-port Enable (WPE) to Clock (C0 to CK) Write Operation Hold Time: Address to Clock (A[3:0]/B[3:0] to CK) Data to Clock (WD[3:0] to CK) Write Enable (WREN) to Clock (A4 to CK) Write-port Enable (WPE) to Clock (C0 to CK) Unit -8 Min Max Min Max MEMS_ASET MEMS_DSET MEMS_WRSET 0.0 0.0 0.0 — — — 0.0 0.0 0.0 — — — ns ns ns MEMS_PWRSET 0.0 — 0.0 — ns MEMS_AHLD MEMS_DHLD MEMS_WRHLD 1.0 1.0 1.0 — — — 0.8 0.8 0.8 — — — ns ns ns MEMS_PWRHLD 0.7 — 0.6 — ns 1. Readback of the configuration bit stream when simultaneously writing to a PFU in either SSPM fast mode or SDPM fast mode is not allowed. 2. Because the setup time of data into the latches/FFs is less than 0 ns, data written into the RAM can be loaded into a latch/FF in the same PFU on the next opposite clock edge (one-half clock period). Note: Speed grades of -5, -6, and -7 are for OR2TxxA devices only. MEMS_ASET MEMS_AHLD MEMS_DSET MEMS_DHLD A[3:0], B[3:0] WD[3:0] MEMS_WRSET MEMS_WRHLD A4 (WREN) MEMS_PWRSET MEMS_PWRHLD C0 (WPE) TFSCH/TSCH TFSCL/TSCL CK FMEMS_DEL/MEMS_DEL F[3:0] 5-4621(F).a Figure 60. Synchronous Memory Write Characteristics 146 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 40A. OR2CxxA and OR2TxxA Synchronous Memory Read Characteristics (SSPM and SDPM Modes) OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2CxxA Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxA Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Parameter Read Operation (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min): Read Cycle Time Data Valid After Address (A[3:0], B[3:0] to F[3:0]) Read Operation, Clocking Data Into Latch/FF (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min): Address to Clock Setup Time (A[3:0], B[3:0] to CK) Clock to PFU Output—Register (CK to Q[3:0]) -2 Symbol -3 -4 -5 -6 Unit -7 Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max TRC MEMS*_ADEL 5.1 — — 4.0 3.6 — — 2.8 2.7 — — 2.1 2.4 — — 1.7 2.3 — — 1.4 2.0 — — 1.1 ns ns MEMS*_ASET 2.4 — 1.8 — 1.2 — 1.1 — 1.0 — 0.9 — ns REG_DEL — 2.4 — 2.0 — 1.9 — 1.5 — 1.3 — 1.0 ns Note: Speed grades of -5, -6, and -7 are for OR2TxxA devices only. Table 40B. OR2TxxB Synchronous Memory Read Characteristics (SSPM and SDPM Modes) OR2TxxB Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxB Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Parameter Read Operation (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min): Read Cycle Time Data Valid After Address (A[3:0], B[3:0] to F[3:0]) Read Operation, Clocking Data into Latch/FF (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = Min): Address to Clock Setup Time (A[3:0], B[3:0] to CK) Clock to PFU Output—Register (CK to Q[3:0]) Symbol -7 Unit -8 Min Max Min Max TRC MEMS*_ADEL 1.9 — — 1.8 1.8 — — 1.4 ns ns MEMS*_ASET 0.9 — 0.8 — ns REG_DEL — 1.0 — 1.0 ns A[3:0], B[3:0] MEM*_ADEL F[3:0] MEM*_ASET CK REG_DEL Q[3:0] 5-4622(F).r2.a Figure 61. Synchronous Memory Read Cycle Lucent Technologies Inc. 147 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 41A. OR2CxxA and OR2TxxA PFU Output MUX, PLC BIDI, and Direct Routing Timing Characteristics OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2CxxA Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxA Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Parameter Symbol -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 Unit -7 Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max PFU Output MUX (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min) Output MUX Delay (F[3:0]/Q[3:0] to O[4:0]) OMUX_DEL — 1.1 — 0.8 — 0.6 — 0.5 — 0.4 — 0.4 ns TRI_DEL TRIEN_DEL — — 1.2 1.7 — — 1.0 1.3 — — 0.8 1.0 — — 0.7 0.8 — — 0.6 0.8 — — 0.5 0.7 ns ns DIR_DEL FDBK_DEL — — 1.4 1.0 — — 1.1 0.8 — — 0.9 0.7 — — 0.7 0.6 — — 0.6 0.5 — — 0.6 0.5 ns ns PLC 3-Statable BIDIs (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min) BIDI Propagation Delay BIDI 3-state Enable/Disable Delay Direct Routing (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min) PFU to PFU Delay (xSW) PFU Feedback (xSW) Note: Speed grades of -5, -6, and -7 are for OR2TxxA devices only. Table 41B. OR2TxxB PFU Output MUX, PLC BIDI, and Direct Routing Timing Characteristics OR2TxxB Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Parameter Symbol -7 Unit -8 Min Max Min Max OMUX_DEL — 0.4 — 0.4 ns TRI_DEL TRIEN_DEL — — 0.7 1.1 — — 0.6 0.9 ns ns DIR_DEL FDBK_DEL — — 0.6 0.4 — — 0.5 0.4 ns ns PFU Output MUX (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min) Output MUX Delay (F[3:0]/Q[3:0] to O[4:0]) PLC 3-Statable BIDIs (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min) BIDI Propagation Delay BIDI 3-state Enable/Disable Delay Direct Routing (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min) PFU to PFU Delay (xSW) PFU Feedback (xSW) 148 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 42A. OR2CxxA and OR2TxxA Internal Clock Delay OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2CxxA Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxA Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Device (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min) Symbol OR2C04A/OR2T04A OR2C06A/OR2T06A -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 Unit Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max CLK_DEL — 4.6 — 4.4 — 4.3 — 3.6 — — — — ns CLK_DEL — 4.7 — 4.5 — 4.4 — 3.7 — — — — ns OR2C08A/OR2T08A CLK_DEL — 4.8 — 4.6 — 4.5 — 3.8 — — — — ns OR2C10A/OR2T10A CLK_DEL — 4.9 — 4.7 — 4.6 — 3.9 — — — — ns OR2C12A/OR2T12A CLK_DEL — 5.0 — 4.8 — 4.7 — 4.0 — — — — ns OR2C15A/OR2T15A CLK_DEL — 5.1 — 4.9 — 4.8 — 4.1 — 3.9 — 3.3 ns OR2C26A/OR2T26A CLK_DEL — 5.2 — 5.1 — 5.0 — 4.2 — 4.0 — 3.4 ns OR2C40A/OR2T40A CLK_DEL — 5.6 — 5.4 — 5.3 — 4.5 — 4.2 — 3.6 ns Notes: This clock delay is for a fully routed clock tree that uses the primary clock network. It includes both the input buffer delay and the clock routing to the PFU CLK input. The delay will be reduced if any of the clock branches are not used. Speed grades of -5, -6, and -7 are for OR2TxxA devices only. Table 42B. OR2TxxB Internal Clock Delay OR2TxxB Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxB Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Device (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min) Symbol OR2T15B OR2T40B -7 -8 Unit Min Max Min Max CLK_DEL — 3.6 — 3.1 ns CLK_DEL — 3.8 — 3.3 ns Note: This clock delay is for a fully routed clock tree that uses the primary clock network. It includes both the input buffer delay and the clock routing to the PFU CLK input. The delay will be reduced if any of the clock branches are not used. Lucent Technologies Inc. 149 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 43A. OR2CxxA and OR2TxxA OR2CxxA/OR2TxxA Global Clock to Output Delay (Pin-to-Pin)—Output on Same Side of the Device as the Clock Pin OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C; CL = 50 pF. OR2TxxA Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C; CL = 50 pF. Description (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min) Speed Device -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 Unit Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max CLK Input Pin → OUTPUT Pin (Fast) OR2C/2T04A OR2C/2T06A OR2C/2T08A OR2C/2T10A OR2C/2T12A OR2C/2T15A OR2C/2T26A OR2C/2T40A — — — — — — — — 11.7 11.8 11.9 12.0 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.7 — — — — — — — — 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8 11.0 11.4 — — — — — — — — 9.8 9.9 10.0 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.5 10.8 — — — — — — — — 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 9.0 9.1 9.2 9.5 — — — — — — — — — — — — — 8.3 8.4 8.6 — — — — — — — — — — — — — 6.7 6.9 7.0 ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns CLK Input Pin → OUTPUT Pin (Slewlim) OR2C/2T04A OR2C/2T06A OR2C/2T08A OR2C/2T10A OR2C/2T12A OR2C/2T15A OR2C/2T26A OR2C/2T40A — — — — — — — — 13.9 14.0 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.9 — — — — — — — — 12.5 12.6 12.7 12.8 12.9 13.0 13.2 13.6 — — — — — — — — 11.7 11.8 11.9 12.0 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.6 — — — — — — — — 10.0 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.9 — — — — — — — — — — — — — 9.5 9.6 9.8 — — — — — — — — — — — — — 7.4 7.5 7.7 ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns CLK Input Pin → OUTPUT Pin (Sinklim) OR2C/2T04A OR2C/2T06A OR2C/2T08A OR2C/2T10A OR2C/2T12A OR2C/2T15A OR2C/2T26A OR2C/2T40A — — — — — — — — 15.7 15.8 15.9 16.0 16.1 16.2 16.3 16.7 — — — — — — — — 14.7 14.8 14.9 15.0 15.1 15.2 15.3 15.7 — — — — — — — — 13.7 13.8 13.9 14.0 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.6 — — — — — — — — 13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 13.6 13.7 14.0 — — — — — — — — — — — — — 12.1 12.2 12.4 — — — — — — — — — — — — — 10.0 10.7 10.9 ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Notes: The pin-to-pin timing information from ORCA Foundry version 9.2 and later is more accurate than this table. For earlier versions of ORCA Foundry, the pin-to-pin timing parameters in this table should be used instead of results reported by ORCA Foundry. This clock delay is for a fully routed clock tree that uses the primary clock network. It includes both the input buffer delay, the clock routing to the PFU CLK input, the clock→Q of the FF, and the delay through the output buffer. The delay will be reduced if any of the clock branches are not used. The given timing requires that the input clock pin be located at one of the four center PICs on any side of the device and that the direct FF→I/O routing be used. If the clock pin is not located at one of the four center PICs, this delay must be increased by up to the following amounts: OR2C/2T04A = 1.5%, OR2C/2T06A = 2.0%, OR2C/2T08A = 3.1%, OR2C/2T10A = 3.9%, OR2C/2T12A = 4.9%, OR2C/2T15A = 5.7%, OR2C/2T26A = 8.1%, OR2C/2T40A = 12.5%. Speed grades of -5, -6, and -7 are for OR2TxxA devices only. 150 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 43B. OR2TxxB Global Clock to Output Delay (Pin-to-Pin)—Output on Same Side of the Device as the Clock Pin OR2TxxB Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C; CL = 50 pF. Speed Description (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min) Device CLK Input Pin → OUTPUT Pin (Fast) -7 -8 Unit Min Max Min Max OR2T15B OR2T40B — — 7.3 7.5 — — 6.6 6.6 ns ns CLK Input Pin → OUTPUT Pin (Slewlim) OR2T15B OR2T40B — — 8.2 8.4 — — 7.4 7.6 ns ns CLK Input Pin → OUTPUT Pin (Sinklim) OR2T15B OR2T40B — — 12.9 13.1 — — 12.1 12.3 ns ns Notes: The pin-to-pin timing information from ORCA Foundry version 9.2 and later is more accurate than this table. For earlier versions of ORCA Foundry, the pin-to-pin timing parameters in this table should be used instead of results reported by ORCA Foundry. This clock delay is for a fully routed clock tree that uses the primary clock network. It includes both the input buffer delay, the clock routing to the PFU CLK input, the clock→Q of the FF, and the delay through the output buffer. The delay will be reduced if any of the clock branches are not used. The given timing requires that the input clock pin be located at one of the four center PICs on any side of the device and that the direct FF→I/O routing be used. If the clock pin is not located at one of the four center PICs, this delay must be increased by up to the following amounts: OR2T15B = 5.7%, OR2T40B = 12.5%. D Q OUTPUT (50 pF LOAD) CLK 5-4846(F) Figure 62. Global Clock to Output Delay Lucent Technologies Inc. 151 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 44A. OR2CxxA/OR2TxxA Global Clock to Output Delay (Pin-to-Pin)—Output Not on Same Side of the Device as the Clock Pin OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C; CL = 50 pF. OR2TxxA Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C; CL = 50 pF. Description (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min) Speed Device -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 Unit Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max CLK Input Pin → OUTPUT Pin (Fast) OR2C/2T04A OR2C/2T06A OR2C/2T08A OR2C/2T10A OR2C/2T12A OR2C/2T15A OR2C/2T26A OR2C/2T40A — — — — — — — — 11.8 12.0 12.2 12.4 12.6 12.8 13.1 14.4 — — — — — — — — 10.5 10.6 10.8 11.0 11.2 11.5 11.9 13.3 — — — — — — — — 9.9 10.0 10.1 10.3 10.5 10.7 11.1 12.4 — — — — — — — — 8.8 8.9 9.0 9.2 9.4 9.6 10.0 11.1 — — — — — — — — — — — — — 8.9 9.3 10.5 — — — — — — — — — — — — — 7.3 7.7 8.3 ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns CLK Input Pin → OUTPUT Pin (Slewlim) OR2C/2T04A OR2C/2T06A OR2C/2T08A OR2C/2T10A OR2C/2T12A OR2C/2T15A OR2C/2T26A OR2C/2T40A — — — — — — — — 14.1 14.3 14.4 14.6 14.8 15.0 15.3 16.7 — — — — — — — — 12.7 12.9 13.1 13.3 13.5 13.6 14.1 15.5 — — — — — — — — 11.8 11.9 12.0 12.2 12.4 12.6 12.9 14.2 — — — — — — — — 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.8 11.0 11.4 12.5 — — — — — — — — — — — — — 10.1 10.5 11.7 — — — — — — — — — — — — — 8.0 8.4 9.1 ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns CLK Input Pin → OUTPUT Pin (Sinklim) OR2C/2T04A OR2C/2T06A OR2C/2T08A OR2C/2T10A OR2C/2T12A OR2C/2T15A OR2C/2T26A OR2C/2T40A — — — — — — — — 15.9 16.0 16.2 16.4 16.6 16.8 17.1 18.5 — — — — — — — — 14.8 15.0 15.2 15.4 15.6 15.8 16.2 17.6 — — — — — — — — 13.8 13.9 14.1 14.2 14.4 14.6 14.9 16.3 — — — — — — — — 13.4 13.5 13.6 13.7 13.9 14.1 14.4 15.6 — — — — — — — — — — — — — 12.7 13.1 14.3 — — — — — — — — — — — — — 11.2 11.6 12.2 ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Notes: The pin-to-pin timing information from ORCA Foundry version 9.2 and later is more accurate than this table. For earlier versions of ORCA Foundry, the pin-to-pin timing parameters in this table should be used instead of results reported by ORCA Foundry. This clock delay is for a fully routed clock tree that uses the primary clock network. It includes both the input buffer delay, the clock routing to the PFU CLK input, the clock→Q of the FF, and the delay through the output buffer. The delay will be reduced if any of the clock branches are not used. The given timing requires that the input clock pin be located at one of the four center PICs on any side of the device and that the direct FF→I/O routing be used. If the clock pin is not located at one of the four center PICs, this delay must be increased by up to the following amounts: OR2C/2T04A = 1.5%, OR2C/2T06A = 2.0%, OR2C/2T08A = 3.1%, OR2C/2T10A = 3.9%, OR2C/2T12A = 4.9%, OR2C/2T15A = 5.7%, OR2C/2T26A = 8.1%, OR2C/2T40A = 12.5%. Speed grades of -5, -6, and -7 are for OR2TxxA devices only 152 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) . Table 44B. OR2TxxB Global Clock to Output Delay (Pin-to-Pin)—Output Not on Same Side of the Device as the Clock Pin OR2TxxB Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C; CL = 50 pF. Speed Description (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min) Device CLK Input Pin → OUTPUT Pin (Fast) -7 -8 Unit Min Max Min Max OR2T15B OR2T40B — — 7.6 8.1 — — 6.9 7.4 ns ns CLK Input Pin → OUTPUT Pin (Slewlim) OR2T15B OR2T40B — — 8.4 9.0 — — 7.7 8.2 ns ns CLK Input Pin → OUTPUT Pin (Sinklim) OR2T15B OR2T40B — — 13.2 13.7 — — 12.4 12.8 ns ns Notes: The pin-to-pin timing information from ORCA Foundry version 9.2 and later is more accurate than this table. For earlier versions of ORCA Foundry, the pin-to-pin timing parameters in this table should be used instead of results reported by ORCA Foundry. This clock delay is for a fully routed clock tree that uses the primary clock network. It includes both the input buffer delay, the clock routing to the PFU CLK input, the clock→Q of the FF, and the delay through the output buffer. The delay will be reduced if any of the clock branches are not used. The given timing requires that the input clock pin be located at one of the four center PICs on any side of the device and that the direct FF→I/O routing be used. If the clock pin is not located at one of the four center PICs, this delay must be increased by up to the following amounts: OR2T15B = 5.7%, OR2T40B = 12.5%. D Q OUTPUT (50 pF LOAD) CLK 5-4846(F) Figure 63. Global Clock to Output Delay Lucent Technologies Inc. 153 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 45A. OR2CxxA/OR2TxxA Global Input to Clock Setup/Hold Time (Pin-to-Pin) OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxA Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Description (TJ = all, VDD = all) Input to CLK (TTL/CMOS) Setup Time (no delay) Input to CLK (TTL/CMOS) Setup Time (delayed) Input to CLK (TTL/CMOS) Hold Time (no delay) Input to CLK (TTL/CMOS) Hold Time (delayed) Speed Device OR2C/2T04A OR2C/2T06A OR2C/2T08A OR2C/2T10A OR2C/2T12A OR2C/2T15A OR2C/2T26A OR2C/2T40A OR2C/2T04A OR2C/2T06A OR2C/2T08A OR2C/2T10A OR2C/2T12A OR2C/2T15A OR2C/2T26A OR2C/2T40A OR2C/2T04A OR2C/2T06A OR2C/2T08A OR2C/2T10A OR2C/2T12A OR2C/2T15A OR2C/2T26A OR2C/2T40A OR2C/2T04A OR2C/2T06A OR2C/2T08A OR2C/2T10A OR2C/2T12A OR2C/2T15A OR2C/2T26A OR2C/2T40A -2 Min 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 5.8 5.7 5.6 5.3 5.2 4.9 7.3 6.8 4.2 4.3 4.5 4.8 5.0 5.4 6.2 7.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -3 Max — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Min 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 5.5 5.4 5.3 5.0 4.9 4.7 6.9 6.4 4.0 4.1 4.3 4.6 4.8 5.1 5.8 6.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -4 Max — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Min 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 4.2 4.1 4.0 3.9 3.8 3.6 6.0 5.5 3.8 3.9 4.1 4.4 4.6 4.9 5.6 6.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -5 Max — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Min 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 4.0 3.9 3.8 3.7 3.6 3.4 5.7 5.2 3.6 3.7 3.9 4.2 4.4 4.7 5.3 6.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -6 Max — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Min — — — — — 0.0 0.0 0.0 — — — — — 4.1 6.7 6.5 — — — — — 4.2 4.6 5.8 — — — — — 0.0 0.0 0.0 -7 Max — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Min — — — — — 0.0 0.0 0.0 — — — — — 4.1 6.0 5.8 — — — — — 3.7 4.1 4.9 — — — — — 0.0 0.0 0.0 Unit Max — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Notes: The pin-to-pin timing parameters in this table should be used instead of results reported by ORCA Foundry. This clock delay is for a fully routed clock tree that uses the primary clock network. It includes both the input buffer delay and the clock routing to the PFU CLK input. The delay will be reduced if any of the clock branches are not used. The given Setup (Delayed and No delay) and Hold (Delayed) timing allows the input clock pin to be located in any PIC on any side of the device, but direct I/O→FF routing must be used. The Hold (No delay) timing assumes the clock pin is located at one of the four center PICs and direct I/O→FF routing is used. If it is not located at one of the four center PICs, this delay must be increased by up to the following amounts: OR2C/2T04A = 5.3%, OR2C/2T06A = 6.4%, OR2C/2T08A = 7.3%, OR2C/2T10A = 9.1%, OR2C/2T12A = 10.8%, OR2C/2T15A = 12.2%, OR2C/2T26A = 16.1%, OR2C/2T40A = 21.2%. Speed grades of -5, -6, and -7 are for OR2TxxA devices only. 154 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 45B. OR2TxxB Global Input to Clock Setup/Hold Time (Pin-to-Pin) OR2TxxB Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Description (TJ = all, VDD = all) Input to CLK (TTL/CMOS) Setup Time (no delay) Input to CLK (TTL/CMOS) Setup Time (delayed) Input to CLK (TTL/CMOS) Hold Time (no delay) Input to CLK (TTL/CMOS) Hold Time (delayed) Speed Device OR2T15B OR2T40B OR2T15B OR2T40B OR2T15B OR2T40B OR2T15B OR2T40B -7 -8 Unit Min 0.0 0.0 4.7 7.7 Max — — — — Min 0.0 0.0 4.0 5.5 Max — — — — 1.6 1.4 0.0 0.0 — — — — 1.4 1.3 0.0 0.0 — — — — ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Notes: The pin-to-pin timing parameters in this table should be used instead of results reported by ORCA Foundry. This clock delay is for a fully routed clock tree that uses the primary clock network. It includes both the input buffer delay and the clock routing to the PFU CLK input. The delay will be reduced if any of the clock branches are not used. The given Setup (delayed and no delay) and Hold (delayed) timing allows the input clock pin to be located in any PIC on any side of the device, but direct I/O→FF routing must be used. The Hold (no delay) timing assumes the clock pin is located at one of the four center PICs and direct I/O→FF routing is used. If it is not located at one of the four center PICs, this delay must be increased by up to the following amounts: OR2T15B = 5.7%, OR2T40B = 12.5%. INPUT D Q CLK 5-4847(F) Figure 64. Global Input to Clock Setup/Hold Time Lucent Technologies Inc. 155 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 46A. OR2CxxA/OR2TxxA Programmable I/O Cell Timing Characteristics OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2CxxA Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxA Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Parameter Symbol -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 Unit Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Inputs (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min) Input Rise Time TR — 500 — 500 — 500 — 500 — 500 — 500 ns Input Fall Time TF — 500 — 500 — 500 — 500 — 500 — 500 ns Pad to In Delay PAD_IN_DEL — 1.7 — 1.5 — 1.3 — 1.2 — 1.2 — 1.1 ns Pad to Nearest PFU Latch Output CHIP_LATCH — 6.2 — 4.7 — 4.1 — 3.5 — 3.1 — 2.9 ns Delay Added to General Routing (input buffer in delay mode for OR2C/2T15A and smaller devices) — — 8.1 — 7.0 — 6.0 — 5.9 — 6.2 — 5.8 ns Delay Added to General Routing (input buffer in delay mode for OR2C/2T26A and OR2C/2T40A) — — 11.0 — 9.7 — 8.6 — 8.6 — 9.0 — 8.6 ns Delay Added to Direct-FF Routing (input buffer in delay mode for OR2C/2T15A and smaller devices) — — 8.0 — 6.8 — 5.9 — 6.0 — 6.4 — 6.0 ns Delay Added to Direct-FF Routing (input buffer in delay mode for OR2C/2T26A and OR2C/2T40A) — — 10.9 — 10.2 — 8.5 — 8.6 — 9.1 — 7.9 ns DOUT_DEL(F) DOUT_DEL(SL) DOUT_DEL(SI) — — — 7.1 9.4 11.2 — — — 6.2 8.4 10.5 — — — 5.5 7.4 9.4 — — — 5.0 6.4 9.5 — — — 4.4 5.6 8.3 — — — 3.3 4.1 7.2 ns ns ns Output to Pad Delay (OUT[3:0] to PAD): Fast Slewlim Sinklim OUT_DEL(F) OUT_DEL(SL) OUT_DEL(SI) — — — 5.0 6.7 9.8 — — — 4.0 6.3 7.2 — — — 3.6 5.5 7.5 — — — 3.1 4.5 7.6 — — — 2.7 3.9 6.5 — — — 2.3 3.1 6.2 ns ns ns 3-state Enable Delay (TS[3:0] to PAD): Fast Slewlim Sinklim TS_DEL(F) TS_DEL(SL) TS_DEL(SI) — — — 5.8 7.5 10.6 — — — 4.7 7.0 7.9 — — — 4.0 6.3 8.4 — — — 3.5 5.2 9.3 — — — 3.1 4.7 8.0 — — — 2.5 3.7 7.6 ns ns ns Outputs (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min, CL = 50 pF) PFU CK to Pad Delay (DOUT[3:0] to PAD): Fast Slewlim Sinklim Notes: If the input buffer is placed in delay mode, the chip hold time to the nearest PFU latch is guaranteed to be 0 if the clock is routed using the primary clock network; (TJ = all, VDD = all). It should also be noted that any signals routed on the clock lines or using the TRIDI buffers directly from the input buffer do not get delayed at any time. The delays for all input buffers assume an input rise/fall time of ≤1 V/ns. Speed grades of -5, -6, and -7 are for OR2TxxA devices only 156 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) . Table 46B. OR2TxxB Programmable I/O Cell Timing Characteristics OR2TxxA Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Speed Parameter Symbol -7 -8 Unit Min Max Min Max Inputs (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min) Input Rise Time TR — 500 — 500 ns Input Fall Time TF — 500 — 500 ns Pad to In Delay PAD_IN_DEL — 1.1 — 1.0 ns Pad to Nearest PFU Latch Output CHIP_LATCH — 3.3 — 2.4 ns Delay Added to General Routing (input buffer in delay mode for OR2T15B and smaller devices) — — 6.6 — 6.1 ns Delay Added to General Routing (input buffer in delay mode for OR2T40B) — — 8.9 — 8.2 ns Delay Added to Direct-FF Routing (input buffer in delay mode for OR2T15B and smaller devices) — — 6.4 — 6.0 ns Delay Added to Direct-FF Routing (input buffer in delay mode for OR2T40B) — — 8.7 — 8.0 ns DOUT_DEL(F) DOUT_DEL(SL) DOUT_DEL(SI) — — — 2.8 3.6 8.3 — — — 2.5 3.3 8.0 ns ns ns Output to Pad Delay (OUT[3:0] to PAD): Fast Slewlim Sinklim OUT_DEL(F) OUT_DEL(SL) OUT_DEL(SI) — — — 2.8 3.6 8.3 — — — 2.5 3.3 8.0 ns ns ns 3-state Enable Delay (TS[3:0] to PAD): Fast Slewlim Sinklim TS_DEL(F) TS_DEL(SL) TS_DEL(SI) — — — 3.0 3.8 9.1 — — — 2.7 3.4 8.7 ns ns ns Outputs (TJ = 85 °C, VDD = min, CL = 50 pF) PFU CK to Pad Delay (DOUT[3:0] to PAD): Fast Slewlim Sinklim Notes: If the input buffer is placed in delay mode, the chip hold time to the nearest PFU latch is guaranteed to be 0 if the clock is routed using the primary clock network; (TJ = all, VDD = all). It should also be noted that any signals routed on the clock lines or using the TRIDI buffers directly from the input buffer do not get delayed at any time. The delays for all input buffers assume an input rise/fall time of ≤1 V/ns. Lucent Technologies Inc. 157 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 47. Series 2 General Configuration Mode Timing Characteristics OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2CxxA Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxA/B Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA/B Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Parameter Symbol Min Max Unit All Configuration Modes M[3:0] Setup Time to INIT High TSMODE 50.0 — ns M[3:0] Hold Time from INIT High THMODE 600.0 — ns RESET Pulse Width Low to Start Reconfiguration TRW 50.0 — ns PRGM Pulse Width Low to Start Reconfiguration TPGW 50.0 — ns TPO TCCLK 17.30 66.0 528.00 69.47 265.00 2120.00 ms ns ns 4.31 34.48 6.00 48.00 7.62 60.96 9.82 78.56 11.86 94.88 14.57 116.56 20.25 162.00 31.29 250.32 17.30* 138.40* 24.08* 192.64* 30.60* 244.80* 39.43* 315.44* 47.62* 380.96* 58.51* 468.08* 81.32* 650.56* 125.62* 1004.96* ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms 4.33 100.00 25.00 17.37 — — ms ns ns 6.53 9.09 11.55 14.88 17.97 22.08 5.52 30.69 47.40 11.85 — — — — — — — — — — ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms Master and Asynchronous Peripheral Modes Power-on Reset Delay CCLK Period (M3 = 0) (M3 = 1) Configuration Latency (noncompressed): OR2C/2T04A (M3 = 0) (M3 = 1) OR2C/2T06A (M3 = 0) (M3 = 1) OR2C/2T08A (M3 = 0) (M3 = 1) OR2C/2T10A (M3 = 0) (M3 = 1) OR2C/2T12A (M3 = 0) (M3 = 1) OR2C/2T15A/2T15B (M3 = 0) (M3 = 1) OR2C/2T26A (M3 = 0) (M3 = 1) OR2C/2T40A/2T40B (M3 = 0) (M3 = 1) TCL Slave Serial and Synchronous Peripheral Modes Power-on Reset Delay CCLK Period (OR2CxxA/OR2TxxA) CCLK Period (OR2TxxB) Configuration Latency (noncompressed): OR2C/2T04A OR2C/2T06A OR2C/2T08A OR2C/2T10A OR2C/2T12A OR2C/2T15A OR2T15B OR2C/2T26A OR2C/2T40A OR2T40B TPO TCCLK TCCLK TCL * Not applicable to asynchronous peripheral mode. 158 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 47. Series 2 General Configuration Mode Timing Characteristics (continued) OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2CxxA Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxA/B Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA/B Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Parameter Symbol Min Max Unit Power-on Reset Delay CCLK Period (OR2CxxA/OR2TxxA) CCLK Period (OR2TxxB) Configuration Latency (noncompressed): OR2C/2T04A OR2C/2T06A OR2C/2T08A OR2C/2T10A OR2C/2T12A OR2C/2T15A OR2T15B OR2C/2T26A OR2C/2T40A OR2T40B TPO TCCLK TCCLK TCL 4.33 100.00 25.0 17.37 — — ms ns ns 0.82 1.14 1.44 1.86 2.25 2.76 0.69 3.84 5.93 1.48 — — — — — — — — — — ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms Partial Reconfiguration (noncompressed): OR2C/2T04A OR2C/2T06A OR2C/2T08A OR2C/2T10A OR2C/2T12A OR2C/2T15A/2T15B OR2C/2T26A OR2C/2T40A/2T40B TPR 1.70 2.00 2.20 2.50 2.70 3.00 3.50 4.30 — — — — — — — — µs/frame µs/frame µs/frame µs/frame µs/frame µs/frame µs/frame µs/frame 1.00 1.00 1.00 — — — µs µs µs 1.06 0.59 4.51 2.65 µs µs 5.28 1.12 21.47 4.77 µs µs 63.36 74.98 86.59 98.21 109.82 121.44 144.67 181.90 254.40 301.04 347.68 394.32 440.96 487.60 580.88 730.34 µs µs µs µs µs µs µs µs 1.50 — µs Slave Parallel Mode INIT Timing INIT High to CCLK Delay: TINIT_CLK Slave Parallel Slave Serial Synchronous Peripheral Master Serial: (M3 = 1) (M3 = 0) Master Parallel: (M3 = 1) (M3 = 0) Initialization Latency (PRGM high to INIT high): OR2C/2T04A OR2C/2T06A OR2C/2T08A OR2C/2T10A OR2C/2T12A OR2C/2T15A/2T15B OR2C/2T26A OR2C/2T40A/2T40B INIT High to WR, Asynchronous Peripheral TIL TINIT_WR Note: TPO is triggered when VDD reaches between 3.0 V to 4.0 V for the OR2CxxA and between 2.7 V and 3.0 V for the OR2TxxA/OR2TxxB. Lucent Technologies Inc. 159 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Series 2 VDD TPO + TIL PRGM TPGW TIL INIT TINIT_CLK TCCLK CCLK THMODE TSMODE M[3:0] TCL DONE 5-4531(F) Figure 65. General Configuration Mode Timing Diagram 160 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 48. Series 2 Master Serial Configuration Mode Timing Characteristics OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2CxxA Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxA/B Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA/B Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Parameter Symbol Min Nom Max Unit DIN Setup Time TS 60.0 — — ns DIN Hold Time TH 0 — — ns CCLK Frequency (M3 = 0) FC 3.8 10.0 15.2 MHz CCLK Frequency (M3 = 1) FC 0.48 1.25 1.9 MHz CCLK to DOUT Delay TD — — 30 ns Note: Serial configuration data is transmitted out on DOUT on the falling edge of CCLK after it is input DIN. CCLK TS DIN TH BIT N TD DOUT BIT N 5-4532(F) Figure 66. Master Serial Configuration Mode Timing Diagram Lucent Technologies Inc. 161 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 49. Series 2 Master Parallel Configuration Mode Timing Characteristics OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2CxxA Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxA/B Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA/B Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Parameter Symbol Min Max Unit RCLK to Address Valid TAV 0 200 ns D[7:0] Setup Time to RCLK High TS 60 — ns D[7:0] Hold Time to RCLK High TH 0 — ns RCLK Low Time (M3 = 0) TCL 462 1855 ns RCLK High Time (M3 = 0) TCH 66 265 ns RCLK Low Time (M3 = 1) TCL 3696 14840 ns RCLK High Time (M3 = 1) TCH 528 2120 ns CCLK to DOUT TD — 30 ns Notes: The RCLK period consists of seven CCLKs for RCLK low and one CCLK for RCLK high. Serial data is transmitted out on DOUT 1.5 CCLK cycles after the byte is input D[7:0] A[17:0] TAV TCH TCL RCLK TS D[7:0] TH BYTE N + 1 BYTE N CCLK DOUT D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 TD f.44(F) Figure 67. Master Parallel Configuration Mode Timing Diagram 162 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 50. Series 2 Asynchronous Peripheral Configuration Mode Timing Characteristics OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2CxxA Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxA/B Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA/B Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Parameter Symbol Min Max Unit TWR 100 — ns TS 20 — ns WR, CS0, and CS1 Pulse Width D[7:0] Setup Time D[7:0] Hold Time TH 0 — ns TRDY — 60 ns TB 1 8 CCLK Periods Earliest WR After RDY Goes High* TWR2 0 — ns RD to D7 Enable/Disable TDEN — 60 ns TD — 30 ns RDY Delay RDY Low CCLK to DOUT * This parameter is valid whether the end of not RDY is determined from the RDY/RCLK pin or from the D7 pin. Notes: Serial data is transmitted out on DOUT on the falling edge of CCLK after the byte is input D[7:0]. D[6:0] timing is the same as the write data port of the D7 waveform because D[6:0] are not enabled. CS0 CS1 TWR WR TS D7 TH TWR2 WRITE DATA TDEN TDEN RD RDY TB TRDY CCLK TD DOUT PREVIOUS BYTE D7 D0 D1 D2 D3 5-4533.a Figure 68. Asynchronous Peripheral Configuration Mode Timing Diagram Lucent Technologies Inc. 163 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 51A. OR2CxxA/OR2TxxA Synchronous Peripheral Configuration Mode Timing Characteristics OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2CxxA Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxA Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Parameter D[7:0] Setup Time Symbol Min Max Unit TS 20 — ns D[7:0] Hold Time TH 0 — ns CCLK High Time TCH 50 — ns CCLK Low Time TCL 50 — ns CCLK Frequency FC — 10 MHz CCLK to DOUT TD — 30 ns Note: Serial data is transmitted out on DOUT 1.5 clock cycles after the byte is input D[7:0]. Table 51B. OR2TxxB Synchronous Peripheral Configuration Mode Timing Characteristics OR2TxxB Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxB Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Parameter Symbol Min Max Unit D[7:0] Setup Time TS 15 — ns D[7:0] Hold Time TH 0 — ns CCLK High Time TCH 12.5 — ns CCLK Low Time TCL 12.5 — ns CCLK Frequency FC — 40 MHz CCLK to DOUT TD — 10 ns Note: Serial data is transmitted out on DOUT 1.5 clock cycles after the byte is input D[7:0]. TCH CCLK TINIT_CLK TCL INIT TH TS D[7:0] BYTE 1 BYTE 0 TD DOUT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 RDY 5-4534(F) Figure 69. Synchronous Peripheral Configuration Mode Timing Diagram 164 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 52A. OR2CxxA/OR2TxxA Slave Serial Configuration Mode Timing Characteristics OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2CxxA Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxA Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C Parameter DIN Setup Time DIN Hold Time CCLK High Time CCLK Low Time CCLK Frequency CCLK to DOUT Symbol TS TH TCH TCL FC TD Min 20 0 50 50 — — Max — — — — 10 30 Unit ns ns ns ns MHz ns Note: Serial configuration data is transmitted out on DOUT on the falling edge of CCLK after it is input on DIN. Table 52B. OR2TxxB Slave Serial Configuration Mode Timing Characteristics OR2TxxB Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxB Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Parameter DIN Setup Time DIN Hold Time CCLK High Time CCLK Low Time CCLK Frequency CCLK to DOUT Symbol TS TH TCH TCL FC TD Min 15 0 12.5 12.5 — — Max — — — — 40 10 Unit ns ns ns ns MHz ns Note: Serial configuration data is transmitted out on DOUT on the falling edge of CCLK after it is input on DIN BIT N DIN TS TH CCLK TD DOUT TCL TCH BIT N 5-4535(F) Figure 70. Slave Serial Configuration Mode Timing Diagram Lucent Technologies Inc. 165 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 53A. OR2CxxA/OR2TxxA Slave Parallel Configuration Mode Timing Characteristics OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2CxxA Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxA Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Parameter Symbol Min Max Unit CS0, CS1, WR Setup Time TS1 60 — ns CS0, CS1, WR Hold Time TH1 20 — ns D[7:0] Setup Time TS2 20 — ns D[7:0] Hold Time TH2 0 — ns CCLK High Time TCH 50 — ns CCLK Low Time TCL 50 — ns CCLK Frequency FC — 10 MHz Note: Daisy chaining of FPGAs is not supported in this mode. Table 53B. OR2TxxB Slave Parallel Configuration Mode Timing Characteristics OR2TxxB Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxB Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Symbol Min Max Unit CS0, CS1, WR Setup Time Parameter TS1 — — — CS0, CS1, WR Hold Time TH1 15 — ns D[7:0] Setup Time TS2 15 — ns D[7:0] Hold Time TH2 0 — ns CCLK High Time TCH 12.5 — ns CCLK Low Time TCL 12.5 — ns CCLK Frequency FC — 40 MHz Note: Daisy chaining of FPGAs is not supported in this mode. CS0 CS1 WR TS1 TH1 CCLK TS2 TH2 D[7:0] 5-2848(F) Figure 71. Slave Parallel Configuration Mode Timing Diagram 166 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 54. Series 2 Readback Timing Characteristics OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2CxxA Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxA/B Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA/B Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Parameter Symbol Min Max Unit TS 50 — ns RD_CFGN to CCLK Setup Time RD_CFGN High Width to Abort Readback TRBA 2 — CCLK CCLK Low Time TCL 50 — ns CCLK High Time TCH 50 — ns CCLK Frequency FC — 10 MHz CCLK to RD_DATA Delay TD — 50 ns TRBA RD_CFGN TCL TS CCLK TCH TD RD_DATA BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 0 5-4536(F) Figure 72. Readback Timing Diagram Lucent Technologies Inc. 167 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Timing Characteristics (continued) Table 55. Series 2 Boundary-Scan Timing Characteristics OR2CxxA Commercial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 5%, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2CxxA Industrial: VDD = 5.0 V ± 10%, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxA Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxA Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. OR2TxxB Commercial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, 0 °C ≤ TA ≤ 70 °C; OR2TxxB Industrial: VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 °C ≤ TA ≤ +85 °C. Parameter TDI/TMS to TCK Setup Time Symbol Min Max Unit TS 25 — ns TDI/TMS Hold Time from TCK TH 0 — ns TCK Low Time TCL 50 — ns TCK High Time TCH 50 — ns TD — 20 ns TTCK — 10 MHz TCK to TDO Delay TCK Frequency TCK TS TH TMS TDI TD TDO BSTD(F).2c.r3 Figure 73. Boundary-Scan Timing Diagram 168 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Measurement Conditions VCC GND 1 kΩ TO THE OUTPUT UNDER TEST 50 pF TO THE OUTPUT UNDER TEST 50 pF A. Load Used to Measure Propagation Delay B. Load Used to Measure Rising/Falling Edges 5-3234(F).r1 Figure 74. ac Test Loads TS[I] PAD ac TEST LOADS (SHOWN ABOVE) OUT OUT[I] VDD OUT[I] VDD/2 VSS PAD 1.5 V OUT 0.0 V TPLL TPHH 5-3233(F).ar4 Figure 75. Output Buffer Delays PAD IN IN[I] 3.0 V PAD IN 1.5 V 0.0 V VDD IN[I] VDD/2 VSS TPLL TPHH 5-3235(F).a Figure 76. Input Buffer Delays Lucent Technologies Inc. 169 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Output Buffer Characteristics 50 IOL OUTPUT CURRENT, IO (mA) OR2CxxA 70 IOL OUTPUT CURRENT, IO (mA) 60 50 40 30 40 30 20 IOH 10 IOH 20 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 10 OUTPUT VOLTAGE, VO (V) 5-4635(F) 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 Figure 80. Sinklim (TJ = 125 °C, VDD = 4.5 V) OUTPUT VOLTAGE, VO (V) 150 5-4634(F) IOL 250 OUTPUT CURRENT, IO (mA) 225 IOL 200 175 150 125 125 OUTPUT CURRENT, IO (mA) Figure 77. Sinklim (TJ = 25 °C, VDD = 5.0 V) 100 75 50 IOH 25 100 IOH 75 0 0 1 2 3 4 50 OUTPUT VOLTAGE, VO (V) 25 5-4637(F) 0 0 1 2 3 4 Figure 81. Slewlim (TJ = 125 °C, VDD = 4.5 V) 5 OUTPUT VOLTAGE, VO (V) 175 5-4636(F) 250 OUTPUT CURRENT, IO (mA) 225 IOL 200 175 150 125 150 OUTPUT CURRENT, IO (mA) Figure 78. Slewlim (TJ = 25 °C, VDD = 5.0 V) IOL 125 100 75 50 IOH 25 100 IOH 75 0 0 50 1 2 3 4 OUTPUT VOLTAGE, VO (V) 5-4639(F) 25 0 0 1 2 3 4 Figure 82. Fast (TJ = 125 °C, VDD = 4.5 V) 5 OUTPUT VOLTAGE, VO (V) 5-4638(F) Figure 79. Fast (TJ = 25 °C, VDD = 5.0 V) Lucent Technologies Inc. 170 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Output Buffer Characteristics (continued) 40 OR2TxxA OUTPUT CURRENT, IO (mA) 35 80 OUTPUT CURRENT, IO (mA) 70 IOL 60 50 IOH 40 IOL 30 25 IOH 20 15 10 30 5 20 0 0.0 10 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 OUTPUT VOLTAGE, V O (V) 5-4637(F) 0 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 Figure 86. Sinklim (TJ = 125 °C, VDD = 3.0 V) OUTPUT VOLTAGE, VO (V) 70 5-4637(F) 140 IOL OUTPUT CURRENT, IO (mA) 120 100 80 IOL 60 OUTPUT CURRENT, IO (mA) Figure 83. Sinklim (TJ = 25 °C, VDD = 3.3 V) IOH 50 40 IOH 30 20 10 60 0 40 0.0 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 OUTPUT VOLTAGE, V O (V) 20 5-4637(F) 0 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 Figure 87. Slewlim (TJ = 125 °C, VDD = 3.0 V) 3.0 3.5 OUTPUT VOLTAGE, VO (V) 70 5-4637(F) 140 IOL 120 100 80 IOH IOL 60 OUTPUT CURRENT, IO (mA) Figure 84. Slewlim (TJ = 25 °C, VDD = 3.3 V) OUTPUT CURRENT, IO (mA) 0.5 50 40 IOH 30 20 10 60 0 40 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 OUTPUT VOLTAGE, V O (V) 20 5-4637(F) 0 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 Figure 88. Fast (TJ = 125 °C, VDD = 3.0 V) 3.0 3.5 OUTPUT VOLTAGE, VO (V) 5-4637(F) Figure 85. Fast (TJ = 25 °C, VDD = 3.3 V) 171 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Output Buffer Characteristics (continued) OUTPUT CURRENT, IO (mA) OR2TxxB OUTPUT CURRENT, IO (mA) 90 80 IOL 60 50 IOH 40 30 20 10 0 IOL 45 40 35 IOH 30 25 20 15 10 05 0 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 OUTPUT VOLTAGE, VO (V) 5-7930(F).r1 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 OUTPUT VOLTAGE, VO (V) Figure 92. Sinklim (TJ = 125 °C, VDD = 3.0 V) Figure 89. Sinklim (TJ = 25 °C, VDD = 3.3 V) 180 160 IOL 140 120 100 80 IOH OUTPUT CURRENT, IO (mA) 5-7927(F).r1 OUTPUT CURRENT, IO (mA) 55 50 60 40 110 100 IOL 90 80 70 60 IOH 50 40 30 20 10 0 0.0 20 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 OUTPUT VOLTAGE, VO (V) 5-7931(F).r1 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 Figure 93. Slewlim (TJ = 125 °C, VDD = 3.0 V) OUTPUT VOLTAGE, VO (V) Figure 90. Slewlim (TJ = 25 °C, VDD = 3.3 V) OUTPUT CURRENT, IO (mA) 180 160 IOL 140 120 100 80 IOH 60 40 110 100 IOL 90 80 70 60 IOH 50 40 30 20 10 0 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 OUTPUT VOLTAGE, VO (V) 20 0 OUTPUT CURRENT, IO (mA) 5-7928(F).r1 5-7932(F).r1 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 Figure 94. Fast (TJ = 125 °C, VDD = 3.0 V) OUTPUT VOLTAGE, VO (V) 5-7929(F).r1 Figure 91. Fast (TJ = 25 °C, VDD = 3.3 V) Lucent Technologies Inc. 172 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Package Outline Drawings Terms and Definitions Basic Size (BSC): The basic size of a dimension is the size from which the limits for that dimension are derived by the application of the allowance and the tolerance. Design Size: The design size of a dimension is the actual size of the design, including an allowance for fit and tolerance. Minimum (MIN) or Maximum (MAX): Indicates the minimum or maximum allowable size of a dimension. Reference (REF): The reference dimension is an untoleranced dimension used for informational purposes only. It is a repeated dimension or one that can be derived from other values in the drawing. Typical (TYP): When specified after a dimension, this indicates the repeated design size if a tolerance is specified or repeated basic size if a tolerance is not specified. Lucent Technologies Inc. 173 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Package Outline Drawings (continued) 84-Pin PLCC Dimensions are in millimeters. 30.353 MAX 29.083 ± 0.076 PIN #1 IDENTIFIER ZONE 11 1 75 12 74 29.083 ± 0.076 30.353 MAX 32 54 33 53 5.080 MAX SEATING PLANE 1.27 TYP 0.330/0.533 0.51 MIN TYP 0.10 5-2347r.16 174 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Package Outline Drawings (continued) 100-Pin TQFP Dimensions are in millimeters. 16.00 ± 0.20 14.00 ± 0.20 PIN #1 IDENTIFIER ZONE 100 76 1 75 14.00 ± 0.20 16.00 ± 0.20 25 51 26 50 DETAIL A DETAIL B 1.40 ± 0.05 1.60 MAX SEATING PLANE 0.08 0.05/0.15 0.50 TYP 1.00 REF 0.106/0.200 0.25 GAGE PLANE 0.19/0.27 SEATING PLANE 0.45/0.75 DETAIL A 0.08 M DETAIL B 5-2146r.15 Lucent Technologies Inc. 175 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Package Outline Drawings (continued) 144-Pin TQFP Dimensions are in millimeters. 22.00 ± 0.20 20.00 ± 0.20 PIN #1 IDENTIFIER ZONE 144 109 1 108 20.00 ± 0.20 22.00 ± 0.20 36 73 37 72 DETAIL A DETAIL B 1.40 ± 0.05 1.60 MAX SEATING PLANE 0.08 0.05/0.15 0.50 TYP 1.00 REF 0.25 0.106/0.200 GAGE PLANE 0.19/0.27 SEATING PLANE 0.45/0.75 DETAIL A 0.08 M DETAIL B 5-3815r.5 176 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Package Outline Drawings (continued) 160-Pin QFP Dimensions are in millimeters. 31.20 ± 0.20 28.00 ± 0.20 PIN #1 IDENTIFIER ZONE 160 121 1 120 28.00 ± 0.20 31.20 ± 0.20 81 40 41 80 DETAIL A DETAIL B 3.42 ± 0.25 4.07 MAX SEATING PLANE 0.10 0.65 TYP 0.25 MIN 1.60 REF 0.13/0.23 0.25 GAGE PLANE 0.22/0.38 SEATING PLANE 0.12 M 0.73/1.03 DETAIL A DETAIL B 5-2132r.12 Lucent Technologies Inc. 177 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Package Outline Drawings (continued) 208-Pin SQFP Dimensions are in millimeters. 30.60 ± 0.20 28.00 ± 0.20 PIN #1 IDENTIFIER ZONE 208 157 1 156 28.00 ± 0.20 30.60 ± 0.20 105 52 53 104 DETAIL A DETAIL B 3.40 ± 0.20 4.10 MAX SEATING PLANE 0.08 0.50 TYP 0.25 MIN 1.30 REF 0.25 0.090/0.200 GAGE PLANE SEATING PLANE 0.17/0.27 0.50/0.75 DETAIL A 0.10 M DETAIL B 5-2196r.13 178 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Package Outline Drawings (continued) 208-Pin SQFP2 Dimensions are in millimeters. 30.60 ± 0.20 28.00 ± 0.20 21.0 REF PIN #1 IDENTIFIER ZONE 208 157 1 156 21.0 REF 28.00 ± 0.20 30.60 ± 0.20 105 52 53 104 EXPOSED HEAT SINK APPEARS ON BOTTOM SURFACE: CHIP BONDED FACE UP (SEE DETAIL C) DETAIL A DETAIL B 3.40 ± 0.20 4.10 MAX SEATING PLANE 0.08 0.50 TYP 0.25 MIN 1.30 REF 0.25 0.090/0.200 GAGE PLANE SEATING PLANE 0.17/0.2 0.50/0.75 DETAIL A 0.10 M DETAIL B 5-3828.a Lucent Technologies Inc. 179 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Package Outline Drawings (continued) 240-Pin SQFP Dimensions are in millimeters. 34.60 ± 0.20 32.00 ± 0.20 PIN #1 IDENTIFIER ZONE 240 181 1 180 32.00 ± 0.20 34.60 ± 0.20 60 121 61 120 DETAIL A DETAIL B 3.40 ± 0.20 4.10 MAX SEATING PLANE 0.08 0.50 TYP 0.25 MIN 1.30 REF 0.25 0.090/0.200 GAGE PLANE SEATING PLANE 0.17/0.27 0.50/0.75 DETAIL A 0.10 M DETAIL B 5-2718r.8 180 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Package Outline Drawings (continued) 240-Pin SQFP2 Dimensions are in millimeters. 34.60 ± 0.20 32.00 ± 0.20 24. 2 REF 240 1.30 REF PIN #1 IDENTI FIER ZONE 181 1 180 0.25 GAGE PLANE SEATING PLANE 0.50/0.75 24.2 REF DETAIL A 32.00 ± 0.20 34.60 ± 0.20 0.090/0.200 0.17/0.27 0.10 M DETAIL B 60 121 61 EXPOSED HEAT SINK APPEARS ON TOP SURFACE IN CHIP FACE-DOWN VERSION OR BOTTOM SURFACE IN CHIP FACE-UP VERSION 120 DETAIL B DETAIL A 3.40 ± 0.20 4.10 MAX SEATING PLANE 0.08 0.50 TYP 0.25 MIN CHIP BONDED FACE UP CHIP COPPER HEAT SINK 5-3825r.8 Lucent Technologies Inc. 181 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Package Outline Drawings (continued) 256-Pin PBGA Dimensions are in millimeters. 27.00 ± 0.20 +0.70 24.00 –0.00 A1 BALL IDENTIFIER ZONE 24.00 +0.70 –0.00 27.00 ± 0.20 MOLD COMPOUND PWB 1.17 ± 0.05 0.36 ± 0.04 2.13 ± 0.19 SEATING PLANE 0.20 SOLDER BALL 0.60 ± 0.10 19 SPACES @ 1.27 = 24.13 CENTER ARRAY FOR THERMAL ENHANCEMENT A1 BALL CORNER Y W V U T R P N M L K J H G F E D C B A 0.75 ± 0.15 19 SPACES @ 1.27 = 24.13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 11 14 13 16 15 18 17 20 19 5-4406r.6 182 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Package Outline Drawings (continued) 304-Pin SQFP Dimensions are in millimeters. 42.60 ± 0.20 40.00 ± 0.20 PIN #1 IDENTIFIER ZONE 304 229 1 228 40.00 ± 0.20 42.60 ± 0.20 76 153 77 152 DETAIL A DETAIL B 3.40 ± 0.20 4.10 MAX SEATING PLANE 0.08 0.50 TYP 0.25 MIN 1.30 REF 0.090/0.200 0.25 GAGE PLANE 0.17/0.27 SEATING PLANE 0.10 M 0.50/0.75 DETAIL A DETAIL B 5-3307r.8 Lucent Technologies Inc. 183 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Package Outline Drawings (continued) 304-Pin SQFP2 Dimensions are in millimeters. 42.60 ± 0.20 40.00 ± 0.20 31.2 REF PIN #1 IDENTIFIER ZONE 304 229 1 228 31.2 REF 40.00 ± 0.20 42.60 ± 0.20 76 153 77 152 EXPOSED HEAT SINK APPEARS ON TOP SURFACE IN CHIP FACE-DOWN VERSION OR BOTTOM SURFACE IN CHIP FACE-UP VERSION DETAIL A DETAIL B 3.40 ± 0.20 4.10 MAX SEATING PLANE 0.08 0.50 TYP 0.25 MIN 1.30 REF 0.25 0.090/0.200 GAGE PLANE 0.17/0.27 SEATING PLANE 0.10 M 0.50/0.75 DETAIL A DETAIL B 5-3827(F).r8 184 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Package Outline Drawings (continued) 352-Pin PBGA Dimensions are in millimeters. 35.00 ± 0.20 +0.70 30.00 –0.00 A1 BALL IDENTIFIER ZONE 30.00 +0.70 –0.00 35.00 ± 0.20 MOLD COMPOUND PWB 1.17 ± 0.05 0.56 ± 0.06 2.33 ± 0.21 SEATING PLANE 0.20 0.60 ± 0.10 SOLDER BALL 25 SPACES @ 1.27 = 31.75 CENTER ARRAY FOR THERMAL ENHANCEMENT A1 BALL CORNER AF AE AD AC AB AA Y W V U T R P N M L K J H G F E D C B A 0.75 ± 0.15 25 SPACES @ 1.27 = 31.75 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 5-4407r.4 Lucent Technologies Inc. 185 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Package Outline Drawings (continued) 432-Pin EBGA Dimensions are in millimeters. 40.00 ± 0.10 A1 BALL IDENTIFIER ZONE 40.00 ± 0.10 0.91 ± 0.06 1.54 ± 0.13 SEATING PLANE 0.20 SOLDER BALL 0.63 ± 0.07 30 SPACES @ 1.27 = 38.10 AL AK AJ AH AG AF AD AB Y AE 0.75 ± 0.15 AC AA W V U T P M K H F 30 SPACES @ 1.27 = 38.10 R N L J G E D C B A A1 BALL CORNER 1 3 2 5 4 7 6 9 8 11 10 12 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 5-4409r.3 186 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Ordering Information Example: OR2C12A-4 S 240 TEMPERATURE RANGE DEVICE TYPE SPEED GRADE NUMBER OF PINS PACKAGE TYPE OR2C12A, -4 speed grade, 240-pin shrink quad flat pack, commercial temperature. Table 56. FPGA Voltage Options Device Voltage OR2CxxA OR2TxxA OR2TxxB 5.0 V 3.3 V 3.3 V Table 57. FPGA Temperature Options Symbol Description Temperature (Blank) I Commercial Industrial 0 °C to 70 °C –40 °C to +85 °C Table 58. FPGA Package Options Symbol BA BC J M PS S T Description Plastic Ball Grid Array (PBGA) Enhanced Ball Grid Array (EBGA) Quad Flat Package (QFP) Plastic Leaded Chip Carrier (PLCC) Power Quad Shrink Flat Package (SQFP2) Shrink Quad Flat Package (SQFP) Thin Quad Flat Package (TQFP) Lucent Technologies Inc. 187 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Ordering Information (continued) Table 59. ORCA OR2CxxA/OR2TxxA Series Package Matrix M84 T100 T144 J160 208-Pin EIAJ SQFP/ SQFP2 S208/ PS208 BA256 304-Pin EIAJ SQFP/ SQFP2 S304/ PS304 BA352 BC432 OR2C/2T04A CI CI CI CI CI — — — — — OR2C/2T06A CI CI CI CI CI CI CI — — — OR2C/2T08A CI — — CI CI CI CI — — — OR2C/2T10A CI — — CI CI CI CI — CI — OR2C/2T12A CI — — — CI CI CI CI CI — Packages 84-Pin PLCC 100-Pin TQFP 144-Pin TQFP 160-Pin QFP 240-Pin EIAJ SQFP/ SQFP2 S240/ PS240 256-Pin PBGA 352-Pin PBGA 432-Pin EBGA OR2C/2T15A CI — — — CI CI CI CI CI CI OR2C/2T26A — — — — CI CI — CI CI CI OR2C/2T40A — — — — CI CI — CI CI CI 240-Pin EIAJ SQFP/ SQFP2 S240/ PS240 256-Pin PBGA 352-Pin PBGA 432-Pin EBGA BA352 BC432 Key: C = commercial, I = industrial. Table 60. ORCA OR2TxxB Series Package Matrix M84 T100 T144 J160 208-Pin EIAJ SQFP/ SQFP2 S208/ PS208 BA256 304-Pin EIAJ SQFP/ SQFP2 S304/ PS304 OR2T15B — — — — CI CI CI — CI — OR2T40B — — — — CI CI — — CI CI Packages 84-Pin PLCC 100-Pin TQFP 144-Pin TQFP 160-Pin QFP Key: C = commercial, I = industrial. Notes: The package options with the SQFP/SQFP2 designation in the table above use the SQFP package for all densities up to and including the OR2C/T15A/B, while the OR2C/T26A and the OR2C/2T40A/B use the SQFP2. The OR2TxxA and OR2TxxB series is not offered in the 304-pin SQFP/SQFP2 packages. The OR2C40A is not offered in a 352-pin PBGA. 188 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Index G A Absolute Maximum Ratings, 129 Adder (see LUT Operating Modes) Architecture Overview, 5 PLC, 22 PIC, 25 B Bidirectional Buffers (BIDIs), 14, 17, 18, 20, 22 (see also Routing and SLIC) Bit Stream (see FPGA Configuration) Bit Stream Error Checking, 47 (see also FPGA States of Operation) Boundary Scan, 54—59 C Clock Distribution Network, 37—39 Selecting Clock Input Pins, 39 Clock Enable (CE), 1, 5, 7, 15, 16, 24, 134 Comparator (see LUT Operating Modes) Configuration (see FPGA States of Operation or FPGA Configuration) Control Inputs, 5, 7 GSR (see GSRN) GSRN, 6, 7, 16, 37, 134 I IEEE Standard 1149.1, 1 (see also Boundary Scan) Initialization (see FPGA States of Operation) Input/Output Buffers (see PICs) Measurement Conditions, 169 Output Buffer Characteristics, 170—172 J JTAG (see Boundary Scan) L Look-up Table (LUT) Operating Modes, 7—15 Adder-Subtractor Submode, 10 Counter Submode, 11 Equality Comparators, 11 Logic Modes, 7—9 Memory Mode, 12—15 Asynchronous Memory, 12 Synchronous Memory, 13 Multiplier Submode, 11 Ripple Mode, 10 LSR, 5—7, 15—16 E Electrical Characteristics, 130 Error Checking (see FPGA Configuration) M Maximum Ratings (see Absolute Maximum Ratings) Multiplier (see LUT Operating Modes) F 5 V Tolerant I/O, 26—27, 64 FPGA Configuration Configuration Frame Format, 43—46 Configuration Modes, 47, 158—160 Asynchronous Peripheral Mode, 49, 163 Daisy-Chaining, 51 Master Parallel Mode, 47 Master Serial Mode, 162 Slave Parallel Mode, 48, 50, 161, 166 Slave Serial Mode, 49—50, 165 Synchronous Peripheral Mode, 48, 164 Data Format, 43—45 Using ORCA Foundry to Generate RAM Data, 43 FPGA States of Operation, 40—43 Configuration, 41 Initialization, 40 Other Configuration Options, 43 Partial Reconfiguration, 43 Reconfiguration, 42 Start-Up, 41 189 O ORCA Foundry Development System Overview, 4 Ordering Information, 189 Package Matrix, 190 Package Options, 189 Temperature Options, 189 Voltage Options, 189 Output (see PICs) P Package Outline Drawings, 174—186 Package Matrix, 190 Package Outline Drawings, 173 84-Pin PLCC, 174 100-Pin TQFP, 175 144-Pin TQFP, 176 Lucent Technologies Inc. Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Index (continued) 160-Pin QFP, 177 208-Pin SQFP, 178 208-Pin SQFP2, 179 240-Pin SQFP, 180 240-Pin SQFP2, 181 256-Pin PBGA, 182 304-Pin SQFP, 183 304-Pin SQFP2, 184 352-Pin PBGA, 185 432-Pin EBGA, 186 Terms and Definitions, 173 Pin Information, 71—125 84-Pin PLCC, 71 100-Pin TQFP, 73 144-Pin TQFP, 75 160-Pin QFP, 77 208-Pin SQFP/SQFP2, 81 240-Pin SQFP/SQFP2, 86 256-Pin PBGA, 92 304-Pin SQFP/SQFP2, 99 352-Pin PBGA, 106 432-Pin EBGA Pinout, 116 Package Compatibility, 68—70 Pin Descriptions, 71 Power Dissipation, 61—65 5 V Tolerant I/O, 64 OR2CxxA, 61 OR2TxxA, 63 Programmable Function Unit (PFU), 5—16 Control Inputs, 5, 7 Operating Modes, 7—15 Latches/Flip-Flops, 15—16 Programmable Input/Output Cells (PICs), 25—31 5 V Tolerant I/O, 26 Architecture, 29—30 Inputs, 25 Outputs, 26 Open-Drain Output Option, 26 Propagation Delays, 26 Overview, 25 Zero-Hold Input, 25 Programmable Logic Cells (PLCs), 5—24 Architecture, 22—24 Latches/Flip-Flops, 15—16 PFU, 5—16 Routing, 17—24 Reconfiguration (see FPGA States of Operation) Routing 3-Statable Bidirectional Buffers, 17—18, 148 Clock Routing, 24, 149—153 (see also Clock Distribution Network) Configurable Interconnect Points (CIPs), 17 Fast-Carry Routing, 24 Inter-PLC Routing Resources, 18—19 Interquad Routing, 5, 17, 32—36 Intra-PLC Routing Resources, 18 Minimizing Routing Delay, 20 PLC Routing, 17—24, 34 Programmable Corner Cell Routing, 37 PIC Routing, 27—31 S Boundary Scan, 54–59 Global 3-State Control (TS_ALL), 37, 66 Global Set/Reset (GSRN), 7, 16, 37 Internal Oscillator, 37 Readback Logic, 37 Start-up, 41 (see also FPGA States of Operation) Subtractor (see LUT Operating Modes) System Clock (see Clock Distribution Network) T 3-state (see Bidirectional Buffers, TS_ALL) Timing Characteristics, 132–168 Asynchronous Peripheral Configuration Mode, 163 Boundary-Scan Timing, 168 Clock Timing, 149 General Configuration Mode Timing, 158 Master Parallel Configuration Mode, 162 Master Serial Configuration Mode, 161 PFU Timing, 132 PIO Timing, 154 PLC Timing, 148 Readback Timing, 167 Slave Parallel Configuration Mode, 166 Slave Serial Configuration Mode, 165 Tolerant I/O, 26 (see also 5 V Tolerant I/O) TS_ALL, 1, 37, 66 U—Z Zero-hold Inputs, 25 R RAM (see also FPGA Configuration), 17, 44, 135, 142 Dual-port, 3, 7, 13—15 Single-port, 3, 7, 12—15 Recommended Operating Conditions, 129 Lucent Technologies Inc. 190 Data Sheet June 1999 ORCA Series 2 FPGAs Notes Lucent Technologies Inc. 191 For additional information, contact your Microelectronics Group Account Manager or the following: http://www.lucent.com/micro or for FPGA information, http://www.lucent.com/orca INTERNET: [email protected] E-MAIL: N. AMERICA: Microelectronics Group, Lucent Technologies Inc., 555 Union Boulevard, Room 30L-15P-BA, Allentown, PA 18103 1-800-372-2447, FAX 610-712-4106 (In CANADA: 1-800-553-2448, FAX 610-712-4106) ASIA PACIFIC: Microelectronics Group, Lucent Technologies Singapore Pte. Ltd., 77 Science Park Drive, #03-18 Cintech III, Singapore 118256 Tel. (65) 778 8833, FAX (65) 777 7495 CHINA: Microelectronics Group, Lucent Technologies (China) Co., Ltd., A-F2, 23/F, Zao Fong Universe Building, 1800 Zhong Shan Xi Road, Shanghai 200233 P. R. China Tel. (86) 21 6440 0468, ext. 316, FAX (86) 21 6440 0652 JAPAN: Microelectronics Group, Lucent Technologies Japan Ltd., 7-18, Higashi-Gotanda 2-chome, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo 141, Japan Tel. (81) 3 5421 1600, FAX (81) 3 5421 1700 EUROPE: Data Requests: MICROELECTRONICS GROUP DATALINE: Tel. (44) 1189 324 299, FAX (44) 1189 328 148 Technical Inquiries: GERMANY: (49) 89 95086 0 (Munich), UNITED KINGDOM: (44) 1344 865 900 (Ascot), FRANCE: (33) 1 40 83 68 00 (Paris), SWEDEN: (46) 8 594 607 00 (Stockholm), FINLAND: (358) 9 4354 2800 (Helsinki), ITALY: (39) 02 6608131 (Milan), SPAIN: (34) 1 807 1441 (Madrid) Lucent Technologies Inc. reserves the right to make changes to the product(s) or information contained herein without notice. No liability is assumed as a result of their use or application. No rights under any patent accompany the sale of any such product(s) or information. ORCA is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies Inc. Foundry is a trademark of Xilinx Inc. Copyright © 1999 Lucent Technologies Inc. All Rights Reserved June 1999 DS99-094FPGA (Replaces DS98-022FPGA)